Home

Honeywell HC900 Process Control Designer Software User Manual

1. This will return the associated configuration to EDIT mode Feedback will be the monitor button unpressed and all open monitor windows will disappear The FBD Worksheet background returns to white and the eye disappears from the cursor Attention f you return from EDITmode to Monitor mode all your previously opened monitor windows will appear if the same configuration Logic Flow Overview In Monitor Mode Logic Flow is shown within the Configuration Worksheet Monitor Window Soft Wires are identified to represent the Logic state at the pin of the source in monitor mode Function Block pin values can be monitored briefly or you can stick the values on display until you dismiss them Analog Values are in decimal format and Digital States are On Off Digital Signal Tags and corresponding Connectors at the block pins include color coded representations for state changes Page Connectors include color coded representations for state changes Logic Inversion indicators are pictorially identified on the block and are color coded to identify logic states impeding or permitting logic flow CAUTION During Live Monitoring especially fast scan it is possible to see transient states where the block output is inconsistent with its input values This occurs because it is possible for the input values and outputs values to be taken from different controller execution cycles Therefore either the viewed inputs or outputs may be older
2. O Diaa gah Ehi Fru Scn esas IK L Method 2 In the custom map select an Item Filter then click on a starting address in the Item column Note If adding system register parameters you must use this method 276 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Modbus Register Addresses Adding function block parameters to custom map Hybiid Coste Benigpeer HC D CA Rev 4 3 Hed Config gt GBT E em Mardi Ameren yie gi l X Leh LA mee C70 Fy ay Hea Config 25 ont 4 E eple at gt Fein Bk Dagaa fh Open Hee po Fileas Fipem D ain Sine ange Files Open Backup Filet Open mE Filez Candan i asio Ej filsoeMorics EJ Sond Seki E inaghi EJ Mata akies j insiy Synar Ej basga a 7 ame amp is a Haga Custom Modbus Map Replace mapihi Ered SectaPeiden Timura Da Pai bi nibus aian data Shoes Page biber a T Hetaa OF ai kter Fits i re ae 1 Use Item Filter to narrow the list of mappable blocks 2 Click on a starting address to see the list of blocks 3 Click on any block to add it to the map In both methods the following box appears listing all available parameters for the block T selected Revision 15 September 2013 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 277 Modbus Register Addresses Adding function block parameters to custom map Function Block Mo
3. Watch Summary Window Worksheet A Worksheet is a logical partition of a configuration A configuration is built using three main Worksheet types Controller Display for Legacy 559 1042 I O configuration and Function Blocks A fourth worksheet type Utilities included Maintenance functions for the controller 10 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 File Browser Window User Interface File Browser Window The File Browser Window is a dockable window listing open Configuration Files Recipe Files Data storage Files and Backup Files as show below It allows you to move quickly between open files and individual worksheets within configuration files You can collapse or expand the tree branches and you can enlarge or shrink the size of the window im Open Configuration Files Hi H C505 Rev 6 0 Ped_ Config 50S 2 El Controller Hy SAMEER Process Worksheets PID Loop O Logic Timing Alarms amp Monitoring Multi Zone Fumace Sequencing Pump Control Boiler Control Extended Boiler Vacuum Fumace PID Case Satety Worksheets Pump Control Safety Configuration 6 Alarms amp Events Safety Contiguration 1 Safety Contiguration 1 vbn Recipe Ales FE Recipe Fed_Recipe Open Data Storage Ales FE Data Storage Ped_DataStorage N Open Files El ri HCSITHO OS Rev 6 0 HO900ControllerBackup El Controller BE CONTROLLER 3 Process Worksheets Process Contiguration 1 Eg Safet
4. 3 The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list 4 Click on X to exit box Refer to the Serial Port S2 Port Status Indicators for status indications possible cause and actions to correct the problem 465 Port Diagnostics Ort Port Diagnostic Port Status Messages Recernved Data Link Errors Application Errors Protocol Port Baud Rate Clear Statistics Serial Port S2 Port Status Indicators The Serial Port S2 Diagnostic Summary dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list Possible Cause Controller Action Serial Port S2 Good N A N A N A Diagnostics 1 Application Error Atleast 1 response l Rack 1 monitor blocks At host determine to a host resulted COMPORT DIAG is which message is in an exception set to WARNING causing the code or NAK 2 Rack 1 monitor block s exception code and RACK OK pin is fix turned off 3 ASYS block s HW OK pin is turned off Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 239 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics Data Link Failure A large number of Rack 1 monitor block s Check baud rate messages are COMPORT DIAG is g Check resulting in data link set to FAILED connectors errors Rack 1 monitor block s _ Check cable RACK OK pin IS polarity turned off Isolate cabling ASYS block s HW OK from electrical pin is turned off interference If configured as a IfRS232 to Modbus Mas
5. Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 219 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics C70R C75 Diagnostic Overview Controller Timne 5 9705 2 38 31 PM System Diagnostics Good CPU Diagnostics Good Memon Diagnostics Good Real Time Clock Diagnostics Good Communication Port Diagnostics Good Rack Comm Diagnostic Good Rack I0 Diagnostics Good Power Supply Diagnostic Good Reserve Avallable ON Redundancy Link Diagnostics Good Hardware okay ON Controller Mode RUN LOCE Loop Capacity Jz Product Type HLSO0 C OR Cycle Time 5 0 53 CPU used 5 18 Peak Time 5 0 03 CE Overrun 0 Fast Cycle Time 5 0 05 Fast CPU used 3 90 Fast Peak Time 5 0 04 Fast CB Overrun U 220 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications Controller Diagnostics Status Indications For C30 C50 C70 the Controller Diagnostics window appears For C70R the Diagnostics Overview window appears C30 C50 C70 Controller Diagnostics parameters Possible Cause Controller Action System Diagnostics Forced Output Invalid Config Switch Fault Invalid Change Of Mode Safety Configuration mismatch Controller is in RUN mode A block has an output that is forced A configuration that exceeds the loop capacity of the controller was downloaded or an invalid configuration exists An empty database is cre
6. Address 192 168 1 254 Y Protocol Modbus A TCF Speed bps Na cee Select the controller to monitor using the Port and Address fields on this dialog The dialog box also indicates the Protocol and Baud rate for the selected controller Click the OK button on this dialog to enter monitor mode for this configuration The background of the function block diagram worksheet changes to yellow and the cursor includes the Monitor icon Eye with the arrow See Visual Indi rs for Moni The Monitor Toolbar will appear whose buttons you can use to toggle show or hide the various monitor windows These windows can also be toggled using menu items on the Monitor menu When exiting monitor mode any monitor windows still open will be closed and will be re opened at their same positions when monitor mode is re entered for this configuration 190 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode When Monitor Mode is selected there are several indications that the configuration is in Monitor Mode 1 The Connected indicator on the Status Bar will blink to show that the controller whose name appears next to it is being monitored Comected Fumscet m Paos NYA 1 i 2 The cursor changes to include the Monitor icon Eye along with the arrow 3 The word lt Monitoring gt appears in the configuration Title Bar at the
7. From the Selected Tags List drop down menu select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list The default selection is ALL Enter the group title Use any mix of numbers letters and spaces Select a Tag Name from the Select Tag List Click on ADD the selected signal tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in the Selected Tags field OR Select a position in the Selected Tags field then click on INSERT The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required Repeat the selection for up to 12 tags for each group Click OK Trend Display Tag Groups A selection of horizontal or vertical trend format displays is available to provide a historical record of recent control performance Trend displays may be configured with analog or digital points on each display Trend displays allow a user selectable time period of from 0 5 to 24 hours each Each display will retain from 1 5 to 6 screens of historical data that may be recalled from memory Trend graph displays provide traditional value versus time plots in horizontal or vertical orientation Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags and digital signal tags Attention If you want trends displayed logarithmically make sure that the first signal tag selected has the decimal place setting Exponential Notation See Signal Tags 68 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15
8. Function Block Diagram Rules Do not place Function Block icons over another or overlap pins A pin output may be soft wired to any number of inputs of other blocks You may change direction for soft wiring with a left mouse click up to 6 direction changes You may use Signal tags and Connectors to substitute for soft wired connections and for reference across diagram pages right click on the input or output pins 5 You may move a block or group of blocks by selecting blocks or boxing a group of blocks You may cross soft wires You can cut copy or paste from File menu or Right click on the diagram one or more blocks by selecting or boxing within an application or between active applications allows function block libraries to be stored AUN N OD Saving A Configuration File To Save an Existing File Select SAVE from the FILE menu or from the Main Toolbar Ei If there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0 the data is saved automatically If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0 The Designer will notify you that there are unconnected inputs and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs Click Yes to view the summary of unconnected inputs Click Log File to save the list to a text file if desired Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 135 September 2013 Function Block Diagrams Saving A Configuration File
9. Right Mouse Click See page 29 Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 133 September 2013 How to Configure Function Block Parameters Accessing Block Details How to Configure Function Block Parameters Accessing Block Details Overview After function blocks are placed on the function block diagram they can be configured Most dialog boxes are simple dialog boxes that contain the assigned block number and execution order of the block Some dialog boxes contain various parameters and options that are configured based on the particular type of function block For example I O blocks contain Rack Module and Channel addresses and function block configuration parameters Certain function blocks contain a Modbus address Tabbed dialog boxes will be used for the most complicated blocks for example PID to organize the data for you Procedure To access Block Properties double click on the selected function block and the corresponding dialog box es will be displayed The dialog box es display s all parameters having to do with the selected function block Enter a physical address if applicable Enter any Tag Names Enter all parameters on each tab if present When all the changes are entered click OK to enter or CANCEL While in a Controller configuration click the right mouse button to allow access to Topic Help Monitor functions Properties Dialog Boxes and Cut Copy and Paste functions Some function block
10. The display sequences through a list of up to 12 analog or digital signals or analog or digital variables Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags digital signal tags analog variables and digital variables Select the Single Point tab then Select Display Group from the drop down menu Analog signal tags digital signal tags analog variables and digital variables will be displayed in the Selected Tags field From the Selected Tags List drop down menu select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list The default selection is ALL Enter the group title Use any mix of numbers letters and spaces Select a Tag Name from the Select Tag List Click on ADD the selected signal tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in the Selected Tags field OR Select a position in the Selected Tags field then click on INSERT The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required Repeat the selection for up to 12 tags for each group Click OK Multi Point Panel Display Tag Groups This selection lets you configure 8 groups of Multi Point Panel Displays Multi Point Panel displays present the current value state for up to seven Analog or Digital signal tags or analog or digital variables in the controller Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags digital signal tags analog variables and digital variables Select the Multi Poin
11. Alarm Group Click to open the Alarm Group Configuration dialog box Configuration It lets you configuregroups of alarm points in the controller to report be Configure Click to open the Configure Event List Dialog Box Event List It lets you configuretags to events from the controller to be reported at the Ol or via E Mail Operator Click to open the O I File Names for Disk Storage Dialog Box talons File It lets you configure root names for the Operator Interface Start Up Click to open the Start Up Display Configuration Dialog Box Display It lets you configurethe Operator Interface Start Up display Configuration j i o Message Click to open the Message Display Configuration Dialog Box Display It lets you configurea set of message help displays for the Configuration Operator Interface Unlock Click to open the Unlock Worksheets dialog box Enter a Worksheets password and click Unlock to unlock all worksheets Operator Interface Displays The Operator Interface uses a color display to provide a variety of screen presentations for viewing control loops setpoint programs and other analog and digital status Modifying and customizing the operator interface is done using the Designer software With the software data points can be identified with ASCII tag names Once named these data points may be accessed by the operator interface using a standard set of display formats Customized display access and the assignm
12. Check Reserve CPU the Lead CPU Diagnostics for 4 There may be other additional details physical problems with the Reserve CPU Hardware Failure There may be physical System will not be able to Replace the Lead CPU problems with the Lead perform a failover CPU 26 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 NO Diagnostics Rack Diagnostics Rack Diagnostics Introduction The Designer provides live monitoring Rack diagnostics The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start up and during on line operation 1 Select the Rack Diagnostics from the Monitor drop down menu or from the Monitor Toolbar This window can be launched from the Utilities Worksheet 2 The Rack Diagnostic Summary dialog box will appear 3 Select a Rack from the Monitoring Rack drop down menu on the dialog box The information for the selected rack will appear on the dialog box 4 The summary window will provide Controller status and diagnostic information for the selected Rack Rack in Configuration ON or Off High CJ Temp status On or Off Revision Level of the Rack Read Only Number of Slots Read Only Rack Diagnostics The status of the selected rack Refer to Controller Diagnostics Status Indications for diagnostic messages Not all diagnostics appear for expansion racks Power Supply Diagnostics C70R only Status of the rack s power supply supplies See Rack Diagnostics
13. Ett ft tT IKE This pag A E a E SHEHE wen feos Tf T EL ike this o sao as ang om Balch o CEE E A EA A Kew l l Tine Disabled Enabled Disabled Point Log Storage Enable Conditions The figure below shows examples of Point Log Storage Enable conditions Notice that it occurs unless Point Log Disable or Data Storage Disable is selected For Batch Point Log storage notice that all three enables must be on The figure shows that storage does not actually occur until the Start Time occurs and then at every Storage Interval thereafter For On Command Point Log storage notice the samples are taken the instant Point Log Enable is enabled but not at intervals Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 83 September 2013 Data Storage Data Storage Enable Conditions te HH eet tty Ett ft pt te FT CE EEE EEE EE Like this Point Log ne tt Ef t Lo wee TPE EEE Data Storage Enable onl peal EHEHE Conti then TTT Taek stored eo Log La F x TT i Se e e e em HE E E Key iZ 2a oo 13 30 200 S30 S00 S30 woo be 30 S30 4 ASOT Tiie _ Start start Time 1 15 pum Disabled f Disabled Time nabled Storage Interval 30 minutes Alarm Event Storage Enable Conditions The figure below shows examples of Alarm Event Enable conditions Notice that Continuous Alarm Event storage occurs unless Alarm Event Disable and Data Storage Disable is selected
14. It will be highlighted in a dotted line showing each vertex 120 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Connecting Disconnecting Blocks Sto 1 COO Doo m AEP FF ALi TRY ALZ JT z TRE m BLAG Ei JE m WCRE MODE m HCI BCO T Click on a vertex and drag into the new position and release REP SP m FRY ALi i men TAY ALZ TAG BS ae Sul ATI s MPAR MOCE BEI BCO NOTE A single L shaped wire cannot be repositioned If you must alter the routing delete the wire and add one with a vertex Disconnecting To disconnect an existing wire Click on the end point of the wire to be deleted The wire is highlighted Pull down the EDIT menu and select Delete or press the DELETE key NOTE A single L shaped wire cannot be repositioned If you must alter the routing delete the wire and add one with a vertex See also Wire nodes Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 121 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Adding a Variable Adding a Variable There are two types of variables Analog and Digital Procedure Right click on an Input pin and select Drop Analog Variable or Drop Digital Variable from the dropdown list OR From the Worksheet Toolbox group Other Items drag and drop the Variable symbol to the function block diagra
15. Logic monitoring is appropriate for static conditions Soft Wire Identification Solid Green On Dotted Red Off Logic State at the Output Pin ON The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in solid GREEN Logic State at the Output Pin OFF The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in dashed RED Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 201 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Logic Flow ve gt 0003 000 ED ALITTI 0003 001 HOTAD 4 0003 000 me o ee 0101 001 NOTIN 2 0003 001 see 0102 001 Solid Red On Dotted Green Off Logic State at the Output Pin ON The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in solid RED Logic State at the Output Pin OFF The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in dotted GREEN Ul 0003 000 OFF ENAAANANNNANANAANNANANANANANANNI 0003 004 NOTiO1 1 003 000 Se o Meee 01014 001 NOTIO2 2 0003 001 0102 001 202 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Logic Flow CYCLING DIGITAL OUTPUTS ae D05 bode 33 p ga a0 bois 31 W oiio poe DOUTE 9 01031
16. Marginal Port O See Scanner 2 Link B Status Indicators Good Port I O A See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators Good Port I O B See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 285 September 2013 Redundancy Reserve CPU Status Indicators Parameter Not in Configuration See Scanner 2 Link Indicators Possible Cause Controller Action Scanner2 Rack n a Scanner 2 Link Network Status Indicators Diagnostics Data Link Failure See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators Indicators Hardware Failure See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators Indicators Port A B Cable See Scanner 2 Link Mismatch Status Indicators Protocol Mismatch See Scanner 2 Link nen Indicators Q Q O el CPU Slot Position CPU A a Ais the Lead Reserve CPUB CPU B is the Lead Reserve CPU is missing Reserve CPU is not The lead CPU will 1 Install reserve CPU installed or not continue to control the 2 Apply power to reserve powered process but failover is CPU CPU rack backplane Loe 3 Replace CPU rack failure backplane 4 Call Honeywell service Power Supply Unknown Type CPU cannot identify None None the Power Supply Type CPU identified a None None 24VD DC power supply CPU identified a None None Low wattage power supply CPU identified a None None High wattage power supply Reserve CPU Status Indicators Contains same information as for the
17. PC Comm Ports and Connections PC Serial Com Port Setup PC Serial Com Port Setup The software lets you setup a Network Port and up to 8 Serial Comm ports If there is a Modem on your PC a symbol will appear on one of the Serial Comm Ports buttons See Setting up a Serial Com Port with a Modem Setting Up a Serial Comm Port Click on the Serial Comm Port setup button When there is no port Icon above the comm port name the port is currently disabled With newer PCs a USB to RS232 or USB to RS485 adapter may be used The Serial Comm Port Properties Dialog Serial Comm Port Properties Bal Box will Open Click the Enable Port box Manually select a Baud Rate from the Serial 232 Use Modbus ATU Speed drop down menu or if a controller is currently connected to the ports press the Speed bps 3300 Deea Detect button to detect the controller s Click OK Note The Legacy controller s serial port can Note The serial comm ports are configured to default to be set for either RS232 or RS485 operation Honeywell ELN protocol If a user configures a serial port by means of DIP switches on the CPU card to use Modbus RTU slave protocol the Serial 232 box Version 6 0 and greater CPUs support only may be checked for HC Designer to communicate via this an RS485 serial connection If the Detect protocol process runs through all of the baud rates rapidly without appearing to actually check each baud rate there may be a m
18. Phone 65 6580 3278 Fax 65 6445 3033 South Korea Honeywell Korea Co Ltd Phone 822 799 6114 Fax 822 792 9015 AMERICA S Honeywell Process Solutions Phone TAC 1 800 423 9883 or 215 641 3610 Sales 1 800 343 0228 Email Sales FP Sales Apps Honeywell com or TAC hfs tac support honeywell com Specifications are subject to change without notice For more information To learn more about HC 900 Process Controller visit www honeywellprocess com Or contact your Honeywell Account Manager Process Solutions Honeywell 1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S Houston TX 77042 Honeywell Control Systems Ltd Honeywell House Skimped Hill Lane Bracknell England RG12 1EB Shanghai City Centre 100 Jungi Road Shanghai China 20061 www honeywellprocess com 51 52 25 110 Rev 15 September 2913 2013 Honeywell International Inc Honeywell
19. Serial Port S2 Network Port Expansion I O Comm except C30 CPU Host Connections Peer to Peer Connections Displays Modbus ports diagnostics Modbus Master Serial Port Diagnostics Modbus TCP Initiator Port Diagnostics Toggles the Function Block Monitor Windows that lets you monitor all the parameters of the selected Function Block Forced Blocks Toggles the Forced Block Summary Window that lets you see all the outputs that are being forced and permits release of the force condition for a selected output All Function Block Allows you toggle the function block windows that are open On Off Windows Lets you toggle monitoring values numeric or On Off state at any input or output pin Display or Hide All Monitor Allows you toggle the Monitor windows that are open On Off Windows 24 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 User Interface Recipes Menu es e o e Redundancy Accesses Redundancy diagnostics Redundancy System Redundancy Link Lead CPU Reserve CPU Scanner 2 Link Recipes Menu Accesses all recipe pools To learn about the different recipe types read Recipe Overview Menu Selection Fame Allocate Recipe Allocates the controller s memory for the four recipe types This is the number of recipes Memory that can be stored in the controller s four recipe pools Recipes in these pools can be loaded and run by Recipe Selection Blocks Programmers Schedule
20. a variable representing a profile number may be included in the recipe This would also apply to a schedule or sequence number Recipe Attributes A recipe is a list of Variables with settings that define the ingredients needed to make a product or run a particular batch The items represent Analog and or Digital Points that were assigned in the Function Block Configuration and are identified by their Variable Names Recipes have these basic attributes Recipe Number A unique number must be assigned for each recipe that is configured Numbers can be assigned in any sequence with gaps between numbers but no two recipes can be given the same number Recipe Name A descriptive name must be assigned consisting of letters or numbers with no spaces Thus a name can be any combination of letters and numbers without spaces Note that lowercase letters are automatically converted to uppercase letters Recipe Variables A list of Variables can be compiled for each recipe A valid Variable and desired setting must be specified for each recipe item Adjustable Settings The setting for an analog point can be any appropriate value from 99999 to 99999 and a digital point can be set in its ON or OFF state It is possible to edit change any recipe item Variable Name setting through the Edit Recipe Setup dialog box during configuration Recipe Variables Configuration Overview A recipe is a list of Variables with settings that define the ingr
21. configured to turn ON in the next segment Note that segment events are not interrupted by soak time delays when the process variable is outside the guaranteed soak band Events turn ON as soon as the previous segment is completed even if the process variable has not reached the soak setpoint When the program completes the events are held at current value until the programmer is returned to the ready state Pins the pole Saves the profile as PRF file Download Downloads profile to the controller s Setpoint Profile Pool where it can be edited or loaded into the controller s active configuration 176 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Setpoint Profiles Setpoint Profile Properties Setpoint Profile Properties Introduction This function lets you set the properties for the program selected in the Setpoint Profile Pool Appears when creating a new profile or editing one in the setpoint profile pool Parameters Enter the properties information in the appropriate fields in the dialog box then click OK jr Primary Primary Output Descriptor Name 8 characters Output Label Primary Primary Output Engineering Units 4 characters Output descriptor Engineering Units Auxiliary Auxiliary Output Descriptor name 8 characters Output Label Auxiliary Output Auxiliary Output Engineering Units Auxiliary Output Engineering Units descriptor descriptor Engineering Units GENERAL
22. from the File menu Report Categories The Print Report function provides access to the greatest number of reports For software revisions prior to 6 0 all 5 main report categories are available For revision 6 0 and later the Display worksheet is no longer supported so the Displays report category option is not available For SIL compliant controller types additional sub menus allow for filtering of some reports based on Process or Safety worksheets For more information see Reports Overview Select a report category to print Controller Reports Clicking on the Controller button provides a drop down menu which allows the selection of 2 different reports as shown below Note that for SIL compliant controller types only there is an additional sub menu for the I O Configuration report Print Report xj Select a report category to print Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 255 September 2013 Reports Print Report Report Description SIL Filtering Email Shows how E mail notification is configured No I O Shows configuration of all I O on all racks Yes Configuration This report is similar to the data shown on the Controller worksheet It may also be printed by clicking on the Print button in the Controller Configuration Toolbar Function Block Diagram Reports Clicking on the FBDs button provides a drop down menu which allows the selection of reports or repor
23. pin is turned off Bad Data Bad date and time Same as above Program RTC Cycle power Replace CPU _ Replace boards in rack Replace rack Bead Fale Unable tread RTO Rack I O VA VA VA Diagnostics Module Error One of the module Refer to related Module Access the I O Module diagnostics in the diagnostic diagnostics screen associated rack is set to WRONG MODULE MODULE NO COMM if the communications is failing due to the module not installed BAD MODULE or BAD CHANNEL One of the module Refer to HI CJ Access the I O Module diagnostics in the TEMPERATURE in diagnostics screen associated rack is setto Module diagnostics HI CJ TEMPERATURE Rack Backplane Fail The Main CPU Scanner All associated module Remove modules and is unable to successfully diagnostics are set to check for bent pins on communicate to any MODULE NO COMM connectors modules that are in its Reinsert modules one at a SPI backplane Refer to MODULE NO time and note which COMM diagnostic for further Module the diagnostic details reoccurs and replace that module Cycle power to the rack Replace the power supply Replace the rack Replace the CPU board Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 223 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications Rack Comm Fail The Main CPU is unable Same as above 1 Verify that the expansion to successfully rack should be in the communicate to an co
24. pin is turned off 4 lf configured as a Modbus master ASYS and FSYS blocks Modbus Master Fail pins are turned on Slave and read blocks associated with the slaves experiencing the failure have their read pins frozen to the last value read Slave blocks associated with the slaves experiencing the failure have their BAD COMM and NO SCAN pins turned on IN SCAN STATUS is set to NO for all slaves experiencing the failure COMM STATUS is set to BAD for all slaves experiencing the failure The slaves with the data link errors have a non zero data link error count The slaves experiencing the failure are moved to the background scan rate HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 1 Check baud rate 2 Check connectors 3 Check cable polarity 4 solate cabling from electrical interference 5 lf RS232 to RS485 converter is used check its power switch jumper settings and polarity 6 If configured as a Modbus master use the slave status screens to determine which slaves are experiencing the problem For those slaves check e power e connections e address e baud rate e parity e number of stop bits e for electrical interference e grounding e termination resistor if at end of link The diagnostic is cleared by clearing the port s Statistics 23 Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics 1 Rack 1 monitor block s COMPORT DIAG is set to FAILED 2 Rack 1 mo
25. 25 107 HC900 Operator Interface User Guide 51 52 25 108 HC900 Process Control Function Block Reference Guide 51 52 25 109 HC900 Process Control Communications User Guide 51 52 25 111 HC900 Process amp Safety Controller User amp Installation Manual 51 52 25 154 HC900 Process Controller Safety Manual 51 52 25 153 voo HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Support amp Contact Information For Europe Asia Pacific North and South America contact details refer to the back page of this manual or the appropriate Honeywell Solution Support web site Honeywell Organization WWW Address URL Corporate htto www honeywell com Honeywell Process Solutions http www hpsweb honewell com os HPS Technical tips htto hosweb honeywell com Cultures en US Products Instrumentation hybrid hc900 Technic alTips documents htm Telephone and Email Contacts area Organization Phone Number United States and T 7 1 800 343 0228 Customer Service oneywell Inc Canada y 1 800 423 9883 Global Technical Support Email Sales Global Email FP Sales Apps Honeywell com Support Honeywell Process Solutions or TAC hfs tac support honeywell com Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide V September 2013 yi Symbol Definitions The following table lists those symbols that may be used in this document to denote certain conditions Symbol A WARNING A CAUTION CAUTION De
26. 4 1 2 FP L Floating Point Little Endian Format Byte order 1 2 3 4 e IP Address Controller Internet Protocol Address Guaranteed unique address assigned by the Internet Corporation of America for Assigned Names and Numbers ICANN IP Address includes four Octets eight bits translating to integers from 0 to 255 separated by periods The manufacture default IP Address is 192 168 1 254 e Subnet Mask Subnet Mask defines the netid Network ID and the hostid Host ID parts of an IP Address The netid uniquely identifies a network and the hostid uniquely identifies a computer on the network The Subnet Mask can be used to partition the Network into sub networks using parts of the hostid to define new netids or more correctly subnetids Portioning a network in this way enables switches and routers to use the subnetids to reduce collision domains and to promote security e Gateway IP Address Used to forward packets to other networks and subnets The Network Administrator typically provides this address e Email Server Outgoing Mail SMTP server IP Address If the controller is configured for E mail notification enter the IP Address of the SMTP E mail server Controller Identification The figure below shows how to uniquely identify multiple controllers on a network Notice the controller names can be the same in both furnaces Larry Curly Moe but within the same network name they must be unique To further distinguish cont
27. COn guration FIE careia TE E AO 135 UTILITIES WORKSHEET niini iiniininaai nininini aaa anana i RENAA nAi RaRa Raia 137 OVENI OW eoeoierenan e AE a setacdaaneeaaianeeion 137 Controller Wility FUNCIONS rniu a a a a a Gaa a 137 Uploading a File from the Controller ccccccseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaas 138 Download a Fileto the Controller ssena 138 Sel Controler senal POMS aiaa A E A E E A 138 Modbus RTU Master Advanced Setup ciinii a 140 Calibrate Controles senene E 142 OIE lV OG corrain E A R EA 142 Set Controller Network Parameters ccccsecccesseeeeeececeeeceeseececeueeeseueceesenecesaeeeesees 142 Ser Contoller Tile wucsseatataseecaswotnce an aa a 145 Data Storage IY aucien a 148 Back Up Controler Iniormaloiiassssenee a Seed bua Tucudeassiahas 149 Restore Controller iN ormalO Neise a aT a E 150 Manually Write Database to Flash cccccecccccseececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeeeseaeeessaeseesaeeessageees 152 DIAG MO SU CS ansa a im attesuche sated caenmiisdaneeduecen tet eSuasGuadiuves 153 Calibrate WMOGUICS ii tcsea Sie suteten leat cds enustl esl ticeeteaiaiehiet aie ieaateieanctteictatial dint aula 153 PPO BOCK OAID 2111 0 aieemmnnrene nance mete are rere Cnet rm fe mmr A 156 SETPOINT PROGRAMMING takes wiwieieeeine ei aoe 161 WEIS ANG STII INS sac ects gree ee sock a rg ert a cee 161 What S a SeIDOINE Programi micccessrhdcscnterssessssebcec bencendas acetone adataten areas ctemiadsat
28. CPU C30 101 to 2100 CPU C50 101 to 5100 CPU C70 C70R C75 Note Some blocks have reserved block numbers from 1 to 100 Memory usage The amount of memory used depends on the type of block For capacities File Properties Statistics Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 115 September 2013 Function Blocks Overview Function Block Attributes Function Block Attributes 1 Blocks have a rectangular graphic form which varies in size depending on number of inputs and outputs that the block possesses The block type determines the type of operation or algorithm that the block performs 2 Each block has type identification label of up to five characters The label is an abbreviation for the operation or algorithm that the block performs Each block has a number to uniquely identify the function block A few blocks have reserved block numbers 3 Block numbers from 101 to 500 CPU C30 101 to 2100 CPU C50 101 to 5100 CPU C70 C70R C75 are assigned in the sequence that they are programmed This is the Block ID number During controller operation control blocks are executed in numerical order lowest numbered blocks are executed first unless you change the execution order 4 Loops Setpoint programmers Setpoint Schedulers Sequencers have unique user assigned tag names They are used to identify values for operator displays Note that tag names are automatically displayed in capital letters 5 Pin labels help identify bloc
29. Change Password button a eean a ee ae Fone ees 5 ees er per 6 Click OK To Temporarily Unlock a Worksheet From the File menu select Properties then select the Worksheet Protection tab PR Click on the Unlock button PB Enter the current password in the appropriate field Click OK the worksheets are unprotected NOTE the Controller Display and Function Block worksheets also have a toolbar button to unlock worksheets From the File menu select Properties then select the Worksheet Protection tab PR Click on the Remove Protection button PB Enter the current password in the appropriate field A Click OK the worksheets are unprotected 102 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Alarm Group Configuration Protecting a Worksheet When Worksheets Protection is Active From the File menu select Properties then select the Worksheet Protection tab PB Unlock the worksheet Change protection Select worksheet names then DONE Select LOCK Alarm Group Configuration E opens the Alarm Group Configuration dialog box You can also select Alarms from the EDIT menu on the Main Menu the FBD Worksheet by dropping an ALMGP block onto the configuration when you do not have an O I and do need to use Alarm Group logic in the control strategy The Alarm Display Tag Group configuration tab
30. Click to secure Log On Off operation Click off to allow unrestricted access i Engineer Security Code This is a higher level of security than the operator security code because it secures access to off line functions such as calibration Choose a 3 digit code which will be used to secure the item 11 through 13 0 disables Engineering Security 74 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Display Worksheet Operator Interface Settings ftom re o Click to secure Set Mode Set Time and Date Set Security Comm Ports Self Tests Calibrate Al Calibrate AO Click off to allow unrestricted access Function Block Edit Click to secure Edit Device Control and HOA EDIT displays Click off to allow unrestricted access Click to secure Edit Device Control and HOA operate display Edit menus Click off to allow unrestricted access Save tab The Save tab is available for Rev 2 0 or later configurations Prevents unauthorized saves by specifying which items can be saved to the controller s pool Recipes Setpoint Profiles Schedules Sequences Main Menu tab The Main Menu tab is available for Rev 2 0 or later configurations Specify which items appear on the Ol main menu Recipes SP Programmers SP Schedulers Sequencers Loops Alarms Events Diags Summary Displays Unit Setup Disk Utilities Data Storage Log Off Language tab Specify the language for all Ol menus Revision 15 HC900
31. Current PC Time Current Date Indicates PC s date time and time zone Read Only Current Time including Standard or Daylight Saving Time Zone Current Controller Current Date Shows Controller s current date time and Read only Time Current Time time zone Note Daylight Saving if Time Zone applicable is not shown unless Controller is in RUN mode Set Controller Date PC s date and time indicated here will be Read only Time and Date Time used by controller Use Controller Time zone entered here will be used by Click to select Time Zone controller Enter desired Time Zone Use PC s Time Time zone displayed here will be used by Read only Click Zone controller to select Set Controller Click to write the above Date Time and Click to select Time Time Zone to the controller Current Controller Time top of window will be updated A status message confirms the update 146 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Time Version 4 1 Network Time Server and DST tab Use this tab to assign a Network Time Server that periodically synchronizes the controller time specify when controller time changes to Daylight Saving reo tom Dosen id tn Network Time Server Time Server IP Addresses Write Time Server Settings to Controller Daylight Saving Mode Revision 15 September 2013 Enabled Disabled Primary Secondary Adjust Clock f
32. Designer User Guide 37 September 2013 File Management Downloading a File to the Controller mode first 5 From the File Menu select Download or click on the Download icon on the Main Toolbar hl or ae click on the Download icon on the Utilities Worksheet Toolbar 8 then select Download Configuration 6 The Download File dialog box will appear Check the Port and Address information for correctness 7 Press START to download the configuration to the configuration buffer The download will begin if the controller is in PROGRAM mode or RUN mode The download will be rejected if the controller is in RUN LOCKED mode or OFFLINE mode The dialog box will show Percent Complete 8 After the database tables have been transferred to a configuration buffer select one of the following commands to transfer from the buffer to the controller Download of a safety enabled configuration will not be allowed if there is a mismatch of I O channel information or in case of duplicate I O information HOT START the controller will use the new or updated configuration in RUN Mode During a Hot Start Controller memory will not be re initialized Outputs will be held at their current value Controller will stay in RUN mode There are two possible actions with a Hot Start If the Hot Start will be completed within approximately 3 controller scan cycles then the Hot Start will proceed automatically If the Hot Start requir
33. For Batch Alarm Event storage all three enables must be on Batch commana _ ft tf wemis yee TT TT TP PP A me Tee Data Storage Enable weet OTT TT a Then stored Sontinuous aes ike this Oo klepy ae awe amwe TTF To tt E Batch Time kew Disabled Enabled Di abled 1 Although Alarm Storage is active during the specified time periods Alarm records will only be saved on active transitions of the alarm status If no alarm occurs during the active period the data for that period will be blank 84 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Data Storage Data Storage Configuration Access Data Storage Configuration Access ial This facility allows you to configure groups of data that will be stored to the Operator interface s data storage device This process history can be a valuable source of information to analyze process operations quality and upsets The groups are configured in Designer and downloaded as part of the configuration You can also create a new data storage file dss separate from the configuration On the File menu select New Data Storage on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Data Storage Configuration dialog box Select a tab at the top of the dialog box to access a specific Data Storage Configuration dialog box Click on a button below for specific Data Storage Configuration Instructions Trend Storage Paint Log st
34. Force acold start attempting to fetch an restart Isolate system from instruction fromthe ASYS block s HW OK noise and force a prefetch register pin is turned off cold start 3 Replace CPU board Address Error The reserved Same as above Same as above exception occurred for an unknown reason Undefine Error Bad Instruction Same as above Same as above Detected Data Abort CPU failed when Same as above Same as above attempting to access data Software Interrupt Software Interrupt Same as above Same as above Error occurred which is not supported by the software o a mw w w Y Yo Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 283 September 2013 Redundancy Lead CPU Status Indicators Contact Honeywell Watchdog Watchdog reset ASYS block s HW OK pin 1 Force acold start resulting from software failure Personnel is turned off Upgrade control file board BATTERY pin is turned Flash Error Flash failed to burn ASYS block s HW OK pinis 1 Force a cold start Enea 2 Replace CPU board software Replace CPU Diagnostics 5 Day Low Battery Estimated battery life ASYS block s HW OK pin Replace battery Warning is less than 5 days is turned off on 2 ASYS block s HW OK RTC not programmed 1 Time and date is set to rogram RTC 00 00 00 January 1 1970 2 ASYS block s HW OK pin is turned off Low Battery Battery voltage is low 1 ASYS block s LOW Replace ba
35. Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet How to Change a FBD s Worksheet Properties The Find Results field will indicate the Worksheet where the item is located Click on the Worksheet name and you will jump to the item on the worksheet O ONDT 20 Find Iter show fan Signals Variables Tagged Blacks ltem PAVALVE Find Results Block Variable StartUp Logic ONDT 241 Double click on an item on the worksheet to open the properties dialog box The Tag or Variable Number or Function Block name will appear on the dialog box banner How to Change a FBD s Worksheet Properties Right click on the new Worksheet name in the browser and select Properties or Double click on the worksheet tab or Select the Properties icon on the Function Block Diagram Toolbar 3 from left or From the Edit menu on the Main Drop down menus select Worksheet Properties Enter a Title worksheet name will appear on the File Browser and worksheet tabs and Description enhance the Worksheet name with descriptive text in the appropriate fields of the dialog box The descriptive name appears on the FBD Report Printouts Reference Print Report How to Change the Worksheet Order The Worksheet Order dialog box lists the FBD worksheets as they appear on the tabs at the bottom of the Function Block Worksheet area In the dialog box click on the Worksheet name that you want to reorder Change the worksheet order using the Increment decr
36. HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Watch Summary Window Watch Summary Display Groups This page has been intentionally left blank Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 217 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Introduction The Designer provides live monitoring of Controller diagnostics The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start up and during on line operation and displays the controller status and diagnostics 1 Select Controller Diagnostics from the Monitor drop down menu from the Monitor toolbar cI This window can be launched from the Utilities Worksheet 2 The Controller Diagnostics C30 C50 C70 or Diagnostic Overview C70R C75 window will appear See below 3 The Controller Diagnostic Status Indications explains the parameters and their values 4 Click on X to exit box C30 C50 C70 Controller Diagnostics Controller Time 10 2707 9 51 35 AM System Diagnostics Good CPU Diagnostics Good Memory Diagnostics Good Real Time Clock Diagnostics Good Rack VO Diagnostics Module Error Communication Port Diagnostics Good Hardware okay OFF Controller Mode RUN Code Revizion 39 40 Code Build Revizion D Loop Capacity ce Product Type HOO Cycle Time 5 0 51 CPU used 3 29 Feak Time 5 CE Overrun Fast Cycle Time 5 Fast CPU used Fast Peak Time 5 Fast CB Overuns
37. How to Add Worksheet Protection ccccseccccsececeescecceececseseccseeeecseeesseneeesuaeessaaeees 101 Alarm Group Configuration mesa ccestesewrcsostasercvesacudeed ivaad font soustheuehcdageatensecdauialesyemuetnduat adden 103 Alarm Detall etcetera cle tet nTa eean E E O EANO RE 104 EVent LiSt CONNGUrAUON rzs a a a 105 FX 6 CUOMO VOC eai an r ta cnel ante 105 VCMT Detall annn saheh saree diated tas ata reatad Msaseatea tadtaaee data piel Soviet Sede ncnRateantes 111 E Mail NOUNCIA nenteea acest atae Since 111 Unlock UNE Works heels cas loc sila os eentt oe TEA 112 FUNCTION BLOCKS OVERVIEW c ccceecceecenecenecnseenseenseenesenecenecnsecneeens 113 FUNGCUON BIOGK IDETINITION cs2sscrssemtousmenwnncsvencses EE e E ERER 113 FUNCTION Block IGEMUINGATON sensuren araea 113 FUnCICMBIOCK Inputs and QuP tS anien aana a 113 IypeS Ol rFUnCHON BIOCKS craon T A A 115 FUNCUON BIOCK AlIMDULCS esis araea enaren e A ES 116 mccimevers aul ale ers 0 anaona aa a a a A a i 116 USING FUNCTION BLOCKS TO BUILD A CONTROL SAFETY STRATEGY117 Bedre YOU Star ar AA anes eases 117 General Steps to Build a Control Safety Strategy ccccccccssececcseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeeeeesaees 117 Adding Moving Deleting Function Blocks to a FBD ccceeccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeenees 118 COMMECIMNG DISCOMMEGCTING BIO CK Seea cee it ncctiec tothe ceca avert batalende A 120 Adding a aa ar F216 ereresee eee ae Sree ene cr re ees te a
38. Lead CPU Status Indicators 24VDC Low Wattage High Wattage 286 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators The Redundancy Scanner 2 Link Diagnostics dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the following list Parameter Scanner 2 Network Status Revision 15 September 2013 Value C70R C75 is communicating to none of the Scanner 2s that are in the configuration No Comm Or C70R C75 may be communicating to a Scanner 2 that is not in the configuration C70R C75 is experiencing marginal communications on the respective Scanner 2 link to one or more Scanner 2s in the configuration Marginal Port I O A and or C70R C75 is communicating to some of the Scanner 2s in the configuration but not all C70R C75 is experiencing marginal communications on the respective Scanner 2 link to one or more Scanner 2s in the configuration Marginal Port I O B and or C70R C75 is communicating to some of the Scanner 2s in the configuration but not all Good Port I O A Good Port I O B C70R C75 is experiencing good communications on the respective Scanner 2 link Scanner 2s not in the configuration have no effect on the status C70R C75 is experiencing good communications on the respective HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Redundancy Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators Possible Cau
39. Power Supply Expansion I O Comm Diagnostics except C30 CPU The status of the Expansion I O Comm Diagnostics Refer to Expansion I O Comm Diagnostic Status Indicators Read the diagnostics for a particular rack I O Module Diagnostics Status of the Modules shown in the list Physical Type Configured as type Error Status Model Number amp Rev Level scroll horizontally to view For status of individual I O channels see Function Block Monitor Window 5 Click on upper right X to exit box Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 227 September 2013 Diagnostics Rack Diagnostics C30 C50 C70 Rack D Emi ostics E i p i o None Mone Mone Mone None None None Mone Hone Mone None Mone Hone Mone None Mone Hone Mone None Mone Mone Mone None Mone Aoo 228 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Rack Diagnostics C7OR Rack Diagnostics oe re None None DI 120 240 VAC 16 Chan Mone DI 24 VDC 16 Chan None None None None None Hone None None None DI 120 240 VAC 16 Chan None DO Lo Current Aly 6 Chan Digital Output DO 120 240 VAC 5 Chan Mone DO 120 240 VAC 8 Chan Digital Output i 2 4 4 F 6 T E 4 Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 229 September 2013 Diagnostics Rack Diagnostics Power Supply Rack Diagnostics Power Supply The Power Supply diagnostics provide status of the parameters shown in the li
40. Program C3 Setpoint Scheduler E3 Counters Timers l E Calculations E AamMonitor E3 Signal Selectors gt Aucsiliary C3 Communications J E HVAC gt ENTH558 E PSsyC559 at RH560 EJ Analog Variables E3 Digital Variables E3 Digital Signals el Normal Scan Eb FestScan Bij Process E Safety Click on a tab to display the function block categories available for that worksheet type Expand each category to display the function blocks used The blocks will be identified by the Function Block ID and the assigned Block Number rather than function block type The FA icon indicates a Normal Scan rate block and the icon indicates a Fast Scan rate block If the configuration is using a Custom Modbus Map items can be dragged and dropped on to the corresponding Custom Modbus Map configuration dialog Right click on an item to display its context menu and select from the following options O Properties to open the item s properties dialog O Block Execution Order to change the relative execution order of function blocks O Find to navigate to the item s location on the worksheet O Help to display a help file page with the details of that item The Worksheet Toolbox can be undocked from its default location to the bottom left of the Worksheet Window and moved to another location by dragging and dropping on the bar above the tree view It can Worksheet Toolb
41. Rack Module and Channel Assignments The controller contains one or more racks Each rack may contain one or more I O modules of various types and each I O module contains a number of channels Each rack module and channel is assigned a number in the configuration that corresponds to a physical location in the installed racks Before starting determine the I O content of the controller racks Although configurations can be constructed using default I O locations the recommended configuration approach is to first verify that the proper I O is available to execute the desired configuration and to record the location of each I O Rack Module and Channel so that they may be properly entered during configuration file development Please note that expansion racks ARE NOT permitted on the HC900 C30 controller g To allow for and facilitate future expansions and modifications it is usually a good idea to leave some I O module slots vacant in each rack since in software configuration of the I O the identification of each I O point depends on the physical position of the I O hardware Rack Module and Channel If all module slots in a rack are full addition of one I O module to a given rack could require hardware and software modifications for one or more other I O Racks in the system The function blocks that deal with reading input channels and or writing to output channels are categorized as O Function Blocks with the exception of the
42. Register Addresses Configure Modbus Map Method Quantities of each item type are at a fixed maximum such as 32 loops 8 programmers Good for smaller configurations or pre 4 0 configurations If your configuration exceeds these maximums a message reminds you to consider switching to the custom map Every parameter of a function block is automatically added to the map You don t need to specify which of the block s parameters are mapped they re all there For example all of a PID block s 40 plus parameters are added to the map You can reorder items within a group such as switching Loop 1 with Loop 10 You can assign signals and variables to a user defined area of the map The fixed map has a fixed range 45057 46056 for assigning configured signal tags and variables to another data type such as integer 16 The fixed map contains several gaps of unused and unusable addresses The fixed map is the default map for all configurations Unless and until you switch to the custom map the fixed map is in use Items are automatically added to the map when you access the map up to the quantity limits such as 32 loops 8 programmers The only items that are not automatically added are user defined signals and variables 266 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Quantities are limited only by the amount of free space in the map or partition Use custom map when you need to access data from more than 32 loops for
43. Serial Comm Ports Select a Port from the drop down menu Current PC to Controller Connection Settings COE MODE te COE Mrotegal desist Spean fjr If you selected Network Select the Address Current PC to Controller Connection Settings of the controller from the drop down menu FHE Haten it a l Biitit biest toog Bask Siete 164 145 185 567 Proton ir ma ae SEF Ly FLF Saeed bosk MHA You can run a loopback test BELEL Loop Back You can view and reset the communications statistics Q Statistics Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 55 September 2013 PC Comm Ports and Connections Remote Loopback Test Remote Loopback Test Remote Loopback tests the connection between the PC and the Controller Running the test e Click on the Loopback icon on the Utilities Worksheet Window MEHE The Remote Loopback Test dialog box will appear e Click SEND The Status line will read Instrument Responded Correctly or Instrument did not Respond check the connections e Click Close 56 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 PC Comm Ports and Connections Remote Access Remote Access For Remote Controller Access via dial up modem an external modem is required at the controller and is connected to the standard RS 232 configuration port If a modem is already installed on the PC the Designer will notify you that it exists Remote
44. Status INGICAIOIS enca aaa a a aa a Reserve GRU Slats Indicators aeania E A Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators 020 eee eee ee cece eeceeeeceeceececaeeeeceeaeceeeueaesaeseeseeaneaeeneaeeas xii HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Software Introduction and Overview Introduction Software Introduction and Overview Introduction The Controller and Operator Interface configurations are performed using HC900 Process Control Designer software on a PC operating with Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 Operating Systems Easy to use Windows based software operable over Ethernet or via an USB to RS 485 adapter or modem connection simplifies controller and operator interface configuration It provides advanced monitoring functions for debug uploads the complete annotated graphic controller and operator interface configuration and supplies an array of printouts for enhanced documentation In some instances an On line configuration download capability allows configuration changes such as block additions or block substitutions to be made without switching the controller to program mode avoiding initialization Once a configuration is installed into the controller and operator interface the software may be used to develop or change recipes edit data storage schedules monitor areas of the configuration to verify proper operation or perform calibration functions Features e Graphic drag and drop s
45. Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Text String Text String beron A BT i This is part of the Other Items category Introduction You have the option to enter descriptive data on the Function Block Diagram V Any entered data has no effect on the operation of the Controller Procedure to Enter a Text String From the Worksheet Toolbox group Other Items use the left Mouse button to click on the T text symbol hold the button down drag the symbol to the function block diagram and release the mouse button The Modify Text dialog box will appear on the Function Block Diagram Select a Font size 6 10 12 16 pt Select a Color black blue red green Select Bold talics or underline or all three You can change the default font characteristics for Text Annotations See Changing the Default Annotations Attributes Key in the desired text in the field then click OK You can use carriage returns for multiple lines The text will appear on the diagram in a dotted line box Click and hold the cursor in the box and move the text string to the desired location To enter another text string repeat the above steps Editing Text To edit existing text double click the text The Modify Text dialog box will reopen You can delete text or cut copy and paste text from one Modify Text dialog box to another Use the right mouse button menu while the mouse cur
46. Warning Level If you do not select rollover enter a percent in the appropriate box Point Log Storage Configuration Point Log storage will provide the following Points per File 12 maximum Analog or Digital Storage Modes Off Batch Continuous On Command Storage Interval 1 to 59 minutes one minute increments all relative to 1 to 23 hours one hour increments start time 1 to 30 days one day increments Once month same day of each month External Control Digital Tagged signal start stop storage to file On Demand sampling Configuration Procedure Select the POINT LOG tab on the Data Storage Configuration dialog box Batch Enable This signal starts and stops storage for Point Logs configured for Batch storage It does Signal not affect Continuous or On Command storage selections From the pull down menu select NONE Batch is started stopped only through the operator interface s Data Storage Control Menu defaults to Stop on configuration download ANY DIGITAL TAG Batch is started stopped only through the on off state of the selected Digital Signal It will not appear on the operator interface s data Storage Control Menu For detailed information concerning Data Storage Enable refer to Data Storage Enable Conditions Filename Enter a File Name There is a maximum of 8 Aloha Numeric characters DOS File Name Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 87 September 2013 Dat
47. another block a variable or constant an internal system value from system status block Outputs exit the block as straight lines from the bottom or right hand side Note that unused outputs can be left unconnected Attention As shown on the function block example below there is a visual distinction between analog and digital pins Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 113 September 2013 Function Blocks Overview Function Block Inputs and Outputs 114 Analog Inputs and Outputs are indicated by a solid pin and Digital Inputs and Outputs are indicated by a hollow pin DIGITAL VARIABLES VAROOSD VARDO4GD gt f ee e ee eB eB eB eB eB eB eB eB eB Se 5PS101 1 Een a Ne a a a ea a a sPsq04 ANALOG VARIABLES a ea ee ee ee 1 i ENABL l i i WARIO Lm HP STMR BAOTNOSS i i YeR HSEG STME f B10 7NOS6 i l t ___ ASET PTE Bi0iNOS7 J l i Pw gt Pw SF f BI01NOAT i 1 pwz p P SP rewornoaa SIGNAL TAGS sTswioz2 2 l ee i Pig 5 Fag Sra le f BIO tNOd i I o aG pug yiee Pd SPd BI04NOSO i I GHOLD PY ee PAS SPS a i B10110541 3 RESET PWE o Pye SPS B10 1NDS2 i I 4 i Lo HOLD PUT 1 m Puy SP j Bi01NOSS I i CONSTANT 1 ARUN lO pwe 4 PSPS B101N054 I 0 060 1 ____H ADV STRO STRO STFL B101N0SE i kaai Ae a Mie oo 4 l eee EhhL
48. any INPUT pin Select TRACE Traceback will find the source of the connection you selected and refresh the FBD view with that block visible Highlighted even if the other side of the connection is on a different worksheet The Output pin of the block the signal source will be displayed in RED From that block repeat the traceback to another block and another block etc Use the Traceback list to view your Traceback history You can clear the Trace List by pressing the bar at the top of the window Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 15 September 2013 User Interface Watch Summary Window Watch Summary Window Overview accesses the Watch Summary Window from the Monitor Toolbar Or the menu item Watch Summary from the Monitor Menu on the main menu This is a view of the Watch Summary Window It is a Dockable movable sizable window Press and hold the CTRL key down to prevent Docking when moving the window Watch Summary O x Show E Signals RON SP eee wud Setpt 0 0 deqt E z A ys iu ad a aD gt RWear Defned Signals Inputs Outputs There are five tabs at the bottom of the window that lets you monitor the following groups of data from the controller Click on any of the tab titles below to view an example of the selected data for that tab All parameter listings may be sorted by column User Defined Customized list of Variables Signal Tags Page Connectors Si
49. are slave devices with turnaround times that are longer than 255ms then the standard Modbus RTU Master protocol must be used Maximum Number of Modbus registers per transaction Read Coil Registers Function Code 1 This parameter determines the maximum number of coil registers that can be read from the slave devices in a single transaction Read Digital Input Registers Function Code 2 This parameter determines the maximum number of digital input registers that can be read from the slave devices in a single transaction Read Holding Registers Function Code 3 This parameter determines the maximum number of holding registers that can be read from the slave devices in a single transaction Read Input Registers Function Code 4 This parameter determines the maximum number of input registers that can be read from the slave devices in a single transaction Write Multiple Holding Registers Function Code 16 Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 141 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Calibrate Controller This parameter determines the number of registers that will be written to the slave devices ina single transaction Note if there are gaps in the Modbus register addresses referenced within the HC900 configuration the controller will write a value of zero to the undefined address For example if Modbus Registers 1 and 10 are assigned to Modbus function blocks but Registers 2 and 9 are not the controller wi
50. bar then use the UP Down arrow keys on the keyboard to select the item then press Enter Underlined Letter If a name in the menu bar has an underlined letter you can press ALT and then type the letter that s underlined to open the menu For example to open the FILE menu in the Designer main window press ALT F Closing a Menu To close a menu Click the menu name or anywhere outside the menu or Press ESC to close the menu but remain on the menu bar so that you can make another selection Main Menu The Main Menu is located across the top of the User Interface The menus are File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Monitor Menu Recipes Menu Window Menu Help Menu 18 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 User Interface File Menu File Menu Meuse fl New oO Toolbar Shortcut CTRL N Displays a Choose a New File Type dialog box with these tabs New Configuration Select the Configuration tab From the drop down menus select Controller and Revision Click OK and a new Configuration file is listed in the File Browser and a new diagram is placed in the Main Window area New Recipes Select the Recipe tab On the tab click on a radio button to select one of the following Recipes Variables Setpoint Profile Setpoint Schedule Sequence Click OK The associated Editor dialog box will appear and a new Opened Recipe File is listed in the File Browser Refer to the spec
51. below to go lo that enar in the configuration o double click ar an eror bo opan tha kams properties Too many loop blocks Uzec amp 16 Lmt 8 5 Ifthere is no problem the conversion will proceed 6 If there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0 the data is saved automatically 7 If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0 the application will notify you that there are unconnected inputs and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs 8 Click Yes to view the summary of unconnected inputs 9 Click Log File to save the list to a text file if desired Note Configuration for model revisions can only be saved as models of same revision or newer revision Configuration fails cannot be saved as older configuration revisions Start with an original configuration and do a File Save As and save the configuration to the newer revision or different controller type The new configuration can only be downloaded to a controller of the same type Configuration revision remains the same or is upgraded to a later revision Uploading a File from the Controller Introduction Upload transfers a file FROM the controller TO the PC Uploadable files are configurations recipes and data storage The Controller may be in ANY mode No configuration file is required to be opened prior to the Upload Request 36 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revisi
52. block is shown as a number in the top right hand corner of the block s graphic on the function block diagram as shown below Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 105 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Execution Order Pipa 4 eoTios a lt PID104 a CH A000001 a RSP WSP ha a FFV AL1 CH B 000002 a TRY AL He a BIAS ING Ho TRC DIRECT Ho c ENBIAS DEC Ho a BIAS o CLA INDEX Ho a SWI ATI Ho CNTERR w MORGI MODE RNGERR a BCI BCE p D RST CDS pa CH CLFG FAIL In the diagram above both function blocks have an execution order of 4 This is allowed because the PID104 block is executing at the Normal Scan rate whereas the QDT105 block is executing at the Fast Scan rate as indicated by the yellow lightning bolt on the QDT134 graphic It should be noted that the Block Execution Order is independent of the Block Number Both the Block Number and the Block Execution Order are assigned in the sequence in which they are programmed however the Block Number must be unique throughout all function blocks while the Block Execution Order only needs to be unique throughout the function blocks in the same scan rate The system remembers the last programmed Block Execution Order for both scan rates independently You can override the execution order determined by the system during programming Block Numbers on the other hand can not be reassigned There are two ways to chan
53. blocks with unassigned I O addresses then the data is saved automatically and the rest of the steps may be skipped 3 If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0 and or there are I O blocks with unassigned I O addresses the Process Control Designer will notify you of the situation and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs and or a list of unconfigured I O blocks Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 33 September 2013 File Management Saving A Configuration File 4 Click Yes to view the summary of unconnected inputs or unconfigured I O blocks 5 Click Log File to save the list to a text file if desired To Save a New File or Save the File as a New Name 1 Select SAVE AS from the FILE menu The Save As dialog box will open he Save As a oe oT a roo SEO TO Wo Lauer ers ie E lt Local Disk C Product ControllerDocs Organize New folder De Favoni s Name Date modified Type HE Desktop i HCDDecs 5 9 2013 6 19PM File folder B Downloads t All commurications non Safetyl 0 5 2013 3 56 PM HC Designer Docu El Recent Places ce All commurications 8 13 2013 3 49PM HCDesigner Docu f E All commuricationsC50 a 15 2015 3 33 PM HC Designer Docu Libraries ce All communicationsNonSIL 6 13 2013 5 46 PM HCDesiqner Docu ei Da
54. box will appear Click on the radio button for Minutes Hours or Days and select a storage interval from the Edit box Or click on the radio button for Once a Month Click OK Refer to Storage Intervals in Storage Conventions Start Time NOTE For On Command storage mode there is no storage interval or start time They are not used Click on Change The Change Time dialog box will appear In the Edit box in each field select a start time Click OK Refer to Storage Intervals in Storage Conventions Rollover Click this box to allow data storage to continue collecting data in a circular storage mode where the oldest data is discarded as new data is collected Clear this box to allow data storage to stop collecting data when the file is full You can configure a Warning Level for Disk Full Warning Level If you do not select rollover enter a percent in the appropriate box Alarm Event Storage Configuration Alarm Event storage will provide the following 88 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Data Storage Alarm Event Storage Configuration Records per File Records per File File 150 to 1500 150t0 1500 records per file 150t0 1500 records per file file Data Types All Alarms Time Date On Off All Events Time Date On Off Storage Modes Off Batch Continuous External Control Digital Tagged Signal Start Stop storage to file Configuration Procedure Select
55. box will open EDIT a Sequence Select the Edit Sequence Icon The Setup Edit Sequences dialog box will appear COPY and PASTE Select a recipe from the pool window then select the Copy Icon Select another location in the pool window then select the Paste Icon The copied sequence will be inserted into the location selected DELETE a Sequence Click on a Sequence name and then click on the Delete icon PRINT a Sequence Click on a sequence name and then select the Print icon The Print dialog box will appear Select OK A sequence report will be printed with all the information entered on the Sequence Properties dialog box Label Description Jog Step and Time Units in Hours or Minutes SAVE a Sequence To save a sequence as an seq file click on a recipe name and then select the Save icon The Save As dialog box will appear OPEN a Sequence To open a previously saved seq file and insert it into the pool click on the Open icon DOWNLOAD a Sequence To download a sequence to the controller s sequence pool click on the Download icon Setup Edit Sequence in Pool Introduction The Edit Sequence dialog box lets you set up or edit a sequence from the sequences listed in the Sequence Pool dialog box Make sure you have clicked on Edit Properties toolbar icon and have configured the properties for that specific Sequence Edit a Sequence Click on a Sequence name in the active field and select the Edit Item
56. channel For example the customer configured Channel 15 for a given module but there is an 8 channel module installed in the rack A BAD CHANNEL I O module diagnostic is posted The Main CPU is unable to communicate to the channel Possible reasons are module missing wrong module installed SPI backplane is failing expansion rack is missing A Digital Output module detected an excessive amount of current on its output terminals Note that this message will only appear for the 32 channel DO module A BAD CHANNEL module diagnostic is posted The signal at the terminals is more Check the signal than 10 over the range of the level being applied to sensor the terminals Replace module The Al module installed in the rack does not support the range or sensor type configured for this channel For example this channel s Al function block is configured as a thermocouple but there is a high level Al module installed in the rack When burnout check occurs on the T C the measured resistance indicates that the T C s resistance is to a point where the burnout failure will result When burnout check occurs on the T C the measured resistance is higher than normal The signal at the terminals is less Check the signal than 10 below the range of the level being applied to September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics Channel Sensor Channel type Possible Cause Status Al A0 D1Do TPO
57. controller types the rows of data will be colored coded Variables located on a Safety worksheet will be displayed with a yellow background whereas variables located on a Process worksheet will be displayed on a white background You can change a variable by clicking on a variable value and entering a new value for an analog variable or selecting the appropriate user configured OFF or ON label from a drop down menu for a Digital variable Note the new value entered is not written to the controller until you move off of the current cell either by tabbing out of the cell using the Shift Tab keys or clicking on another cell using the mouse If the value you want to change also shows engineering units as in 100 0 LBS for example you just need to change the number portion you don t need to delete the engineering units or type it in again Use the Find Feature to locate a specific I O on the Function Block Diagram Use the Sort Function to sort the table rows by a specific column HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Watch Summary Window Watch Summary Inputs Outputs See the Watch Window Summary for more details on this window Watch Summary Inputs Outputs The number of pull down selectors at the top of the display will depend on the controller type For SIL compliant controllers there will be a leading selector which allows the I O points to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet
58. created by connecting function blocks to each other Softwiring Connecting To connect two blocks you must softwire a block s output pin to the other block s input pin or vice versa CAUTION In pre 2 0 configurations if a function block is inadvertently placed on top of another block with pins touching wires connected to the touching pins may follow the wrong block when the block again moves In other words the connections you see may not be the connections you actually get SOLUTION Place drawing items so their boundaries do not touch or overlap When moving drawing items groups release the group over empty diagram space The outputs are always on the right or bottom of blocks inputs are always on the top or left of the blocks Double click at the end of a block s output or input pin A single segment wire will adopt a straight or L shaped route Ali 1 a FSF har FFU Lipo TR ea S CFTR a BIAS om Sel ATID WIRE MODE HCI Bco You can click anywhere on the drawing to make a wire vertex and continue to either another vertex or a block pin alice i Se E 5 al Pio 2 PIDO FEF WEF am FRY ALi a TAY A 7 TAE me BLAS T ATI a WLRO WOCE BCI Bro A wire can have up to eight vertices including endpoints You can connect two or more wires to the same output pin Repositioning To reposition an existing wire Click on the end point of the wire to be repositioned
59. displayed on a white background You can change the value of any item that can be forced by entering a new value in the Value column You can re order the items in the list by selecting a single row or range of rows in the list and dragging the row s to another position in the list You can also delete selected items in the list To select the first row in a range e Positioning the cursor over the gray cell at the beginning of the row e Wait for the cursor to change to an arrow e Click on the gray cell To select the last row in a range e Positioning the cursor over the gray cell at the beginning of the row Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 211 September 2013 Watch Summary Window Watch Summary Signals e Wait for the cursor to change to an arrow e Hold down the Shift key and click on the gray cell To reposition the selected row s e Position the cursor over any gray cell in the selected rows e Drag and drop the rows to their new position e A red line will appear as you drag the rows to show you where the row that was clicked will be dropped when you release the mouse button To delete the selected row s press the Delete key Use the Find Feature to locate a specific I O on the Function Block Diagram Use the Sort Function to sort the table rows by a specific column See the Watch Window Summary for more details on this window Watch Summary Signals 212 On the User Defined tab o
60. download failed Failed to put instrument into loader transfer mode Failed to get controller status Unexpected controller mode Code download will abort The controller will now reset Failed to get expansion rack status FLASH erase failure Replace the controller card FLASH programming failure Replace the controller card FLASH memory failure Replace the Controller card An incomplete code download has been detected Do not remove controller power Removing controller power 42 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide The firmware file was bad Replace the firmware file Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure Restart code download again Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure Restart code download again Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure Restart code download again Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure Restart code download again Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure Restart code download again Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure Restart code download again The controller has a hardware problem Replace the controller card The controller has a hardware problem Replace the controller card The controller has a hardware problem Replace the controller card A previous code download was aborted or failed Code download w
61. example Lets you pick and choose which block parameters to add For example a PID block contains over 40 parameters The fixed map adds them all the custom map lets you add only the ones you need to access thus freeing up more addresses for other parameters You can create templates to apply to any or all function blocks of a type For example you can select 5 of a PID block s parameters then save them to a PID template You can load that template into other PID blocks so they each address the same 5 parameters You can reorder items More generally you can put any parameter at any address or at multiple addresses or partitions The custom map lets you assign any data type to any address float 32 integer 16 etc A default data type is applied but can be changed Since you can put any parameter at any address you Can eliminate gaps of unused addresses thus increasing the map s capacity Uses the fixed map as a starting point Any edits to the fixed map such as reordered items within a group or user defined signals and variables are carried over when you switch to the custom map The custom map s default partitions are based on the fixed map s groups Conversely if you switch from custom map to fixed map any customized partitions or addresses are lost You can revert to this starting point at any time by using the Replace feature in the custom map Revision 15 September 2013 Modbus Register Addre
62. further filter items within the group e Table to display information and current values of the selected items Watch Summary Show fan All Signals z Ea S acer ee e E GE E a a ae 7 ne en aL a Aaa 2 a a 20 ON M44 bi User Defined 4 Signals 208 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Watch Summary Window Overview The number of different data groups available through the tabs at the bottom of the window will depend on the revision of software running in the controller The possible selections are listed below click on any of the links to view an example of the selected data for that tab e User Defined Customized list of Signals Page Connectors and or Variables e Signals Analog Digital e Page Connectors Analog Digital e Variables Analog Digital e Inputs Outputs Al AO DI DO e Display Groups Not available in revision 6 0 and higher The number of pull down selectors at the top of the display will depend on the controller type For SlL compliant controllers there will be a leading selector which allows the data items within the group to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet they are located on Process Safety or All both Process and Safety worksheets For all controller types there will be a pull down selector which allows the data items within the group to be further filtered based on a sub type such as analog versus dig
63. is complete the Uploaded File will appear with a temporary file name in the editor for that file type 6 From the File menu select Save or Save As and enter a file name and path in the appropriate fields Downloading a File to the Controller Introduction Once a control strategy configuration file is opened Configuration Download transfers a configuration FROM the PC TO the controller The Controller may be in either RUN or PROGRAM mode not Run Locked ATTENTION You cannot download a configuration saved as one HC900 controller model to a controller of a different model You must first convert the configuration before doing a download See Converting H nfi Procedure 1 From the File Menu select Open or Upload a file from the controller IMPORTANT If you intend to make a set of changes to a running configuration and wish to preserve the context of the current configuration parameters you should perform an upload from the controller first to assure that you have the current configuration make the incremental changes save the modified file and then download This is highly recommended to avoid configuration conflicts 2 Select the file cde that is to be downloaded 3 The selected function block diagram will appear in the Active View window Only the active file window can be downloaded 4 Atthis point you can make incremental changes to the file See Downloading in the RUN Revision 15 HC900 Process Control
64. is reopened Protection Symbols There are three symbols that could appear on the Worksheet Protection tab that indicate the level of protection for the file No protection is in place worksheets are Unlocked Protection exists and the worksheets are Unlocked Protection exists and the worksheets are Locked Protecting a Worksheet When There is No Protection From the File menu select Properties then select the Worksheet Protection tab Click on the Change Protection button Click on the box next to the worksheet names you want to protect then select DONE button Click on the Lock button to setup a password Enter a password for the file in the New Password field up to 14 characters Re enter the password in the Confirm New Password field Click OK In version 4 4 and greater click Disable Master Password if you wish to prevent others from overiding password protection by getting a master password from Honeywell IMPORTANT NOTE If you forget your password after Disable Master Password has been selected you will not be able to view any protected worksheets Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 45 September 2013 File Management How to Add Worksheet Protection To Change a Password From the File menu select Properties then select the Worksheet Protection tab PR Click on the Change Password button ee oe 6 Click OK To Tem
65. is set to network are illegal FAILED Rack 1 monitor block s RACK OK pin is turned off SYSTEM MONITOR block s HW OK pin is turned off No IP Address IP address is not See Network Setup Error Enter an IP address configured Hardware Failure Ethernet port tests Replace CPU module failed during power up Modbus Master Serial Port Diagnostics Displays the status of the Modbus Master port if so configured Modbus Communication Diagnostics Modbus Master Part Port 5 Protocol Modbus ATU Master Advanced Cycle time S 0 555 Peak time 5 0 493 Status Scanning View Advanced Setup Execution time 5 0 493 Overrun 0 Modbus Slave Devices Slave Details ID Slave Name Address Status Parameter Value GATEWAY 1 1 Good Slave Name GATEWAY 1 ATU Slave Address 1 Double Register Format Big Endian Comm Quality Good Scan Enable YES In Scan YES Messages Received 51121 Data Link Errors 0 Application Errors 0 Disable Close Access Enter Monitor mode and select Modbus master port diagnostics from the Monitor menu or through the Utilities tab Controller Diagnostics icon 248 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Modbus Master Serial Port Diagnostics The controller s S1 port is the Modbus Master port The controller s S2 port is the Modbus Master port No Master Port The HC900 configuration contains Modbus slave blocks but neither the S1 or the S2 p
66. it is connected you can move the signal tag to any location Place the crosshairs on the output pin and click to connect the tag to the output dotted Line You can add vertices like a softwire Double click on the tag name area to display the signal properties dialog box Analog Signal Tag Analog Signal Properties Signal Tag 31 Ea Signal Source Block 319 Output 4 Modbus Addresses and Data Types 0293 Ox203C float 32 Tag Name SUESSI Descriptor Unita Decimal bo Places Cancel Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 127 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Signal Tags Enter Tag Name Descriptor Select Decimal Place 0 5 or select exponential notation i e display Trend Points Logarithmically Engineering Units Also displayed is the item s default Modbus address and data type followed by any user defined addresses Digital Signal Tag Digital Signal Properties Signal Tag 7 0 Modbus Addresses and Data Types ool OK2084 float 32 Signal Source Block 331 Output 2 Tag Mame Descriptor fF Off Label OFF On Label ON Cancel Enter Tag Name Descriptor Off Label On Label Also displayed is the item s default Modbus address and data type followed by any user defined addresses An input signal tag connector can be changed to another signal tag connector or to a page connector Double click on
67. its reference in the File Delete Safety Worksheet Browser Reorder Process Opens the Worksheet order dialog box Allows you to change the order of the Worksheets Reorder worksheets as they appear at the bottom of the Worksheet area Click on Safety Worksheets worksheet name and use the increment decrement buttons at the top of the dialog box to change the worksheet order Worksheet Properties Opens the Worksheet Properties dialog box Allows you to enter or edit the Title and Description of the worksheet Type in a title 24 characters and description 32 characters for your Worksheet Unlock Worksheets Displays Unlock Worksheets dialog box Enter password to unlock all protected worksheets Click on Unlock Block and Tag Order Opens the Block Execution Order or the Fast Block Execution Order dialog box to let you re arrange block execution order Also available from the Process or Safety worksheet toolbar Select Tag Order to re arrange the tags order for Alternator Operates Device Controls HOA Switches Loops Ramp Operates Sequencers SP Programmers SP Schedulers Stage Operates Loop Mode Priority Opens the Loop Mode Priority dialog box Lets you select which has priority Manual Mode or Tracking Mode Opens the Alarm Group Configuration dialog box Lets you set up or edit alarm groups Also available from the Process or Safety worksheet toolbar Events Opens the Configure Event List dia
68. mA Output alx HC900 C50S Rev 6 0x Ped_ConfigC50S 2 Worksheet Mode Switch Meose i toolbox E Loop Switch window Er iii LPSW174 68 AUTOTUN J o ATC Sswo ACTION gt _ gt CACT Force eT __ gt Fer STUN_CON1 o ATUN1 Status bar Page Ge C gt gt I Zoom 100 Worksheet window s Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 User Interface General Terminology General Terminology Browser Defaults to the top left side of the Worksheet is a dockable window listing opened files lt allows you to move quickly between files and worksheets Configuration A Configuration File contains a Control Strategy that you have created best suited for Files your application All Open Configuration Files appear in the Browser Window Recipe File A Recipe File refers to one of 4 types of user files a Recipe file consisting of Variables only a Setpoint Profile a Setpoint Schedule or a Sequence Data Storage A Data Storage File contains a data storage schedule for loading at the operator File interface via storage media Function Blocks A Function Block is a unit of software that performs a set of operations on its Input Signals and Function Block parameters and produces Output Signals These output signals can be configured as inputs to other blocks whose output parameters can be configured as inputs to other function blocks and so on Main Window The Main Window contain
69. mode Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 81 September 2013 Data Storage Data Storage Enable Conditions D m mo gt x a ee N Three Levels of Enabling 82 There are three levels of Data Storage Enable Data Storage Disable Signal Operator Interface See Note 1 Data Type Enable Signals Batch Command Enable Signal Note 1 Since any storage schedules loaded into the system automatically enables storage the operator interface can disable storage Data Type Enable Signals This level of control is the Data Type Enable Signal Each data type trends point log and alarms events has its own Enable Signal that can either be configured as a digital signal on the Designer or if not configured as a digital signal NONE selected on Designer Data Storage Configuration it will appear on the Storage Control menu on the operator interface For example if the Trend Enable Signal is configured as a digital signal in the Designer Data Storage Configuration it will not appear on the Storage Control menu on the operator interface This is done to avoid having two conflicting sources for the enable signal When a digital signal is not used the Trend enable signal is set to enable when the configuration is loaded The Trends can then be disabled from the Operator Interface The Enable Signal has two functions for Point Log storage In Continuous and Batch modes it enables Point Log storage to begin at the St
70. provides a drop list of Alarm groups You can configure e For controller Rev 4 0 or higher 30 Alarm Groups of 12 alarm points each for a total of 360 alarm points in the controller e For lower revisions 20 Alarm Groups of 12 alarm points each for a total of 240 alarm points Each group contains a set of selected digital signal tags An Alarm may be any Digital Signal Tag All alarms are displayed at the Ol Each alarm point can be configured to generate an E mail notification Procedure 1 Select a Display Group from the drop down menu Digital signals will be displayed in the Selected Tags field 2 From the Selected Tags List drop down menu select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list The default selection is ALL 3 For Safety enabled configurations only From the Safety Filter drop down menu select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list The default selection is ALL 4 Enter the group title Use any mix of numbers letters and spaces 5 Select a tag then click on ADD the selected signal tag will be placed in the next available position in the Selected Tags field OR Select a position in the Selected Tags field then click on INSERT The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required 6 Repeat the selection for up to 12 tags for each group 7 Select a signal in the Selected Tags field and click on ALARM DETAILS and enter Ala
71. publish or otherwise make available any software copies thereof to others You acknowledge that the Software is a trade secret of Honeywell You agree to secure and protect each program software product and copies thereof in a manner consistent with the maintenance of Honeywell s rights therein and to take appropriate action by instruction or agreement within your organization to satisfy your obligations hereunder Violation of these provisions shall be a basis for immediate termination of this license Termination of the license shall be in addition to and not in lieu of any other legal or equitable remedies available in Honeywell Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide jii September 2013 About This Document Abstract The Designer program operates on a PC with Windows 2000 XP Vista or Windows 7 It lets you create edit view and monitor HC900 Process Control control strategy configurations as well as your Operator Interface menu screen and button configurations It uses graphic symbols and line drawing connections to represent control strategies Completed configurations are loaded into the control system using a dedicated communication port in the controller References The following list identifies all documents that may be sources of reference for material discussed in this publication Document Title Doc ID HC900 Controller Technical Overview 51 52 03 31 Legacy HC900 Controller Installation and User Guide 51 52
72. remove the constantly displayed value left click on the pin again or right click and select Monitor Pins again from the menu 204 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Logic Flow Toggling All Pin Values on Worksheet Select on the Monitor Toolbar or select Monitor Pins from the Monitor menu NOTE Any pin values shown when monitor mode is exited will be re shown when Monitor mode is re entered This only applies to the current session of the application and not between sessions of the application Logic Inversion Color Codes Certain function blocks such as Discrete Input Output and logic blocks have an Invert feature that when selected inverts the state of the block s input or output These blocks have special logic inversion indicators when viewed in monitor mode The examples below use the color scheme RED OFF GREEN ON To select the opposite color scheme RED ON GREEN OFF go to Monitor menu then Set Logic State Colors Logic Blocks Inversion Indicators RED OFF GREEN ON Ts EEE ANDS43 19 a Lois i Digital Input Blocks Inversion Indicators ON or Inverted ON D224 a oi0g01 M FAIL L5 04 OFF or Inverted OFF Dlzz25 a2 010402 MA FAIL LS 09 LS 09 Digital Output Blocks Inversion Indicators Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 205 September 2013 On Line Monit
73. sample of Point Log data is taken when the Point Log Enable changes from off disable to on enable How Storage is Enabled Data collection may be started through key actions from the operator interface keyboard or from digital status signals from the controller An S in the status line of the operator interface display indicates active storage For detailed information refer to Data Storage Enable Conditions Disk Capacity The disk capacity in time is calculated and displayed once all storage initialization is complete This eliminates the need for manual calculations and gives the operator the exact duration of the disk All file types in the data storage feature may be configured to stop collecting data when the file is full or to continue in a circular storage mode roll over where the oldest data is discarded as new data is collected When roll over is not selected a disk full warning indication is provided in the status line of the display The configurator as required may change the percent full limit A storage buffer in the operator interface allows changing the disk media without the loss of process data 80 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Data Storage Data Storage Enable Conditions Calculation for Data Storage Capacity Disk factor RT Trend Capacity In Hours F1 F2 R1UR2 Where Rl and R2 are the storage rates fin seconds for Trend 1 and Trend respectively Fl an
74. state Click OK 72 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Display Worksheet Event Details Event Details The Event Details dialog box enables you to enter details for the tag selected when you configure events The block number and output number are listed across the banner The Tag name and tag descriptor is listed in field below the banner Events do not have multiple priorities like alarms They are considered a lower priority than alarms Details include E Mail Notification of events on a point by point basis Check the box to allow Email notification The E mail will be sent if an event occurs on a point configured to send E mail to any all of the 3 E mail addresses that have events assigned Event priorities are always indicated as 1 Store to OIl Archive List OI Event File on the data archive disk on an event by event basis Display on Ol presentation on Ol Status line and Event Summary display Trigger Direction ON Event on rising edge Off to on transition OFF Event on falling edge off to on transition click on radio button to select E Mail Notification opens the E Mail Notification dialog box It lets you configure up to three E Mail addresses per controller configuration for Alarm and Event notification There are two tabs on the dialog Box General Tab FROM The Controller name is configured by the builder of the Configuration file Read Only SUBJECT
75. the Alarm Event tab on the Data Storage Configuration dialog box Batch Enable This signal starts and stops storage for Alarm Events configured for Batch storage It does Signal not affect Continuous storage selections From the pull down menu select NONE Batch is started stopped only through the operator interface s Data Storage Control Menu defaults to Stop on configuration download ANY DIGITAL TAG Batch is started stopped only through the on off state of the selected Digital Signal It will not appear on the operator interface s data Storage Control Menu For detailed information concerning Data Storage Enable refer to Data Storage Enable Conditions Alarm File Name Enter a File Name There is a maximum of 8 Aloha Numeric characters DOS File Name restrictions Alarm File Enter an Alarm File Record Limit number of from 150 to 1500 Record Limit Event File Name File Name Enter a File Name There is a maximum of 8 characters a File Name There is a maximum of 8 characters A File Enter an Event File Record Limit number of from 150 to 1500 Record Limit Data Type This enable signal turns storage on and off for Alarm Events Enable Signal From the pull down menu select NONE Alarm Event Storage Enable is started stopped only through the operator interface s Data Storage Control Menu defaults to Enable on configuration download or ANY DIGITAL TAG Alarm Event Storage is started stopped only through
76. the Al card itself gi opens the Calibrate Modules dialog box There are four tabs on the Dialog Box Al Channel see Calibrate Al Channel CJ Temp see Calibrate CJ Temp AO Channel see Calibrate AO Channel PPO Block see Calibrate Position Proportional Output Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 153 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Calibrate Modules Calibrate Al Channel The Calibrate Al Channel tab allows you to calibrate the selected Al to ensure that the 0 and 100 values selected during configuration is actually correct ATTENTION You should not access the Utilities Calibrate Controller Analog I O display while the OIl calibration display is being displayed or vice versa Calibration can t be done as long as both displays are shown user must exit either display to do a calibration To calibrate an Al Channel 1 Enter a Rack Module and Channel 2 Click on Select Input The program will then poll the controller to see if the selected Al exists 3 The Cal 0 button is now available Connect a reference supply to the input pins of the Al The reference supply must have the following characteristics T C mV Volts Inputs 1 microvolt resolution Ohms RTD Inputs 0 1 Ohm resolution 4 20mA inputs 4 microamp resolution 4 Set the reference supply to the reference value shown The reference value is displayed below the Instrument Status section Click on Cal 0 to calibrate
77. the on off state of the selected Digital Signal It will not appear on the operator interface s data Storage Control Menu For detailed information concerning Trend Storage Enable to Alarm Even rage Enabl Conditions Storage Mode From the pull down menu select a Storage Mode Refer to Data Storage Conventions for mode definitions Rollover Click this box to allow data storage to continue collecting data in a circular storage mode where the oldest data is discarded as new data is collected Clear this box to allow data storage to stop collecting data when the file is full You can configure a Warning Level for Disk Full Warning Level If you do not select rollover enter a percent in the appropriate box Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 89 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet FB Worksheet Overview Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet FB Worksheet Overview Function Block Diagram Worksheets let you build your control strategy graphically right on the User Interface It provides a full complement of SAMA style symbols that we call Function Blocks that can be softwired to each other It also includes signal tag generation capability for resident control data that can be linked to displays and other software programs The Function Block Diagram Worksheet has a Toolbar to launch dialog boxes to configure Worksheet Properties Enter a configuration name and description in the
78. top of the diagram 4 The background color of the Function Block Diagram changes to YELLOW a s HC900 C50 Rev 1 Config1031081158 cde lt Monitoring gt ak A Gir eA 22 A G CONTROL LOOPS FAIL f WARN je MDRGI MODE be Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 191 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Monitor Update Rate Monitor Update Rate Introduction You can specify the monitor update rate that determines how often data is collected from the controller during monitoring This update rate can be set to either 1 4 second 1 2 second 1 second or 5 seconds This option is allowed only during edit mode not while you are monitoring the controller The default monitor update rate is 1 second and this update rate is remembered between sessions of the software If you want to monitor from a relatively slow computer set the monitor update rate to a slow setting Procedure Select Set Update Rate from the Monitor menu on the Main Drop down menus Select an Update Rate from the Sub menu 1 4 Second 1 2 Second 1 Second or 5 seconds Monitor Toolbar Monitor eee xf Dm B A T Es a SF Ot ty oe Be Click on ICON to open a dialog box More than one dialog box can be open at a time The Monitor Toolbar toggles monitor windows for the following CON Function Window Comments gt Watch Summary Toggles the Watch Summary Window that lets you view groups of related data such as I O and Si
79. with the symbol indicates it is rising edge sensitive The pin is ON after its source signal changes from OFF to ON Examples HOLD is level sensitive RST is rising edge sensitive 11 Each I O block corresponds to a physical address in a rack That address rack module channel is shown at the top of the block Fast Scan Indicator The Fast Scan Indicator is a yellow lightning bolt that has been placed somewhere on the face of the function block See the example below 000000 Az FAIL ATTENTION For information on update rates for these blocks refer to the Fast Scan Function Blocks 116 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Before You Start Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Before You Start The Designer software operates on a PC independently from the controller hardware until after the configuration is completed and downloaded For this reason you must identify the hardware that will be used in the controller so that the configuration constructed will match the intended I O quantity and location in the controller There are two basic methods to begin configuring the controller 1 Start with the physical I O requirements of the controller Identify the I O Configure the I O blocks Download and test the O first then Configure the Control Safety Strategy or 2 Start with the Control Safety S
80. 00 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Sequences Create Edit Sequence File Step Item Action Description Event 2 Next Step Each state of the sequence can also be configured to accept two different events to terminate the step Whichever occurs first an Off to On rising edge transition of either event signal OR elapsed step time will cause the sequence to advance to the appropriate next step Enter a value for Event 2 Next Step Advance Next Step Allows you to select an appropriate action for the manual advance Ol action or function block digital advance input Enter a value Download Downloads sequence to the controller s schedule pool where it can be edited or loaded into the controller s active configuration Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 185 September 2013 Sequences Sequence Pool Sequence Pool Introduction The Sequence Pool lets you add or delete a Sequence on a list of configured Sequences and also enter the Properties function and the Edit Sequence function to set up each Sequence Configuration When you select Sequences from the Recipes menu the Sequence Pool dialog box will be displayed From left to right the icons are Ba Fler Se SS ome Tal ADD a Sequence Select the NEW Icon The Sequence Properties dialog box will open EDIT the Properties of an Existing Sequence Select the Worksheet Properties Icon The Sequence Properties dialog
81. 1 FAIL 9 010305 E 010209 FAIL FAIL FAIL HOT 132 ONDT138 4 ONDT 139 5 ONCT140 la RUN a ere ce RUH a Ee RUH S Beer Maem ere ore err pode 34 Pi poo 35 i DOO Een ce WB ooog i ice MB o10s08 gt oe MB 10312 N74 56 ONDTIFS 40 cH FAIL FAIL FAIL ce RUN a OUT F PRFI z9 ONDT135 1 ONDTIS6 Z ONDT137 amp Sennen DO 4 enn me DO 2 oo Signal Tags and Connectors Page Connectors Digital Signal Tags and Connectors Page Connectors include color coded representations for state changes as substitutes for soft wires To select one of the following color schemes go to Monitor menu then Set Logic State Colors Solid Green On Dotted Red Off Logic State at the Output Pin ON The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in solid GREEN Logic State at the Output Pin OFF The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in dashed RED Solid Red On Dotted Green Off Logic State at the Output Pin ON The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in solid RED Logic State at the Output Pin OFF The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in dotted GREEN Revision 15 HC900 Process Contro
82. 15 September 2013 Status Bar User Interface Status Bar The status bar is located along the bottom of the application s window It indicates information about the current window It can be turned on or off in the View Menu Menu Item Description The text string at the far left on the status bar gives a brief description of the menu item in focus If you pull down a menu list and position the cursor on a menu item this field will describe the menu item Creates a new Controller document Connected Furnacel E Page 3 Jajal 1 PL Zo0m 100 CAP NUM Connected Field To the left of the Page Number indicator are two fields that are visible when you are in Monitor Mode One indicates Connected and the other is a green LED that flashes when communications is active between the PC and controller Worksheet Page Number To the left of the Zoom indicator is a page number field This will display the page number of the current FBD Worksheet It is blank for other worksheet types Display Controller and Utilities There are scroll buttons to navigate through pages of the worksheet Zoom Level indicates the level of Zoom active on the worksheet i e 100 Active Keyboard Keys Toward the far right you will see indicators to alert the user that the Caps Lock key on the keyboard is active the NUM lock on the keyboard is active or the SCRL Scroll Lock key is active Menu Conventions The following menu conventions are us
83. 4 PTMRIOZ 2 PTMRIOS 4 PTMRAO4 RST EVENT mH RST EVENT a RST EVENT S RST EVENT D SwAOG 5 oe A z ce B E SA Loop backs are allowed AOR 1 Ee You can drag a wire node without breaking its connections 126 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Signal Tags Signal Tags SIGTAG Introduction Signal tags are users assigned names that can be associated with the output of any item They can be Assigned to displays Used to connect discontinuous wires to other block inputs using connectors in the same or in another FBD Worksheet Assigned to Data Storage Used for Peer to Peer communication between multiple networked controllers using Modbus communications To identify important block output pins for monitoring Procedure Right click on an Output pin and select Signal Tag Drops the signal tag down and automatically connects it to the pin Skip to Step 4 OR From the Worksheet Toolbox Other Items drag and drop the Signal Tag symbol im to the controller configuration OR Right click on white space in your function block diagram and select Drop Other Items Signal Tag The Signal Tag symbol will appear on the Controller configuration and the cursor will change to the softwire cursor Attention You cannot drop a signal tag directly onto an output pin Drop it away from the pin then softwire it to the pin Once
84. 5 September 2013 File Management Downloading a File to the Controller damage Downloading in Run Mode Hot Start is a means to make configuration changes and download them to the controller without taking the process off line It is intended for incremental changes to a running configuration such as Adding and Deleting Blocks Modifying block configuration parameters Adding changing soft wires signals variables Adding OI displays Data Storage Adding Recipes SP Profiles SP Schedules or Sequencers Adding deleting or modifying I O DI DO Al AO IMPORTANT If you intend to make a set of changes to a running configuration and wish to preserve the context of the current configuration parameters you should perform an upload from the controller first to assure that you have the current configuration make the incremental changes and then download Cautions Configuration Change Transfer Once the HOT START button is depressed the configuration will be updated with the new changes Note During the time period required to perform the Hot Start the controller will suspend the execution of its function blocks and hold its outputs at their current value If you select Hot Start and the Hot Start will take longer than approximately three controller scan cycles a popup window appears This hot start will take about 10 seconds to complete During this time the outputs will be held Do you wish to proceed with the hot st
85. 53 Expansion Port Diagnostics 228 Controller Utility Functions 129 Expansion Port Diagnostics Status Indicators Controller Worksheet Overview 59 229 Converting a UMC800 Database 36 Export Delimiter 20 Copy 20 89 Export Report 242 Revision 14 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 289 September 2013 Index Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators F How to Add a New Worksheet 90 l l How to Add Worksheet Protection 44 98 Fast Logic Indicator 108 How to Change A FBD Worksheet Properties 97 Fast Scan Indicator 108 How to Change the Worksheet Order 97 FB Worksheet Overview 89 How to Delete a FBD Worksheet 97 FBD Configuration Toolbar 89 How to Find an Item on the FBD Worksheet 96 FBD Worksheet Properties 97 How to Manage PC Comm Ports and how to change 9 Connections 49 File Browser Window 11 How to Navigate Between FBD Worksheets 91 File Menu 18 Designer Main Menus 17 File Properties 44 File Protection 48 I a eras hee I O Module Diagnostics Status Indications 217 Find Where Used 28 K Finding a Tag Name 199 oe Finding an Item on the FBD Worksheet 199 Keyboard Navigation 30 92 Fixed Modbus Map 244 247 L Forced Blocks Window 191 Forcing Unforcing an Output 188 Logic Inversion Color Codes 196 Function block 105 107 126 195 accessing details 126 M how to display pin value 195 Main Menu 17 inputs and outputs 105 Main Menus 17 Types 107 Main Toolbar Functions 26 Function Block 110 Manually Write Database to Flash 144 adding moving deleting 110 M
86. 76 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Display Worksheet Message Display Configuration Message Display Configuration r4 on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Message Display Configuration dialog box This selection lets you configure 10 pages of Help Message Displays Configuration Procedure Select a page from the drop down menu or navigate to the desired page using the Forward Reverse buttons on the top of the dialog box Enter a title text for the display The title can be one line in length but there is a maximum of 24 characters per line Enter a message text for the display The message can be up to 11 lines in length for each page but there is a maximum of 32 characters per line Example START UP NOTES Usk RECIPE 1 AFTER SHUTDOWN CHANGE SETPOINT TO 4450 SHUT OFF PUMP 1 TUEN OFF WATER VALVE RESET LIMIT CONTROL VERIFY WATER LEVEL ON TANE 1 Unlock the Worksheets opens the Unlock Worksheets dialog box Unlock Worksheets Enter the password to unlock all protected worksheets OOOO Cancel Enter the password in the field and then press UNLOCK How to add change worksheet protection Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 77 September 2013 Data Storage Data Storage Overview Data Storage Note This section does not apply to the 900 Control Station Data Storage Overview The Data Storage feature provides background storage o
87. A setpoint value set for Ramp starting Setpoint value and Soak soak setpoint value segments Soak A soak segment is a combination of soak setpoint value and soak duration time Segments The last segment must be a Soak The soak setpoint range value must be within the setpoint high and low range limits in engineering units SOAK TIME is the duration of the soak and is determined in TIME Hours or Minutes Range 0 00 hr to 999 99 hr 0 00 min to 999 99 min This selection is made when you configure properties Synchronizing Two setpoint programs operating on the same time base can be synchronized using the Programs Synchronize SYNC function block This block automatically starts the second program when the first program is started and maintains synchronization when either program is place in hold What is a Setpoint Program A Setpoint Program is really a setpoint versus time profile that establishes the setpoint values and how they are to vary with time Each setpoint profile consists of segments Each segment of the profile may be a ramp or a soak except the last step that must be a soak In addition to the main ramp and soak output value a second analog value Aux Output is available for each step of the program This output is a fixed soak value that may be used to provide a setpoint value for a secondary control loop in the process An example would be a ramp and soak temperature program combined with pressure setpoin
88. AD a Schedule To download a Schedule to the controllers Schedule pool click on the Download icon 180 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Setpoint Schedules Setup Edit Setpoint Schedule in Pool Setup Edit Setpoint Schedule in Pool Introduction The Edit Schedule dialog box lets you set up or edit a schedule from the schedules listed in the Setpoint Schedule Pool Make sure you have clicked on Properties and have configured the properties for that specific Schedule Edit a Schedule Click on a schedule name in the active field and select the Edit Segments Icon 8rd from left from the Toolbar on the dialog box or double click on the schedule name The Edit Schedule Segments dialog box will appear with the selected Schedule indicated on the top banner The Designer presents multiple segments at a time to view and edit To ADD a Segment Click on ADD on the dialog box Anew Segment number will appear at the bottom of the segment list To DELETE a Segment Click on a segment number in the field and click Delete on the dialog box The segment will be deleted and all the segment numbers following the deletion will be changed To EDIT a Segment Each segment contains the following Segment attributes click on field for drop down menu to appear for some selections Parameter Description Entry Information Length of time for the segment Value in Minutes or Time Units wer
89. AZO 1 0120 001 ANDAZ4 7 0121 001 FBD Configuration 1 FAD Contiguration 2 OR 123 g 0120 001 0121 001 gt oe FAD Configuration 1 FBD Configuration 2 After pasting on a different worksheet and Split dangling soft wires using page connectors ANDA2O zj p g AHD121 p p FBD Configuration 7 FBD Configuration 2 98 0120 004 0427 001 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 0120 0014 0121 004 0R123 3 FAD Configuration 1 FRED Configuration 2 Revision 15 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet How to Find an Item on the FBD Worksheet How to Find an Item on the FBD Worksheet ea On the FBD worksheet lets you find an item and all places it is used Such as a signal tag used multiple times Access From Edit menu or by right clicking an item on the FBD worksheet Opens the Find Item dialog box Find Item Show fan Tagged Items ltem Find Results Block Variable From the Show drop down menu choose an item type al Tagged tems Analog Signals Digital Signals Analog Yarables Digital Variables Analog Page Connectors Digital Page Connectors Tagged Blocks All Function Blocks From the Item drop down menu choose an item If you already right clicked on an item in the FBD worksheet it will be displayed here Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 99
90. Access functions include on line monitoring Live Monitor Overview Uploading and Downloading Configurations Procedure 1 Click on the Utilities tab 2 Under PC Port Setup click on a Comm Port 3 The Serial Comm Port Properties dialog box opens Click on the Enable Port box a 4 4 From the Port drop down menu select COMx MODEM button 5 Click on this icon and the Select the Number To Call will appear will appear next to the Statistics To Hang Up a call select Hangup Modem from the File Menu in the Main Menu A message will ask you to confirm that you want to hang up Select the Number to Call Select the Number to Call Dialog Box To ADD a Phone Number Type in the Phone Number Name and Comments in their respective fields then click on ADD to List The information will appear in the Phone Number List To DELETE a Phone Number Click on a name or number in the Phone Number List and click Remove from list The line will be deleted and all the Phone numbers and names will move up one line To SELECT a number to call Click on a name or number in the Phone Number List and click Dial To Hang Up a call Select Hangup Modem from the File Menu in the Main Menu A message will ask you to confirm that you want to hang up Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 57 September 2013 PC Comm Ports and Connections Communications Statistics Communications Stati
91. Block Diagram Worksheets e Display and configure control logic This category is sub divided into Process Worksheets e 20 per configuration for C30 C30S C50 C508 e 40 per configuration for C70 C70S C70R C75 C75S Safety Worksheets e 20 per configuration for C30S C508 e 40 per configuration for C70S C75S e Only available for SIL compliant controller types e Only available in revision 6 0 and above Modbus Map Worksheet e Only available in revision 4 0 and higher configurations using a Custom Modbus Address Map e 1 per configuration Utilities Worksheet e Provides access to a variety of maintenance functions for the controller e 1 per configuration Each Worksheet may have full or restricted access Worksheet Protection Worksheet Category Tabs A configuration is organized into categories shown as tabs at the bottom of the Main window Controller Display Function Blocks Process Safety Modbus Map Rev 4 0 configurations and higher with custom Modbus map An additional tab Utilities is provides access to a variety of useful functions that interact with the controller FRO Configuration 21 ERD Controller W visplay Function Blocks Modbus R Utilties Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 59 September 2013 Controller Worksheet Controller Worksheet Overview Controller Worksheet Controller Worksheet Overview There is one worksheet for the configuration It displays the I O
92. C Time Controller Time Select method for writing Time and Date to the Controller Revision 15 September 2013 Current Date Current Time Time Zone Current Date Current Time Set to PC Time Manually Override Time Set Controller Time Indicates PC s date time and time zone Shows Controller s current date and time This is updated when you click on Set Controller Time button below PC s date and time indicated here will be used by controller Date and time entered here will be used by controller Writes PC or manual Date and Time to the controller Current Controller Time top of window will be updated A status message confirms the update HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Time Read Only opens the Set Controller Time dialog box Screens differ according to the version of HC Read only Click radio button to select Click radio button and enter desired date and time Click to set time 145 Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Time Version 4 1 and later There are two tabs in this window Time and Date tab Lets you set controller time to the PC time and assign a time zone to the controller Network Time Server and DST tab Lets you assign a Network Time Server that periodically synchronizes the controller time Lets you specify when controller time changes to Daylight Saving Version 4 1 Time and Date tab crow mem Toese n
93. Configuration Configuration Upload transfers a configuration FROM the controller TO the PC including graphic function block pages text annotations stored recipes profiles schedules sequences Ol display assignments Ol data storage setup The uploaded file name as a default will include the controller name alias name if assigned and network name if assigned The Controller may be in ANY mode No configuration file is required to be opened prior to the Upload Request Opens the Upload dialog box that lists the type of recipes available to upload Click on a radio button to select one of the following Recipes Variables Setpoint Profile Setpoint Schedule Sequence Data Storage Upload transfers a recipe FROM the controller TO the software Back up Controller Saves a controller s active configuration as a backup file with cbk extension Similar to saving an uploaded configuration except that the configuration and port settings are saved You are prompted to specify the comm link settings for the controller to be backed up Backup files are read only to edit you must first save as cde See Back Up Controller Information for more details Hang Up Modem When communicating with a controller via a Modem select this to disconnect the Modem from the controller Properties Displays the Eile Properties dialog box Tabs allow user to fill in Configuration File properties read Configuration File Statistics capaci
94. Enter a value from End Segment This designates the number of the last 2 to 50 segment of the loop The last segment of a program must be a soak segment Last segment of a loop can be a ramp or soak Enter a value from This number lets the program repeat 0 to 100 loop a specified number of time from beginning to end An entry of 0 will cause an indefinite loop START RESTART Enter a value in Engineering Units Restart Rate The Restart Rate value is used to return the process to the last operating setpoint prior to power loss when restart input is connected to power off timing block Click on the tab to access the properties for that tab Enter the information required for each tab then click OK Click on the profile name in the Setpoint Profile Pool and select the Edit Segments Icon 3rd from left from the Toolbar on the dialog box 178 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Setpoint Schedules Create Edit Setpoint Schedule file Setpoint Schedules Create Edit Setpoint Schedule file Creates edits a setpoint schedule be saved as a file SCH File can be downloaded to the setpoint schedule pool A schedule in the pool can be edited or loaded into the controller s active configuration Step Item Action Description Select File Open Lets you choose a SCH file to edit After selecting file the Schedule Editor appears Select File New Choose a new file type box appears Select
95. Enter an Event Subject up to 31 characters Enter an Alarm Subject up to 31 characters To List Tab Enter up to 3 configurable E Mail addresses 32 characters per addresses For each Email address check the Alarm Event priorities you want the E mail address to receive Events do not have multiple priorities like alarms because they are considered at a priority lower than all alarms Alarm priorities were set during Alarm Group Configuration under Alarm Details 2 Low Priority Alarm 3 Medium Priority Alarm 4 High Priority Alarms 5 Emergency Alarm The priority of an event is always indicated as 1 see Event Configuration Attention See Set Controller Network Parameters and follow the wizard to set up a SMTP mail server IP Address Examples Somebody somewhere com receives only priority 5 Alarms only the check box for 5 is checked Aperson somewhere com receives all Alarms and Events all 5 boxes are checked People somewhere com receives only Events only check box for 1 is checked Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 73 September 2013 Display Worksheet Operator Interface Settings Operator Interface Settings Note This section does not apply to the 900 Control Station on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Operator Interface Settings Dialog Box Select one of the tabs Security Save Main Menu Language Security Tab This lets you configure download an
96. F 1 St OAOF 7 So Process ONOFF131 ONOF131 Safety OMOFF1 32 ONOF1 32 Safety AOTaa Safety ADAT a4 For controller configurations that support the SIL Safety standard the function blocks in the Process and Safety segments of the control strategy share the two execution rate systems As a result there is no filtering of Process versus Safety function blocks in this dialog but the location of the function block either Process or Safety is shown in the first column Note that for non SIL configurations there is no Safety portion so the Process Safety column shown in the figure above will not be present The relative position of the function blocks shown in the dialog list box can be selected and manipulated in a number of ways Single Function Block Select by clicking on that function block Use the up and down arrows in the list box tile bar to reposition the function block one row ata time Use Drag and Drop by clicking and holding on a block and dragging it to the desired location and releasing the mouse button Dragging to the top or bottom of the list box bounds will cause the list to scroll if the scrollbar is visible Consecutive Function Blocks 110 Select first function block by clicking and then select the last function block while holding down the Shift key while clicking Use the up and down arrows in the list box tile bar to reposition the group of function blocks one row at atime Use Drag and Drop by clicking o
97. Flash These functions prompt you to select a PC port to which to connect These functions communicate to a controller by using the PC Port displayed in Current PC to Controller Connection Settings Uploading a File from the Controller See page 36 Download a File to the Controller See page 37 and page 40 Set Controller Serial Ports Use this feature to set the RS232 legacy controllers and RS485 ports protocol 138 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Serial Ports d has two tabs Serial S1 RS232 and Serial S2 RS485 each with the following settings Honeywell ELN Default protocol Modbus RTU Master Select to set controller up as a master Modbus RTU Master Advanced Provides enhanced data throughput for applications where the HC900 is being used in conjunction with a Modbus to fieldbus gateway device See page 140 for details Modbus RTU Slave Select to set controller up as a slave Slave Type Multidrop select when using more than one slave on the selected PC port Point to point select for one slave Modem select when using a modem between the master and slave Slave Address Enter 1 247 or 255 Modbus Slave Double Register Format Each IEEE 32 bit floating point number requires two consecutive registers four bytes MSB 4 LSB 1 in byte order below starting with the register defined as the starting register for the infor
98. Good Lead and Reserve NWA N A CPUs working ok Reserve not Reserve CPU module N A Install Reserve CPU present is not plugged in Reserve Bad Comm Hardware failure Bad Lead module Replace faulty CPU Bad backplane a rack Reserve CPU module is plugged in but not communicating Reserve or Lead CPU module could be bad Backplane could be bad 282 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Replace faulty CPU Replace rack Revision 15 September 2013 Redundancy Lead CPU Status Indicators Port Diagnostics Data Link Failure Reserve CPU module The lead CPU will Replace faulty CPU is not plugged in continue to control the Replace rack Reserve CPU module process but failover is is plugged in but not not possible communicating Hardware Failure Bad Redundancy link The lead CPU will Replace faulty CPU hardware detectedon continue to control the the lead CPU process but failover is not possible Lead CPU Status Indicators The Lead Diagnostics Overview dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the following list These parameters are also shown for the Reserve Diagnostics Overview a E Possible Cause Controller Action Action Watchdog Watchdog reset ASYS block s HW OK pin 1 Force a cold start resulting from is turned off Upgrade control file software failure software Replace CPU board 4 Contact Honeywell Personnel Prefetch Abort CPU failed when 1 Controller performs a
99. Honeywell HC900 Process Control Designer Software User Guide Doc No 51 52 25 110 Revision 15 Date September 2013 Honeywell Process Solutions Notices and Trademarks Copyright 2013 by Honeywell Revision 15 September 2013 WARRANTY REMEDY Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective materials and faulty workmanship Contact your local sales office for warranty information If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell during the period of coverage Honeywell will repair or replace without charge those items it finds defective The foregoing is Buyer s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Specifications may change without notice The information we supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing However we assume no responsibility for its use While we provide application assistance personally through our literature and the Honeywell web site it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of the product in the application Honeywell Process Solutions Honeywell 1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S Houston TX 77042 HC900 Process Control is a U S trademark of Honeywell Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 License Agreement Read this agreement before opening the soft
100. IP Address Messages Recernved Application Errors Clear Statistics Port Diagnostic Protocol Network IP Address Messages Recerved Application Errors Clear Statistics Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 245 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics Host Connections Diagnostics Status Indicators The Network Host Connections Diagnostic Summary dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list Connections Application Error Atleast 1 response 1 Rack 1 monitor block s eas to a host resulted in COMPORT DIAG is an exception code set to WARNING causing the exception 2 Rack 1 monitor block s code and fix RACK OK pin is turned off 3 ASYS block s HW OK pin is turned off At host determine which message is Peer to Peer Connections Diagnostics The Designer provides live monitoring of the Peer to Peer Connections The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start up and during on line operation 1 Select Controller Ports Diagnostics from the Monitor drop down menu then select Peer to Peer Connections from the list provided This window can be launched from the Utilities Worksheet Select Controller Diagnostics icon then select Controller Ports Diagnostics then Peer to Peer Connections 3 The Peer to Peer Connections dialog box will appear x irite Peer PDE266 FURNACE ame Peer Diagnostic aT IF A
101. Icon 3rd from left from the Toolbar on the dialog box or double click on the Sequence name The Edit Sequence dialog box will appear with the selected Sequence indicated on the top banner Several Steps are shown for viewing and editing To ADD a Step Click on ADD on the dialog box A new Step number will appear at the bottom of the Step list 186 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Sequences Setup Edit Sequence in Pool To DELETE a Step Click on a Step number in the field and click Delete on the dialog box The Step will be deleted and all the step numbers following the deletion will be changed To EDIT a Step Each step contains the following Step attributes Parameter Description Entry Information State Number State number for each step of the sequence Enter a State Number in each A state may be selected multiple times inthe active field States are sequence Since time is an attribute of the numbered from 1 to 50 sequence the state may be activated for a different time period each time it is selected The order does not have to be sequential State Name Name of current state N A Time in Step Time duration value for each step of the Enter values for all Steps in the sequence appropriate fields Time Units are selected on the Sequence Properties dialog box Time Next Step Designates the step the sequence will Enter a number for the next advance to when the time expires It can be s
102. ONUS 24 RECIPES MEMU rraipena a a a aa 25 ATO O AE aTi E EE EE E EE EEE EE E E I ene de Sint EE E E E 25 FAS ION riii e E AE E ET EEE 26 Mam VOOID AP FUNCTIONS a a a eE 27 Navigational TOOS arnese a o 29 RIONENOU SC O OR a E E E EPR nr ae eens nae et ce ere Or 29 Keyboard Navigatio Mesias tec ee tach eaee ureter aeons screed ci cas ela tas acti es llc ae caddie 31 Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 vil FILE MANAGEMEN FP cinsa 33 OPENING an EXISUNG FIE Taarn E E OE a EEO aN 33 Creating a New Configuration File cccccccccccsesecceseseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeessaaeeeeseas 33 Saving Ay GOMMOURANOM FIE cics a esas Serene ioxtemsiegeesdsdaaedeeaniaeies 33 Creating Other File Types sirisser 35 Gonvering AGIOO GONfGuUIrall ONS pecene er a eed eee 36 Uploading a File from the Controller sssini o a 36 Downloading a File to the Controller cc ccccccccsseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeseessaaeeess 37 Downloading Controller FirtmWware cccccccssecceceessececeeeeeceeeeeeceeeseeeeeesseeaeeeeseegeeessaeeeees 40 Download Firmware Error M SSQQGG ccccssececeseeeeceeseecseeeecseseecegeessaueeessneessaueeeess 42 PICA TOD CICS errtnatuakeert EA E animes 43 HOW tO Add Worksheet Protection zeriisrinaena r elect 44 File Read ProteClonm morenie E a anette 47 VV FIG FPROLECL ai FIIO geons a e a a a S 48 PC COMM PORTS AND CONNECTIONS nannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
103. Pool Click CLOSE on the Recipe Pool dialog box to complete the configuration Recipe Properties The Recipe Properties dialog box contains fields for you to enter e arecipe name you want assigned to the recipe which will be added to the pool e a descriptor of 16 characters 174 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Setpoint Profiles Create Edit Setpoint Profile File Setpoint Profiles Create Edit Setpoint Profile File Creates edits a setpoint profile be saved as a file PRF File can be downloaded to the setpoint profile pool A profile in the pool can be edited or loaded into the controller s active configuration Step Item Action Description Select File Open Lets you choose a PRF file to edit After selecting file the Profile Editor appears POR o Choose a new file type box appears Name and Identify the profile Description Properties This function lets you set the properties for the profile The information configured here will appear in the Edit SP Profile dialog box Ramp Type Properties of the profile You can change these under Properties Eng Units Time Units Aux Out Units Guar Hold Type Guar Hold High Guar Hold Low Adds a step Insers a sep Deletes selected step Type Ramp or Soak A ramp segment is a starting setpoint and the time or rate to reach the setpoint of the following segment Typically segment 1 will be a ramp SP Value Setpoint v
104. Process Control Designer User Guide 75 September 2013 Display Worksheet O I File Names for Disk Storage on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Ol File Names dialog box You can configure up to 25 file name roots 6 characters for use by the operator interface in disk storage The Operator Interface lets you choose a name root and append it with a 2 digit number Then a 3 character extension is automatically added to create a filename for the disk storage functions Please use DOS format File Names The first several names listed in the dialog box are defaults and can be changed Click on a box and enter a file name Start Up Display Configuration on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Start Up Display Configuration dialog box This selection lets you enter Title Text and Comment Text for your start up display The Start Up display is the first screen displayed following start up and is not associated with any display button This same text is also viewed on the Ol s Logoff Display Configuration Procedure Enter a title on the Startup display The title can be up to 2 lines in length but there is a maximum of 12 characters per line Enter a text message on the Startup display The message can be up to 4 lines in length but there is a maximum of 24 characters per line Example YOUR NA ME HERE SUPPORTING TEXT LINE 1 SUPPORTING TEXT LINE 2 SUPPORTING TEXT LINES SUPPORTING TEXT LINES
105. Ramp Type Rate Each ramp segment s time specifies Click on Radio button the RATE at which that profile s output will reach the next segment Time Each ramp segment s time is the TIME Click on Radio button allotted to the profile s output to reach the next segment s value in hours or minutes Guaranteed Hold Type None No guaranteed hold if a PV deviates a Click on Radio button specified amount above or below the profile output Per Segment Click on Radio button Lets you select specific segments for guaranteed soak where you set up the All Soaks profile ramps and soaks Click on Radio button All soaks will have a guaranteed soak Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 177 September 2013 Setpoint Profiles Setpoint Profile Properties All Segments Click on Radio button All segments will have a guaranteed soak Time Units Click on Radio button Hours This selection assigns the time units of all segments in HOURS Minutes Click on Radio button This selection assigns the time units of all segments in MINUTES Guaranteed A Number in Engineering Units above Enter a value Hold High the setpoint outside of which the timer halts Guaranteed Enter a Number in Engineering Units Enter a value Hold High below the setpoint outside of which the timer halts Jog Segment Segment number jog will go to Loop Enter a value from 1 to 49 Start Segment This designates the number of the first segment of the loop
106. Recipes tab Recipe types appear Select Setpoint Schedule The Schedule Editor appears THEN Select a Reference A schedule must have a configuration to give it context Select an open Configuration configuration from the pull down list If none available select Open Configuration to open one The configuration will open Click back to Schedule Editor and select the reference configuration Name and Description Identify the schedule Sets properties for the schedule such as time units and guaranteed hold limits Length of time for the segment SP1 SP8 Setpoint values For ramp segments these are the starting values Events 1 16 Segment events are digital switches that provide ON OFF output through an SPS function block When a segment event is turned ON it remains on until the end of the segment at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the next segment Select from the drop down menu which events you want to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment Aux1 Aux8 The auxiliary block supports up to 8 soak only outputs You can assign values to all eight Auxiliary Outputs for each segment GHold1 GHold8 Setpoint guarantee is provided for the master block setpoints with a single symmetrical value for each setpoint output Actions for the guarantee soak may be set on a per segment basis for OFF HIGH setpoint deviation LOW setpoint deviation or both HIGH and LOW setpoint deviations Click on an active fie
107. Register Addresses Custom Modbus Map Custom Modbus Map Access To access the custom Modbus register map to add or edit an address click on the Modbus Map tab Modbus Map Sos at the bottom of the display This tab is visible only after you configure your map type as custom Overview The custom Modbus map is applicable to the array of Modbus registers classified as holding registers or 4xxxxx registers using decimal addressing where xxxxx equals the Modbus address ranging from 1 65535 decimal O FFFE hex Use the custom map to assign any addressable parameter See page 267 to any address along with its data type float 32 integer 16 etc You can edit or create partitions of any size to help organize addresses Default partitions and addresses are based on the fixed map This is only a default starting point you can edit the custom map extensively or even erase it entirely and start from scratch To add an item to a map 1 Select a partition whose addresses you want to display or edit 2 Assign items to the map in two ways drag an item from the Configuration tab into an address or click on an address under the Item heading and choose an item to add 3 Select edit item s parameters Working with partitions You can view or edit addresses in defined partitions only Addresses in undefined partitions are not available until you create a new partition with those addresses Partitions need not be empty to be edite
108. Selected Display Formats list Click EDIT to change the Tag Order or to bring up the Display Tag Group Configuration dialog box Note You can also double click on an entry in the Groups Tag list or the Selected Display Formats list This action produces the same result as clicking on the Edit button for the selected entry Each time you configure a Loop PID CARB ONOFF TPSC or AMB SP Programmer SPP SP Scheduler SPS Sequencer Hands Off Auto Switch HOA Ramp Stage Alternator or Device Control DC function block you will have assigned a unique Tag Name to the block This selection lets you arrange tags to determine the tag order in various displays on the operator interface The order in which they appear in this Tag Order dialog box can be changed to coincide with the order in which you want them to be displayed For other Display Groups it allows you to go and edit the group for example Trend Bar Overview and others Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups Overview The Display Tag Groups let you configure groups of tags that can be accessed by the operator interface using a standard set of display formats and a predefined menu hierarchy These groups are configured using tabs that appear on the Display Tag Groups Configuration dialog box The groups are listed below After you have completed all the group configurations you can select the groups to be displayed and assign them to a specific operator panel d
109. September 2013 Display Worksheet Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups Select the Trend tab then Select Display Group from the drop down menu Analog signal tags and digital signal tags will be displayed in the Selected Tags field From the Selected Tags List drop down menu select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list The default selection is ALL Enter the group title Use any mix of numbers letters and spaces Select a Tag Name from the Select Tag List Click on ADD the selected signal tag will be placed in the next available position in the Selected Tags field OR Select a position in the Selected Tags field then click on INSERT The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required Enter the Scale High and Scale Low values for each signal selected Select a Time base for the Trend Display from the Drop down menu 30 minutes to 24 hours Repeat the selection for up to 6 tags for each group Click OK Bar Display Tag Groups This selection lets you configure 8 groups of Bar Displays Bar Graph displays provide graphic representation of multiple analog or digital signal tags using horizontal or vertical orientation Bar Graph displays are available in 3 point or 6 point vertical or horizontal format Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags and digital signal tags Select the Bar tab then Select Display Group from the drop d
110. September 2013 Watch Summary Window Watch Summary Display Groups To Remove a Force double click to deselect the checked box Notes e Analog outputs cannot be forced e Safety I O points cannot be forced while the controller is in Run mode e Time Proportioning outputs and Three position Step outputs cannot be monitored since the live value is maintained only on the D O module itself The text n a for not available is shown as the value for these outputs Use the Find Feature to locate a specific I O on the Function Block Diagram Use the Sort Function to sort the table rows by a specific column See the Watch Window Summary for more details on this window Watch Summary Display Groups This tab will only appear for Controller Revision Rev 4 4 and below Watch Summary Display Groups lets the user monitor the same points configured on the Operator Interface displays Select a Display Group Show Menu then a Group Number Group Menu from the drop down menus at the top of the dialog box The window will monitor the Display Group selected Note that new values can be written to the variables shown in this window Show Trend Group Group Group 1 SCHELL SP1 SP6 SP 1 i 5 a a Te a OO L DO 2 nt AE neta T SASS a Bo a NNNnnn KAGA Display Groups Use the Find Feature to Find a specific tag on the Function Block Diagram Use the Sort Function to sort the tag list by a specific column 216
111. Setpoint Schedule Pool dialog box will be displayed Through this display you will add a new schedule or delete an existing one and also enter the set properties function and the Edit Schedule function to set up each schedule From left to right the icons are jell EE a mja To ADD a Schedule Select the NEW Icon The Setpoint Schedule Properties dialog box will open To EDIT the Properties of an Existing Schedule Select the Worksheet Properties Icon The Setpoint Schedule Properties dialog box will open To EDIT a Schedule Select the Edit Segments Icon The Edit Setpoint Schedule dialog box will appear COPY and PASTE Select a schedule from the pool window then select the Copy Icon Select another location in the pool window then select the Paste Icon The copied schedule will be inserted into the location selected To DELETE a Schedule Click on a schedule name and then click on the Delete icon PRINT a Schedule Click on a schedule name and select the Print icon The Print dialog box will appear Select OK A profile report will be printed with all the information entered on the tabs of the Setpoint Schedule Properties dialog box SAVE a Schedule To save a Schedule as a sch file click on a recipe name and then select the Save icon The Save As dialog box will appear OPEN a Schedule To open a previously saved sch file and insert it into the pool click on the Open icon DOWNLO
112. T Quadrature Input E i Loop Blacks dl Math Calculations Alarm Monitor Signal Selectors Auodliary Communications Hf HVAC l E Other tems O fl Normal Scan E Fast Scan BE Process PA Saty User Interface Worksheet Toolbox Window Click on a tab to display the function block categories available for that scan rate Expand each category to display the available function blocks For Safety Enabled SIL compliant configurations some function blocks are not compatible with Safety Worksheets and will be disabled and grayed out if the current active worksheet is a Safety Worksheet If the current active worksheet is a Function Block Worksheet drag and drop any enabled function block to place it on the worksheet Right click on a function block and select Help from the context menu to display a help file page with the details of that block The third and optional fourth tabs contain the library of function blocks currently in use grouped by the type of function block worksheet either Process or Safety as shown below The Safety tab will only be available in SIL compliant configurations Revision 15 September 2013 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide User Interface Worksheet Toolbox Window rr E Ae fe HE HC900 C505 Rev 6 0 Ped_Configl505 2 Configured Function Blocks E3 I0 Blocks E3 Loop Blocks E MDFL494 fl Mpsw493 fal ONOFS71 C3 SP
113. TPSC PI PO FI QUAD sensor the terminals Replace module Wrong Firmware The firmware in the Al module is Rev not compatible with the firmware in the controller or scanner CPU or Al module does not support slidewire as an input type Controller Ports Diagnostics Accessing Port Diagnostics Overview The Designer provides live monitoring of Controller Ports diagnostics The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start up and during on line operation 1 Select Controller Ports Diagnostics from the Monitor drop down menu or from the Monitor toolbar There is a sub menu from which you can choose the type of port you want to monitor Toolbar Serial Port S1 Configuration Port Diagnostics Serial Port S2 Ol Port Diagnostics Network Port Diagnostics Expansion I O Comm Diagnostics except C30 CPU Host Connections Diagnostics Peer to Peer Connections Diagnostics The specific monitoring dialog box for that selection will open Serial Port S1 Configuration Port Diagnostics The Designer provides live monitoring of the Serial Port S1 Configuration Port default RS232 The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start up and during on line operation Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 235 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics L Select Controller Ports Diagnostics from the Monitor drop down menu then select Serial Port S1 from
114. Three Position Step Control block which is considered a Loop Function Block These function blocks all have one or more I O address properties that must be configured through the block s properties dialog The rack module and channel numbers assigned to the block s I O address properties are displayed on the block s graphic as a series of 3 two digit numbers separated by decimals as shown below 4 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Hardware and Software requirements Rack Module and Channel Assignments 01 03 04 FAIL WARN D DIS In the above diagram the Al148 Analog Input function block has a single input channel configured as Rack 01 Module 03 Channel 04 The PPO150 Position Proportional Output function block has 1 analog input and 2 digital output channels configured as Feedback Forward Relay Reverse Relay Rack 01 Rack 01 Rack 01 Module 04 Module 02 Module 02 Channel 12 Channel 05 Channel 06 Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 Implementation Starting the Application Implementation Starting the Application When the application is started the only viewable parts are the File Browser and the Worksheet Toolbox Go to the Main Toolbar or the File Menu and select D or NEW Displays a Choose a New File Type dialog box with three tabs New Configuration Select the Configuration tab From the drop down menus select Cont
115. Time SPI1 SPE State State number for each step of the sequence A state may be selected multiple times in the sequence Since time is an attribute of the sequence the state may be activated for a different time period each time it is selected The order does not have to be sequential Enter a State Number in each active field States are numbered from 1 to 50 State name Name of current state Enter a state name 12 character max Examples Heating Cooling Mixing Time in Step Time duration value for each step of the sequence Time units can be changed under Properties Designates the step the sequence will advance to when the time expires It can be any step in the sequence including steps that have been previously executed Enter 0 to stop the sequence after current step expires and to hold the outputs Event Signal 1 Click on the Event Signal 1 field and from the drop down menu select the event you want signal 1 to represent Event 1 Next Step Each state of the sequence can also be configured to accept two different events to terminate the step Whichever occurs first an Off to On rising edge transition of either event signal OR elapsed Time in Next Step step time will cause the sequence to advance to the appropriate next step Enter a value for Event 1 Next Step Event Signal 2 Click on the Event Signal 2 field and from the drop down menu select the event you want signal 2 to represent 184 HC9
116. To Save a New File or Save the File as a New Name Select SAVE AS from the FILE menu The Save As dialog box will open Key m amp Local Disk C Product ControllerDocs Search ConirollerDor Organize New folder y Name Date modified Sr Favorites ME Desktop he HCDDocs 3 9 2015 6 19 PM File folder ZB Downloads ce All commurications non Safetyl 9 5 2013 5 56 PM HC Designer Docu H Recent Places All commurications 8 13 2013 349 PM HCDesiqner Docu ce All commuricationsC50 6 15 2015 3 33 PM HC Designer Docu aw Libraries se All commuricationsNonSIL 8 13 2013 546PM HCDesigner Docu ill Data ve C70 R 40 worksheet 6 14 2013 6 43 PM HC Designer Docu E3 Documents L Config5 from CONTROLLER 8 29 2013 4 53 PM HCDesigner Docu ia Mail Config6 from CONTROLLER 8 29 2013 5 16PM HCDesigner Docu ce Controller crash sequence safety 020911 9 5 2013 6 15 PM HCDesigner Docu jE Computer ch Fast Safety Elock invalid status 790 2013 220 PM HCDesigner Docu amp Local Disk C l Designer Software Files cde HC900 C30 Rev 6 0 Files ccde Hide Folders HC900 C305 Rev 6 0 Files cde HC900 C50 Rev 6 0 Files cde HOS00 C505 Rev 6 0 Files cde HC900 C70 Rev 6 0 Files cde HC900 CT05 Rev 6 0 Files cde HO900 CY5 Rev 6 0 Files cde HC900 C755 Rev 6 0 Files cde All Files YTE e Piles 2boe Type in the new file name in that field From the drop
117. UTPUT 4 x Click OK 124 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Variables Variables A variable is a named diagram item capable of holding a single analog or digital value The value can be connected to function block inputs with a softwire The value can be changed through any of the following e Entry at the Operator Interface e Loaded through a recipe Either at the operator interface or programmed in the control strategy using a recipe load block e Over a communications link from a peer controller or from a supervisor host Wire Nodes Note The Wire Node feature is available only in configurations for HC900 C30 C50 revision 2 0x and higher Introduction A wire node lets you distribute an output signal to multiple input pins The wire node has 4 pins any one pin can be connected to an output signal this action defines the pin as the input pin of the wire node and the pin is marked with an arrow head the other three pins of the wire node are then automatically defined as output pins and can be connected to input pins of function blocks or other wire nodes Note that multiple soft wires can be connected to each of the three output pins of the wire node so you can distribute an output signal to more than three input pins on function blocks or other wire nodes using just one wire node Also note that you can wire an input conne
118. Variables 202 system parameters 250 258 Watch Summary Window 14 T Watch Window 13 93 What is Sequence Control 159 Tag Order 104 What is Sequence Control 159 templates 299 Window Menu 25 Terms and Definitions 153 Wire Nodes 117 Traceback Window 13 93 Worksheet 44 57 61 75 91 98 104 Trend Storage Configuration 84 How to add protection 44 98 Types of Blocks 107 how to navigate 91 U unlock 61 75 104 What is 5 7 UMC800 Database 36 Worksheet Category Tabs 57 Converting 36 Worksheet Overview 62 89 129 Undo 20 Worksheet Toolbox Window 12 Unforcing an Output 188 Write Protect a File 48 Unlock the Worksheet 61 75 104 292 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Index Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators Revision 14 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 293 September 2013 Sales and Service For application assistance current specifications pricing or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor contact one of the offices below ASIA PACIFIC EMEA Honeywell Process Solutions Honeywell Process Solutions TAC hfs tac Phone 80012026455 or support honeywell com 44 0 1344 656000 oa PEI Email Sales oneywell Limite i Phone 61 7 3846 1255 Lelen Avessidenn FAX 61 7 3840 6481 Of Toll Free 1300 36 39 36 TAC Toll Free Fax hfs tac su 1300 36 04 70 China PRC Shanghai Honeywell China Inc Phone 86 21 5257 4568 Fax 86 21 6237 2826 Singapore Honeywell Pte Ltd
119. a Storage Alarm Event Storage Configuration ee il File Record Enter a File Record Limit number of between 2000 and 5000 Limit Tag List From the Tag List drop down menu select the type of signals you want the tag list to display Click on a Tag Name and click ADD gt gt The tag name will be added to the Selected Tags list Selected Tag Scaling Signals List Scale each tag selected for High and Low values for the Point Log Display Click on the Scale High and Scale Low fields and enter the value To delete a signal tag click on a tag and click Delete Data Type Enable Signals This enable signal turns storage on and off for Point Logs From the pull down menu select NONE Point Log Storage Enable is started stopped only through the operator interface s Data Storage Control Menu defaults to Enable on configuration download or ANY DIGITAL TAG Point Log Storage is started stopped only through the on off state of the selected Digital Signal It will not appear on the operator interface s data Storage Control Menu For detailed information concerning Trend Storage Enable refer to Point Log Storage Enable Conditions Storage Mode From the pull down menu select a Storage Mode Refer to Data Storage Conventions for mode definitions Storage NOTE For On Command storage mode there is no storage interval or start time They Interval are not used Click on Change The Storage Interval dialog
120. aad thaceae ine eaes 162 Setpoint Program Configuration OVErVieW ccccsssecceceeseceeceeseceeseeseceeeeneeeetseneeeeeeas 163 SETPOINT SCHEDUL BAS iicaiscetacstacetaceiacetacetacsipisizcsiectindelndciadalecetacaledtindeiai as 165 Setpoint Scheduler OVErViCW ccccsecccccceecececeeseceeceeeeeeeceeeeceeseeeeeesseseeesseaeeeesaageeeeeas 165 Setpoint Schedule OVErVviGw sicezezoiececees deans tat dctatentataatees E A as 165 X HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 OCIS ING ere siino a ea 167 What iS S Quence Control reari innii na E a ENE EAE Neea 167 Sequence Configuration Overview cccccseeccccceeeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeceseseeeseessseeseesaaeeeeeas 167 RECIPES curr aa a Aa EEA aA 168 FECING OVCTV CW appen E E E E a 168 RECOS MODU benny erage panra a meee E nies he Serer nena 169 RECIPE CV ARIA BEES sicsnccscccsscestccenccsnccapsctnetanesitetinesi atest 170 IATTOOU CHOM ciwvovhectrgcend E aT ee woeee acta tebe tee ache ecto T 170 Recipe Variables GCOmiquration 2acccteacnieisitartsecest aiel betes N 170 Using Recipes to Download Setpoint Profiles cccccccceccseseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesaaees 171 Create Edit Recipe Variables File cccccccccccssececessceceeecesseeeeseeeetsueeeeseneeeseeeeeesees 172 ROCIO FOO I tivestaunsiuptncrrascliaiub T Seabwebiicate E 173 Setup Edit a Recipe IM POO scsrccscacceceesacendezereencasseeandegewingeusaiedeit edaeeedeseedd 2adaee
121. aeeeeseeee 174 Rece FP HODCNISS 2chint sissies tau reid ihe dotaa daa E 174 SETPOINT PRO RUGS asinina a 175 Create Edit SEPINE Profile File recasiirii iain edadiecniedetitlettedidentncccds 175 Seiont Prole PrOpeniGS cvs see ere ee cae eas eh a ean eer ceca 177 SEVPOINT SCHEDULES rioria 179 Create Edit Setpoint Schedule File sarae a a E 179 SEtDOINE SCNEGUIS POO arrie erei E E E TE 180 Setup Edit Setpoint Schedule in Pool cccecccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 181 Setpoint Schedule Propere Sasis ninenin a ee o A 183 SEQUENCE S saren 184 Create Edit Sequence Fil iiccesiticievevecdtendstdactaliebeneatetasieened a a A S 184 SeguUeEncE POO lasiin a ERA A 186 SCUD Ed SEQUENCE INF OO neria E a eewedes 186 SEQUENCE PTOS E Sigan a a a ae 188 ON LINE MONITORING 0 eec cece ceeeeeneeeneeeneceneensecnseenssenseenscaseenssonseenesenes 189 VETV OW ss aia a E Strains exatinndcenl EE E E 189 Enter MONO MOU S rsrs E E ESR 190 Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode cccccccccceseeecaeeeeceeeeeceeeeeseeueeeesaeeeeseeeeesegeeesaaes 191 Monitor Update Rale sncreminikenn aucelareeiue welase aah ution eda 192 MONTOR TOODA gamete RE nen renner ptane a eee arr ene eee oy ne tree ee 192 HOW DOW Slant MONITOR Gicaieucics ox 2 seek alan cnet tatee ta chachicaeta oder tele etna lal 193 Right Click Procedure in Monitor Mode ccccccseecececeeseceeceeeeceeseeecessaeeeeeesaaeeeeesaaaes 194 Function Block Monitor Wind
122. agram at the location determined by the blinking insertion point caret This command is unavailable if the clipboard is empty Cut and pasted items maintain their links e g display references Modbus addresses recipes they are not deleted and pasted as a new copy If you paste a cut function block and soft wires to the same or different worksheet in the same configuration the soft wires will be dangling unconnected and you are asked to specify how you want to resolve dangling soft wires 92 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet How to Add a New FBD Worksheet ICON Function _ Dialog Box Comments Allows you find an Item on the FBD worksheet Opens the Find Item dialog You can zoom out to see more of the page at a reduced size Zoom levels of 50 75 100 125 and 150 You can zoom in to return items to normal size Zoom levels of 50 75 100 125 and 150 Lets you place a grid in the FBD Diagram This can aid in the placement of items on the diagram Click to open the Alarms Group Configuration Dialog Box It lets you configurealarm points See Alarm Group Configuration Click to open the Configure Event List Dialog Box It lets you configure events in the controller See Event List Configuration Block Tag Click to show drop down menu Lets you changethe execution order of the Order function blocks Select Exe
123. al to or greater than the new value will have their execution order incremented to retain uniqueness For example if the Block Execution Order of the PID104 block shown in the diagrams above is changed to 5 the Block Execution Order of the Al107 block will be incremented to 6 but the Block Execution Order of the DI108 block will remain at 5 as shown below Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 107 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Execution Order FID104 5 Dios 5 PIDIo4 oo0000 FAIL ae ASP WSF j FFV ALi He ae TRY ALZ G TRC DIRECT po a BIAS ae Sl ATI L J a MORI MODE m HCl BOO fE When you change a block s execution order in this way the previous execution order number is not reassigned to another block but rather it is dropped from the list of used execution order numbers This can leave gaps in the assigned execution order numbers A similar situation occurs when a function block is deleted from a diagram This does not create a problem for block execution as it is the relative value of the execution order numbers that matter not the absolute value It does mean however that you can change the Block Execution Order number of a block without actually changing its true execution order if no other function block is assigned a number between the previous and new values Changing Relative Execution Order of Multiple Blocks The relative execution orde
124. alibration is complete Three choices will also appear Select one Press F2 to Position Motor at 0 Press F3 to Position Motor at 100 Press F4 to Leave Motor at Current Position So 158 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet PPO Block Calibration Hand Calibration Procedure User positions the motor by hand and captures the positions NOTE Put the controller in Offline or Program mode in order to perform calibration 1 Select the Utilities tab at the bottom of the Main Window NS Utilities 2 Under the Controller Utility Functions select the Calibrate Controller icon E The Calibrate dialog box will open Select the PPO Block tab at the top of the dialog box In the Calibration Block field drop down the list of PPO blocks and select one Under Calibration Mode select the HAND radio button Under Calibration Procedure press Start The Start button is disabled and the Cal 0 button is enabled 7 Move the motor by hand to its 0 position The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor when it is moving 8 When ready click the Cal 0 button and the 0 position of the motor is captured as indicated in the status 9 Move the motor by hand to its 100 position The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor when it is moving 10 When ready click the Cal 100 button and the 100 position of the motor is
125. alue set for Ramp starting Setpoint value and Soak soak setpoint value Time Rate Ramp time is determined in either TIME Hours or Minutes Range 0 00 hr to 999 99 hr 0 00 min to 999 99 min OR RATE EU MIN or EU HR Range 0 to 999 99 This selection of time or rate is made when you configure properties Make this selection before entering any Ramp NOTE When Ramp unit is configured for TIME entering 0 will imply an immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 175 September 2013 Setpoint Profiles Create Edit Setpoint Profile File Step Item Action Description Aux Out In addition to the main ramp and soak output value a second analog value is available for each step of the profile This output is a fixed soak value which may be used to provide a setpoint value for a secondary control loop in the process An example would be a ramp and soak temperature program combined with pressure setpoints for each step of the profile Guar Hold OFF or ON Choose ON to hold the program if a process variable exceeds a predefined deviation from setpoint Events You can configure 1 to 16 segment events to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment Segment events are digital switches that provide ON OFF outputs through an SPEV control block When a segment event is turned ON it remains ON until the end of the segment at which time it is turned OFF unless it is
126. am Worksheet Context Menu 1 Right click in any whitespace area of any Function Block Diagram Worksheet to activate the context menu 2 Select either 12 Block Execution Order or Fast Block Execution Order to launch the Function Block Execution Order dialog Function Block Graphic Context Menu 1 Right click within the body portion of any normal scan or fast scan function block graphic not the pins to activate the context menu 2 Select either 127 Block Execution Order or 4 Fast Block Execution Order depending on which function block was selected in step 1 to launch the Function Block Execution Order dialog Worksheet Toolbox Context Menu 1 Click on the Process or Safety tab of the Worksheet Toolbox to display a browser view of the function blocks currently in use 2 Expand the folder of one of the function block types used in the configuration 3 Right click on either the icon or name of any i normal scan or T fast scan rate function block to activate the context menu 4 Select either 12 Block Execution Order or 8 Fast Block Execution Order depending on which function block was selected in step 3 to launch the Function Block Execution Order dialog When one of the above actions is taken the Function Block Execution Order dialog box is displayed as shown below The list box will be populated with all of the function blocks executing at the selected execution rate Normal Scan or Fast Scan If the
127. an save the selected SPS item to a file open a SPS file and insert it into the pool and download the selected SPS item to a controller s Setpoint Schedule pool Sequences Sequence configuration provides a series of inter related events used to start up or shut down a unit process or a series of timed and process measurement dependent events that are executed to produce a final product This selection opens the Sequence Pool dialog box and allows viewing adding editing and printing of Sequence details You can save the selected SEQ item to a file open a SEQ file and insert it into the pool and download the selected SEQ item to a controllers Sequence pool Window Menu Menu Selection Function Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 25 September 2013 User Interface Help Menu Arranges windows so that they overlap making it easy to select a window Cascade Tile Horizontally Arranges windows side by side Each window is visible and Arranges windows over and under each other Each window is visible and none overlap Tile Vertically Arranges configuration Icons when configurations are minimized Arrange All Open window Lists all Function Block Diagrams recipes and data storage designations files that are open and checks the one that is active Click any file to display it Help Menu MENU SELECTIONS Help Topics Calls up the top level Helos Contents page Selecting a Topic displays infor
128. annel 147 expansion I O comm 228 229 Calibrate CU Temp 146 host connections 231 232 Calibrate Modules 145 VO module l l 217 Calibrate Position Proportional Output 148 Modbus Initiator TCP Port Diagnostics 237 Changing the Default Annotation Attributes 125 Modbus Master Serial Port Diagnostics 234 Closing a Menu 17 network port 226 227 Communications Statistics 55 peer to peer 238 239 Configuration File 31 127 port 221 Saving 31 127 rack 213 Configuration Functions 162 RS485 Ol port 225 Configuration Overview 155 Display Buttons Configuration 63 Configuration Port Diagnostics 222 Display Tag groups l 65 Configuration Port Diagnostics Status Indicators Displaying Function Block Pin Value 195 993 Download Setpoint Profiles 163 Configure Modbus Map Method 244 using recipe to download 163 Configuring Display Tag Groups 65 Downloading a File to the Controller 40 Connecting the PC to the Controller 8 Drag and Drop 125 Connecting Disconnecting Blocks 112 E Connectors 194 Context Sensitive Help 125 Edit Menu 20 Control strategy 109 Edit Schedule Segments 176 Controller Configuration Overview 59 Edit Setpoint Schedule 176 Controller Configuration Toolbar 60 E Mail Notification 61 71 104 Controller Diagnostics 205 Enter Monitor Mode 184 Controller Diagnostics Status Indications 207 Event Details 71 103 Controller Idenfication 135 Event List Configuration 70 102 Controller Port Diagnostics 223 Execution Order 103 Controller to PC Connection Settings
129. appropriate fields Alarm Group Configuration Event List Configuration Block Order The toolbar also contains icons for Cut Copy and Paste Zoom Level and an Icon to toggle a grid on and off on the worksheet The Function Blocks are listed in the appropriate Worksheet Toolbox Function Block Menu Tree You can Drag and Drop the function blocks from the menu onto the worksheet and softwire them to create a control and or safety strategy See FB Diagram Rules Note that with Controller Rev 6 0 and higher there is now the concept of Safety function block diagram worksheets vs the regular Process function block diagram worksheets for controllers that support it The Safety worksheets allow definition of Safety enabled configurations to run on SIL compliant controller models Within Safety worksheets certain restrictions at both configuration and run time are enforced to ensure safety compliance is achieved The Process worksheet is the same as the FBD worksheet as they were called prior to Rev 6 0 Note that a Safety function block diagram worksheet may be simply called Safety worksheet and a Process function block diagram worksheet may be simply called Process worksheet for purposes of brevity Also a function block that is placed on a Safety worksheet may be simply called a Safety block When a new configuration is created the Safety worksheet tab will only appear if t
130. art If this time period is acceptable click Yes to begin the Hot Start If this time period is not acceptable press No Configuration Parameters All Configuration Parameters are set to the value or state in the cde file following a download For example Tuning constants could be over written by a Download while in Run Mode The tuning constants are considered part of the configuration If you DO NOT first upload the present configuration you will overwrite the active parameters with the values in the configuration that are downloaded The new download is an all or nothing proposition Function Block Changes If a function block is deleted Designer does not re use the block number If a function block is added Designer uses the highest current block number 1 Restrictions When a configuration uses the last block number 500 for C30 2100 for C50 5100 for C70 C70R C75 and you try to add another block Designer will prompt you to de fragment the table and recover previously deleted blocks There can be NO Hot Start this case Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 39 September 2013 File Management Downloading Controller Firmware Data Storage Schedule Legacy 559 1042 OI only Assuming changes have NOT been made to an Ol data Storage Schedule the data storage will be interrupted only as long as it takes to transfer the configuration changes Downloading Controller Firmware Background Code download
131. art Time and at every storage interval thereafter In On Command mode when it changes from off disable to on enable it causes a single sample of Point Log data to be stored at that moment See Point Log Storage Enable Conditions HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Data Storage Data Storage Enable Conditions Batch Command Enable Signal This level of control is the Batch Command It is a single control signal that starts and stops storage for all data types configured for batch storage It does not affect Continuous or On Command storage If the Batch Signal is configured as a digital signal in the Designer Data Storage Configuration it will not appear on the Storage Control menu on the Operator Interface This is done to avoid having two conflicting sources for the signal When a digital signal is not used and Batch storage has been selected the Batch command signal is set to Stop Batches can be started from the Operator Interface Storage Enable Conditions Trend Storage Enable Conditions The figure below shows examples of Trend Storage Enable Conditions Notice that Continuous Trend storage occurs unless Trend Disable or Data Storage Disable is selected For Batch Trend storage notice that Trend enable disable Data Storage enable disable must be set to enable and Batch command must be Start Ty ety tet tT mond _ Command i at fo We ie Re O LF a Fe wate ene _
132. at the motor is moving to its 0 position The Feedback Value area on the dialog will indicate movement and direction of the motor The Progress Bar will indicate progress Time Remaining for this step The status will change to indicate that the motor is at its 0 position 7 Click the Cal 0 button then the status will change to indicate that the 0 position has been captured The status will change to indicate that the motor is moving to its 100 position The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor The progress bar will indicate progress Time Remaining for this step The status will change to indicate that the motor is at its 100 position 8 Click the Cal 100 button then the status will change to indicate that the 100 position has been captured 9 Click the Cal Speed button A dialog box will appear warning that the speed calibration will move the motor Press OK to start or Cancel to abort The status will change to indicate that the motor is currently undergoing speed calibration The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor The progress bar will indicate progress Time Remaining for this step 10 Click the Save Cal button A dialog box will appear that confirms the Motor Calibration Values Press OK to save the values or Cancel to abort The status will change to READY and indicate that the PPO Calibration has been saved A message box appears indicating that the c
133. atch Window to view groups of related data such as I O and Signal Tags e Allows Monitoring to cross all FBD worksheet boundaries There are no boundaries You can call up Function Block monitor windows from any or all FBD worksheets concurrently The Watch Window implicitly crosses all worksheets All other diagnostic windows can also be open concurrently Access Select Monitor Mode from the Monitor menu or select the Monitor icon from the Main Toolbar You can specify the monitor update rate that determines how often data is collected from the controller during monitoring This update rate can be set to either 1 4 second 1 2 second 1 second or 5 seconds See Monitor Toolbar for the available Monitoring and Diagnostic Windows See Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode for on line monitoring indicators Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 189 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Enter Monitor Mode Enter Monitor Mode Select Monitor Mode from the Monitor menu or select the Monitor icon from the Main Toolbar amp While in monitor mode edits to the configuration cannot be made Procedure Selecting this menu item opens the Enter Monitor Mode dialog box Enter Monitor Mode x Recommendation Upload the controller configuration before monitoring it so that current values from the controller are shown on the function block property pages Current CommLink Settings Fort Hetwork al
134. ate clear status click on radio button to select Note an alarm will always be stored to the O I Archive list Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 71 September 2013 Display Worksheet Event List Configuration Event List Configuration on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Configure Event List dialog box You can also select Events from the EDIT menu on the Main Menu the FBD Worksheet toolbar button Up to 64 digital signals can be configured as events The most recent 150 events will be available for display at the Operator Interface Events can generate Emails From 150 to 1500 event records can be stored on the Operator Interface archive disk Each event must have at least one of the following destinations Email Ol archive or OI Display You can select the events from a list of all digital tags A digital signal may be either an Event or an Alarm but not both Procedure Enter a Title for the Event list From the drop down menu select the type of tags you want to display on the tag name list Click on each tag name you want included in the list Click on ADD The selected tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in the Selected Tags List Select a tag in the list then click on Event Details button to enter details for the tag selected Details include E Mail Notification Store to O I Archive List Display on O I Trigger Direction for ON or OFF
135. ated A failure is detected in the switch reading All control blocks stop running All I O scanning ceases This forces the modules into failsafe Controller mode is changed to RUN Locked while there are forces on Safety sheets Controller will not go to RUN Locked mode Controller mode is changed to RUN Locked when safety configuration is changed at run time Controller will not go to RUN Locked mode Executes the run mode Outputs are updated None Remove force on block output Download a valid configuration Replace CPU To clear the diagnostic 1 Change mode back to RUN mode OR 2 Clear all safety forces using HCD through Monitor gt Forced Blocks OR 3 Force a cold start To clear the diagnostic 1 Change mode back to RUN mode OR 2 Force a cold start L Watchdog CPU Diagnostics Force a cold start Upgrade control file software Replace CPU board Contact Honeywell Personnel Watchdog reset resulting Associated rack monitor from software failure block s RACK OK pin is turned off ASYS block s HW OK pin is 3_ turned off Revision 15 September 2013 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 221 Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications Prefetch Abort CPU failed when 1 Force a cold start attempting to fetch an instruction from the prefetch register Controller performs a restart Isolate system from noise Assoc
136. ay Groups O I Security Operator Interface Settings O I Data Storage Alarm Groups Event List Filenames Start Up Banner Page Help Message screens Unlock Worksheets There is a Display Keys Report that indicates current O I Button assignments Display Button Number Display Position on the button Display Format Group Title or Tag name This assignment summary is built and updated dynamically on the worksheet body It can be printed from the toolbar Operator Panel Configuration Toolbar Click on ICON to open the dialog box Dialog Box Comments Prints the Ol Display Worksheet The printed output is the list of displays on each user assigned button as viewed on the worksheet To display each page as it will look when printed click Print Preview on the File menu Display Click to open Display Buttons Configuration Button It lets you assign displays to the user assigned Operator Interface keys Configuration Operator Click to open the Operator Interface Settings Dialog Box Interface Settings Data Storage Click to open the Data Storage Configuration dialog box Configuration It lets you w create groups of data to be archived on the Operator Interface s storage device Dialog box tabs are Trend Point Log and Alarm Event It lets you edit security settings on the Operator Interface 64 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Display Worksheet Operator Interface Displays
137. b allows you to calibrate the selected Position Proportional Output Block to ensure that the 0 and 100 Motor Positions are actually correct and to measure the true motor speed The calibration of the PPO Block is similar to that of the Al and AO However the calibration values are stored as part of the PPO block s configuration data not on the Al card itself To retain these calibrated values upload and save the configuration to disk The procedure is to move the motor first to its 0 position wait until the position feedback signal has stabilized and capture the 0 feedback value A similar procedure is done next for the motor s 100 position The third step is to measure the true motor speed by moving the motor a fixed period of time measuring the position feedback delta and computing a motor speed from this data The final step is to save the values in the block s configuration data All previous calibration values will be overwritten Calibration Procedures There are three methods for calibrating the PPO block Click on one of the modes shown below for instructions AUTO Controller positions the motor and captures the positions SEMI AUTO Controller positions the motor and the user captures the positions HAND User positions the motor by hand and captures the positions 156 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet PPO Block Calibration Auto Calibration Pro
138. ble functions Once dragged and dropped from the Item list onto any FBD worksheet you can double click on a block and opena Properties page in which you can configure the specific parameters of that block Signal flow connections from icon to icon form the flow of the control strategy by using either softwire connections or named tags to complete the controller configuration Depending on controller model you can create up to 20 40 graphic diagrams 1 page high by 20 pages wide The completed diagram may be printed on pages of 8 5 x 11 paper With Controller Rev 6 0 and higher there is also the concept of Safety worksheets vs the regular Process worksheets for controllers that support it The Safety worksheets allow definition of Safety enabled configurations to run on SIL compliant controller models On a Safety worksheet certain restrictions related to safety may be active Only the function block types that are supported by the SIL compliant controllers may be placed on Safety worksheets Others will be grayed out in the Toolbox when a Safety worksheet is active There will be strict data flow restrictions Generally the restriction is that data can flow from items on a Safety worksheet to items on Process worksheet but not vice versa This means that setting up data flows using Connectors Page Connectors and Signals will be restricted to allow only one way data flows For some function block types their f
139. cannerz Restore AC main power reset breaker Diagnostic reported Rack continues to function properly Status posted 230 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide isi Revision 15 September 2013 Power Supply Diagnostic PS 2 LED is ON Both Power Supplies are Good See Power Supply Status for possible values Supply Failed Redundant Power Backplane detection circuit Failed rack backplane status signal Failed Scanner2 status input I O Module Diagnostics Status Indications In the Rack Diagnostics window the subsection I O Module Diagnostics displays the Error Status for each module in the rack The following table lists the possible Error Statuses EJ Possible Cause Controller Action Hi CJ Temperature Revision 15 September 2013 Possible causes of this diagnostic are One of the two CJs on the module is indicating a temperature reading greater than 70 degrees C Both cold junction sensors are failing to convert The CJs are converting properly but their differential is greater than 10 degrees C Associated Al blocks that are configured as T Cs set their fail pin on their warn pin off and their output pin to the failsafe value Associated Al blocks that are configured as T Cs set their IO status to CJ High Temperature for reason 1 or CJ Failure for possible causes 2 and 3 Associated rack monitor block s module fail pin is turned on Assoc
140. captured as indicated in the status 11 Click the Cal Speed button A dialog box will appear warning that the speed calibration will move the motor Press OK to start or Cancel to abort The status will change to indicate that the motor is currently undergoing speed calibration The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor The progress bar will indicate progress Time Remaining 11 Click the Save Cal button A dialog box will appear that confirms the Motor Calibration Values Press OK to save the values or Cancel to abort The status will change to READY and indicate that the PPO Calibration has been saved A message box appears indicating that the calibration is complete So Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 159 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet PPO Block Calibration This page has been intentionally left blank 160 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Set Point Programming Terms and Definitions Set Point Programming Terms and Definitions Auxiliary In addition to the main ramp and soak output value a second analog value is available for each Analog Value step of the profile This output is a fixed soak value which may be used to provide a setpoint value for a secondary control loop in the process An example would be a ramp and soak temperature program combined with pressure setpoints for each step of the profile Cycles A portion of a prof
141. cedure Controller automatically positions the motor and captures the positions NOTE Put the controller in Offline or Program mode in order to perform calibration 2 So me Select the Utilities tab at the bottom of the Main Window A Utilities Under the Controller Utility Functions select the Calibrate Controller icon E The Calibrate dialog box will open Select the PPO Block tab at the top of the dialog box In the Calibration Block field drop down the list of PPO blocks and select one Under Calibration Mode select the AUTO radio button Under Calibration Procedure press Start Result The Start button is disabled and the Status indication at the top of the dialog box will change to indicate that the motor is moving to its 0 position The Feedback Value area on the dialog will indicate movement and direction of the motor The Progress Bar will indicate progress Time Remaining for this step The status will change to indicate that the motor is at its 0 position The status will change to indicate that the 0 position has been captured The status will change to indicate that the motor is moving to its 100 position and the feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor The progress bar will indicate progress Time Remaining for this step The status will change to indicate that the motor is at its 100 position The status will change to indicate that the 100 pos
142. ceeeeeeesaeeeeeesaaeeeesaeaeeeesaaaes VO Channel Sensor Stat ersen E E a aa Gontroller Ports DiaAgnoStiCS aspe EA EE ASRINE Modbus Master Serial Port Diagnostics cccccceecceceeeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeetsuseeeseneees Modbus Initiator TCP Port DiaQnOStiCs cccccccecceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeesans Bra sesso ase aces Ee aeaa PP UIGIE FASO arses scshadorsamninanas idawiadintnornansnatenl E Pint REDOT FOVICW ensina a bone uiaioenreee mer aeckasapens EXPO REDO ices et ees ca hese a a a a MODBUS REGISTER ADDRESSES assnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm Modus Map OVEVIEW serian Soenueielainasteuadadne Gime odasausmananerd Contigure Modbus Map MGth0d omrnseccessuecaccans veteceussdushsnseudssdweenennawandendeisesuatseawanesnsucavens s Modbus addressability of principal function DIOCKS cccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeenaes PIXCOIVIOOOWS Map areri E oye sical LS aebeeeccercteera saiaecenutes Custom Modbus IND eta ar acne aa ee ane ea aaa cea ea a Ne ed Adding function block parameters tO CUSTOM Map c cceceecseeeeeceeeeeseeeeeesaeeeesaeeessees Adding system parameters tO CUSTOM MA D cccccseecceeeeeeeseeeesseueeeeeaeeesaaeeesseeeesages REDUNDAING V ce aieas aae a eea aaaea Redundancy System Status Indicators ceeccccceseeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeseesaaeeeeesaaans Redundancy Link Status MdICatOrS orsresiisccne ia n i Lead GPU
143. ck Diagram right click the tag name instead of left clicking it Sort Function The Sort function in the Watch Summary lets you sort the tag list by Signal Variable Tag Name Descriptor Block At the top of the Watch Window click on the Column title The list will be sorted accordingly Clicking the column title the first time sorts the list in ascending alphabetical order Clicking the column title a second time sorts the list in descending reverse alphabetical order and so forth Watch Summary User Defined On the User Defined tab of the Watch Summary Window you can view a list of tags that you want to monitor You can add the following to the list e Signals e Page Connectors e Variables The Watch Summary window doesn t have to be visible in order to add items to the list of User Defined tags to display nor do the drop down selectors on the User Defined tab have to match what you ll be adding For example you can add a signal to the User Defined tab of the Watch Summary window even if the window is not visible or the User Defined tab s Show drop down selector is set to All Variables As long as you are in monitor mode you can add items at any time Note that there is no limit to the number of items that you can add to the list but the list is not saved between sessions of the software To add Signals Page Connectors or Variables to the user defined watch list 1 Navigate to the function block worksheet t
144. connected communications cable e The Slave Reply Timeout value is too small this applies to Modbus RTU Master Advanced protocol only If overruns continue to accumulate you may need to increase this value e Changing the serial port setup parameters There may be a momentary overrun when the new parameters are saved to the controller Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 249 September 2013 Diagnostics Modbus Master Serial Port Diagnostics Any persistent overrun condition should be investigated and corrected Note that occasional overruns may occur during normal operation of the system if the scanning of the Modbus Master link is delayed by a higher priority activity The Overruns counter can be reset to zero by selecting Clear Statistics on the Serial Port S1 or S2 Diagnostics display Slave status Under Modbus Slave Devices click on any slave name left to view its details right Some details show the configuration of the Modbus Slave function block The slave s Status left is the same as under Details Comm quality right NONE Slave communications are disabled BAD Errors are occurring in the communications Possible causes to check for Physical link might be bad Slave device might be off No slave device found at the selected Modbus Address Slave device set to the wrong baud rate Port scanning To enable disable port scanning for a slave device 1 Click a Modbus slave device in the sla
145. corporate LAN consult with your Network Administrator regarding any corporate networking policies Follow the Wizard instruction to set e Network Name User assigned name can be different from controller name 16 character ASCII name It is not part of configuration lt is required to uniquely define a Peer group if multiple processes each with its set of peer controllers are on the same physical cable The controller binds the Network name Controller name to the IP address of each of its peers at run time e Local Name alias User assigned 16 character ASCII name can be different from controller name It is not part of the configuration Revision 15 142 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Network Parameters See Controller Identification for more info on names e Modbus TCP Double Register format Each IEEE 32 bit floating point number requires two consecutive registers four bytes MSB 4 LSB 1 in byte order below starting with the register defined as the starting register for the information The stuffing order of the bytes into the two registers differs among Modbus hosts To provide compatibility the Double register format is configurable Selections are FP B Floating Point Big Endian Format Byte order 4 3 2 1 Default FP LB Floating Point Little Endian with byte swapped Byte order 2 1 4 3 FP BB Floating Point Big Endian with byte swapped Byte order 3
146. ct an Analog Variable to the NPGM pin of the Set Point Programmer block given a name such as PROFNUM see figure below This Variable is added to the variable list for a recipe and given a number corresponding to the profile number to be loaded Upon selection and loading of the recipe at the Operator Interface the programmer will also load the profile number listed in the recipe The operation of the programmer to run this profile is from the standard Set Point Programmer display As an example for a selection of a SP Profile number 2 the entries into the Edit Recipe dialog box would be VARIABLE NAME PROFNUM VALUE 2 f f f SPP104 L Upto 50 Analog Digital SPP4O4 Variables eee FF FROFANUM NP oh SF m P Y SA4IM LP 2 ce SET ST hair oe JOG S ThE ce RSTRT F ThE Ge GHOLD GHOLDI Ce RESET READY ce HOLD HOLD l l F sp oura sp ouTs ee RUA RUNI SP OUTe oe ADY STOFI SP OUTS SP OUT4 Recipe Table Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 171 September 2013 Recipe Variables Create Edit Recipe Variables File Create Edit Recipe Variables File Creates edits a group of variables to be saved as a file RCP File can be downloaded to the recipe pool A recipe in the pool can later be edited or loaded into the controller s active configuration The file assumes that the variables are in a certain order in the configuration Make sure that this order is preserved wh
147. ctor to the input pin of a wire node This input connector can refer to either a signal tag or a page connector This is useful if you want to distribute a signal on one page or worksheet to multiple places on another page or worksheet Procedure Right click on white space in your function block diagram and select Drop Other Items Wire Node OR From the Worksheet Toolbox group Other Items drag and drop the Wire Node symbol to a blank spot on the controller configuration Double click any pin on the wire node then click on the output signal you want You can also double click on the output signal first and then click on any pin on the wire node An arrow appears showing logic flow direction You can connect the input pin of a wire node to an output signal of a block variable signal connector or numeric constant but not to a signal tag or page connector D Swr0G 5 D A B ce SA Double click on any remaining wire node pin then click on the desired input pin to complete the connection Repeat for the remaining wire node pins Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 125 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Wire Nodes PTMRIOS 4 RST PTMRIO2 Z RST PTMRIOS 1 RST EVENT DSi OG 5 oe A ce B oe SA If you need an output signal to go to more than 3 inputs use additional wire nodes You may use any number of output pins of a wire node PTMRIOS
148. cution Order Fast Logic Order or Tag Order Click to open the Unlock Worksheets dialog box Enter a password and click Unlock to unlock all worksheets How to Add a New FBD Worksheet Right click on the FBD Worksheet name on the Browser Select Append New Worksheet or Select the New FBD Worksheet icon on the Function Block Diagram Toolbar far left or From the Edit menu on the Main Drop down menus select Append New Worksheet A new worksheet will appear at the bottom of the Function Block Diagram list in the browser and a blank worksheet will be place on the Designer Right click on the new Worksheet name in the browser or double click on the worksheet s tab then select Properties and set the new worksheet properties For each worksheet added a tab will appear at the bottom of the Function Block Worksheet area with the name of the worksheet that was set in Worksheet Properties on it Use the scroll bar for access to a specific worksheet tab How to Navigate Between FBD Worksheets Use the Worksheet Tabs For each worksheet added a tab will appear at the bottom of the Function Block Worksheet area with the name of the worksheet that was set in Worksheet Properties on it If necessary use the scroll bar to access other worksheet tabs Click on the tab to select the associated Worksheet Use the File Browser The File Browser located on the top left side of the Worksheet is a movable window listing opened files R
149. d If you need more addresses in a partition you can combine it with adjacent partitions or resize it using space from an adjacent undefined partition See Edit Partitions Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 271 September 2013 Modbus Register Addresses Custom Modbus Map Functions Refer to the following table for descriptions of the numbered items in the custom map Functions are numbered in the order you will probably use them er e e e dybid Comte per 0900 O56 few 4 Boe A ee ere apm c cue Aa bijs pi y Spas ber a ipi Jejai oe r a at 6 aa zal Ween Cigan Fina 4 A 17 e HORT Ra i Ha ea hte Cunttom Modbus Map barep I ee TQ OB Se e E fae Fet hapas Dyr jisra irg igre haka Stenger Fie ihm a nage Ter Ehe Beja ALT a ot nenin 3 22 ES T FE Tii Pee Tl See Fe di wip mmi hi ba MER FE a ted e ey eo ai Be PrE IG Bm im Une s igm j ne ice at Lea iey amps hi el Dee ae fea ee Per mapper i we Te a a Lor Emm kumo Ply ump er M Pd i E l E ener a one 4 HEMON 2a 6 7 8 910 bm ey amei 14 Fas OF a Py umaymi i Pam Hered e Fe rii l ad Be La eb Pog peed 8 we Lat mt cue Py Tidy Fe Beate Su Pei PETET r Loco Bgm lar ey Jie 4 Fi Foie E i i E Pija TE hori Cuk Me _ M aa N Select a partition You must select a partition whose contents you want to d
150. d F2 are the point factors associated with the number of points per trend file Disk Factors J395 Trends files only actwe ag Trends files Alarms and Events 34r Trend files alarms and Events Point Log Files Number of points in trend A E a E e a e a 14 00 20 16 26 53 33 60 35 77 45 54 50 40 56 00 63 00 72 00 64 00 64 00 Point Factor F1 and F2 File Extensions The following File Extensions are used for the HC900 Controllers Data Storage output files LNT for Trend Files LNP for Point Log Files LNA for Alarm Files LNE for Event Files Data Storage Enable Conditions How storage is enabled Data Storage Enable disable is an Operator Interface function If a schedule is developed in the software all storage is automatically enabled Enable controls The figure below shows the controls that must be enabled for each storage mode and data type The left side shows the three data types and their possible storage modes only one storage mode is in effect for any data type The arrows show the conditions required for that storage to take place For example trend batch storage requires the Trend Storage Control to be on enabled at configuration if any signal is selected for storage i e Signal Enable NONE the Batch Command Control to be on enabled at configuration and the Data Storage Control to be enabled enabled at Operator Interface Notice that the Batch Command Control applies only to batch storage
151. d segment or reset from Profile the operator interface or by digital inputs to the block Programs may be started from a pre selected segment number Segment A segment is a ramp or soak function which together make up a Setpoint Profile Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 161 September 2013 Set Point Programming What is a Setpoint Program Segment You can configure 1 to 16 segment events to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment Events Segment events are digital switches that provide ON OFF outputs through an SPEV control block When a segment event is turned ON it remains ON until the end of the segment at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the next segment Note that segment events are not interrupted by soak time delays when the process variable is outside the guaranteed soak band Events turn ON as soon as the previous segment is completed even if the process variable has not reached the soak setpoint When the program completes the events are held at current value until the programmer is returned to the ready state Setpoint There is a setpoint guarantee function provided that holds the program if a PV exceeds a Guarantee predefined deviation from setpoint Selections allow setpoint guarantee to be active for all segments soak segments only or for specified segments Up to 3 Process Variables may be configured as inputs to the block for setpoint guarantee Setpoint Value
152. d to it 2 Low Priority Alarm 3 Medium Priority Alarm 4 High Priority Alarm 5 Emergency Alarm select from the drop down menu E Mail Notification of alarms by priority on a point by point basis check the box to allow Email notification The E mail will be sent if an alarm occurs on a point configured to send E mail to any all of the 3 E mail addresses that have the associated alarm priority assigned Detailed Text appears on the Operator Interface enter 2 lines of detailed text 24 characters max for each line Trigger Direction Trigger on ON state means alarm goes ON when triggered by rising edge the discrete goes off to on Trigger on OFF state means alarm goes ON when triggered by falling edge the discrete goes on to off click on radio button to select Alarm Acknowledge Group acknowledge Manual Acknowledge Can be acknowledged by operator When a manual acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out of alarm without being acknowleged by the operator it will be indicated as cleared Use when you want the operator to be able to acknowledge the alarm or see that the alarm was acknowledged and cleared Auto Acknowledge When an auto acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out of alarm without being acknowledged by the operator it will show no indication it was in alarm Alarm can still be acknowledged by the operator when it is in the alarm state An alarm point with this attribute will never indic
153. d upload security settings for the operator interface The security configuration is divided into two areas Operator Security and Engineer Security Each of the security features shown in the dialog box offers a different level of security rs rr Enable Security This is a master enabling switch Click on box to enable security on any of the engineer or operator secured items that are also selected If this is not selected no engineer or operator secured items will be secured even if they are selected Operator Security Code Enter a 3 digit NUMERIC code that will be used to secure items 3 through 9 0 disables Operator Security Set Up Control Click to secure access to setup items Click off to allow unrestricted access Change between Auto Click to secure loop mode AUTO MANUAL operation Click off to allow and Manual Control unrestricted access Change between Local Click to secure changing between Local and Remote Setpoints Click and Remote Setpoint off to allow unrestricted access Disk Utilities Click to secure access to disk utilities data storage controls and load Data Storage data storage settings Click off to allow unrestricted access 7 Setpoint Programmer Click to secure Setpoint Program Scheduler Sequencer operation Click Scheduler Sequencer off to allow unrestricted access operations i Click to secure recipe and variable edit operation Click off to allow operations Variable Edit unrestricted access Log On Off
154. dbus Registers Block Type PID Name F2 20NE1 Description Furn one 1 Register Details Current Partition Oe 840 Ox FFF Range se Parameter Hame Pi RSP SP2 VSP Output P B Gain 1 Prop Band 1 Direction Reset 1 Rate 1 scan Cycle Time PY Low Range PY High Range Alarm 1 SP Alarm 1 SP2 Gain Prop Band 2 Reset 2 Rate 2 scan Cycle Time H LSF1 LSF2 Alarm 2 SP Alarm 2 SP2 SF Lower Limit SP High Limit VSP B Output Low Limit Output High Limit Output B Ratio Block Start Register 047845 Block End Register 07845 Cancel Select All Clear All Save Template Load Template Save Template as Default Function blocks that can be added to the custom map Functions Use this window to select block parameters to add to your custom map The available block parameters for the selected block will be listed Select the parameters you d like to add by using Select All Clear All or by checking and unchecking individual parameters Click Add to Map to add the checked parameters to the map The uppermost checked parameter will be added to the Block Start Register and the remaining checked parameters will contiguously fill in the remaining registers until the Block End Register is reached Unchecked parameters will not leave gaps in registers in most cases If the current partitio
155. ddress 199 92 166 193 Messages Recened 999999 Messages Sent 113950 wite Requests Write Request Failures Producer Failures Clear Statistics 4 The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list 5 Click on X to exit box Refer to Peer to Peer Connections Diagnostics Status Indicators for status indications possible Cause and actions to correct the problem 246 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Peer to Peer Connections Diagnostics Status Indicators Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics The Peer to Peer connections dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list Possible Cause The peer connection could not be established due to an internal program problem Application Error Setup Error Port Fail Not Started Revision 15 September 2013 The peer device indicated that one or more data item is not valid The assigned peer could not be located on the network The peer data exchange IO subsystem could not be started due to internal resource problem The assigned peer IO connection has not yet been attempted Normal state during startup and during configuration mode This status should automatically change to GOOD after both peer controllers are in the RUN mode HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide The error will occur when an incompatibility exists between peer devices with regard to variable o
156. ddresses Custom ModbusMap eee rete O foeon 12 Register Click on a register s then right click for the menu Clear Contents deletes the contents of the selected registers without affecting other registers Insert Registers Inserts blank registers before the selected registers and shifts registers down by the same amount Will not work if partition s last registers are occupied Delete Registers deletes the contents of the selected registers and shifts subsequent registers up by the same amount Cut cuts contents of registers Copy copies contents of registers Paste pastes from the last cut or copy Edit Partitions A register must be in a defined partition in order to be populated with data you can t assign data to an undefined partition Default partitions are based on the fixed map An undefined partition starts where the fixed Modbus map ends Partitions can be edited in the following ways To rename a partition click on the Description and enter a new name To edit one or more partitions click on one or more partition then right click to access these functions Clear deletes the contents of the selected partitions but keeps the partition names and addresses Delete deletes the contents of the selected partitions as well as the partition names and addresses leaving behind an undefined partition which does not appear in any exports or reports Split divides the selected partition i
157. down menu in the Save as Type field select the configuration type depending on the controller you have lf there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0 the data is saved automatically If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0 The Designer will notify you that there are unconnected inputs and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs Click Yes to view the summary of unconnected inputs Click Log File to save the list to a text file if desired 136 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Overview Utilities Worksheet Overview This Utility Worksheet has three areas the let you perform a variety of tasks for maintaining the HC900 Process Control and setting up your PC s Communications Ports Controller Utility Functions The upper part of the Utilities Worksheet contains the Controller Utility Functions It has list of Icons that will launch dialog boxes for the following utilities e Diagnostics e Uploads e Downloads Configuration Controller Firmware Scanner Firmware e Set Controller Serial Port e Calibrate Modules e Set Controller Mode e Set Controller s Network Parameters e Set Controller Time e Data Storage Utility e Back Up Controller Information or Restore Controller Information e Manually Write Database to Flash Current PC to Controller Connection Settings e Displays Comm Port and Address informa
158. down menu that appears Name the report and save it as csv or ixt To change the default export file type see Export Delimiter Exported Files have the following format for their Header sections Description RevisionlD AAAA Export ID 0103 IO Configuration Information Report 0106 Variable and Signal Tag Information Report 0115 Modbus Address Detailed Report 0116 User Defined Modbus Registers Report 0117 Signal Tag Report 0118 Variable Report 0119 Modbus Address Summary Report 0120 All Function Block Modbus Addresses 5000 Modbus Partition Registers Report 5500 All Modbus Registers Report BBBB Database Schema Number CCCC Product type 2 HC950 3 HC930 4 HC970R 5 HC970 DDDD Platform type 2 HC900 series controllers EEEE Feature Set Schema database minor revisions HC900 C50 Rev 2 1x Device Type Device Revision Configuration Filename jjoconfig1 C50_R2 1 cde Controller Controller name assigned within the configuration Name Author Joe Optional author or creator of the configuration Report Title Modbus Address Detailed Report title Report IO Configuration Information Report Variable and Signal Tag Information Report Modbus Address Detailed Report User Defined Modbus Registers Report Signal Tag Report Variable Report 262 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Reports Export Report Modbus Address Summary Report A
159. dule Module is bad Module LED flashes to indicate the problem Bad Channel One or more channels The I O rack s Scanner status in the module is bad LED and the Controller rack s status LED not the module or channel LED flash 6 times 232 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Verify configuration Replace module with the correct one Action is based on the lIODIAG indication If IODIAG is not MODULE ERROR then follow the prescribed action defined for that diagnostic For MODULE ERROR do the following Verify configuration Install module Check the communication cables that connect the expansion rack s to the Main Rack Replace the controller or expansion rack backplane See HC900 Controller Manual 51 52 25 107 I O Module Indicators A table describes the LED flashes and what they mean To determine which channel s are bad monitor the function blocks corresponding to the channels in this module See Function Block Monitor Window Check each I O function block s Channel Sensor Status 2 To determine the cause see HC900 Controller Manual 51 52 25 107 I O Module Indicators Bad I O Channel Diagnostics A table describes the channel statuses and what they mean Revision 15 September 2013 I O Channel Sensor Status Diagnostics I O Channel Sensor Status When monitoring blocks of the type in the table below the Channel Sensor Status is displayed Statuses vary in severity the
160. e with the Loop blocks filter selected Loop 1 starts at 0x0040 00065 Loop 2 starts at 0x0140 00321 etc Whichever loop is in the first slot is known as Loop 1 as far as the Modbus map is concerned That is loop order in the map is independent of execution order or block number More generally any function block s order in the Modbus map is independent of its execution order or block number To move a function block to another address click on its address to select it release then click and drag it to the top of the new address then drop it A colored line appears while you re dragging the function block If you drop it in an address that s occupied by another function block the two function blocks will swap addresses Unlike signals and variables only one range of addresses is allowed per function block To view the starting address of any function block display its Properties by right clicking on the function block in the configuration diagram under the Controller tab lf your configuration contains more items than are allowed in the fixed map such as gt 32 loops a message informs you of this Consider switching to the custom map which allows for greater quantities and access to more parameters Further information For details on Modbus parameters see the HC900 Process ControlCommunications User Guide document number 51 52 25 111 2 0 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Modbus
161. e On selected or Off deselected HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Revision 15 September 2013 This page has been intentionally left blank HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide File Management Write Protect a File 49 PC Comm Ports and Connections How to Manage PC Comm Ports and Connections PC Comm Ports and Connections How to Manage PC Comm Ports and Connections The middle and lower portions of the Utilities Worksheet contain the PC Comm Ports and Connections functions Setting up your PC Comm Ports consists of the following functions e PC Network Port Setup for Controller Access e PC Serial Comm Port Setup e PC to Controller Connection Settings e Remote Loopback test e Remote Access e Communications Statistics PC Network Port Set Up For Controller Access The software lets you setup a PC Network Port and up to 8 PC Serial USB Comm ports for interface to a specific controller serially via the controller s RS 232 legacy or RS485 configuration port or over a network via the controller s Ethernet port accessed by its IP address You will need an Network Interface Card NIC in your PC for network connection If there is a Modem on your PC a symbol will appear on one of the Serial comm ports buttons PC Port Setup for Controller Access Setting Up a Network Port 1 Click on the Network Port setup button Revision 15 HC900 Proce
162. e Print Report function The one notable exception is that the option to preview the printing of all Function Block Diagrams at once is not supported Navigation A toolbar at the top of the Print Report Preview window lets you navigate through the pages of the report nus B Nest Fag Oi Zag Iri Fi a Close The functions from left to right are Print Prints the active report without going to Print Report in the file menu Previous Page Selects the previous page on the report for display Next Page Selects the next page on the report for display Two Pages Shows two report pages at once Zoom Out Makes the report larger on the screen Zoom In Makes the report smaller on the screen Close Closes the Print Report Preview See Also Reports Overview Print Report Export Report Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 261 September 2013 Reports Export Report Export Report Select Export Report from the File menu or select fal from the Custom Modbus Map toolbar Export Report lets you export some reports as files in comma delimited csv or tab delimited txt format The files contain the same data as shown in the printed report just formatted differently Exported reports can then be imported by other applications such as third party operator interface configurations Not all printable reports can be exported choices are limited Click on the Icon on the toolbar and select a report from the drop
163. e configuration process See Setpoint Scheduler Function Block configuration These labels will appear in the configuration dialog boxes Configuration Functions Basic functions that you will use to configure a Setpoint Schedule e Create edit Setpoint Schedule Under File New or File Open you can access the Schedule Editor to create or edit a setpoint schedule e Setpoint Schedule Pool The SP Schedule Pool lets you add or delete a schedule on a list of configured schedules Through this dialog box you will set the properties for each schedule and set up or edit the information for each segment that make up a schedule e Setpoint Schedule Properties Setpoint Schedule Properties is information for the schedule that a Label a Jog Segment Time Units and Guaranteed Hold Limits for each of the eight setpoints e Setup Edit Setpoint Schedule Setpoint Schedule Setup or Edit consists of configuring each segment of the schedule and assigning starting values for all eight Setpoints of the segment and the Guaranteed Hold Type for each You can also set up to 16 events for each segment Time Units Recycle Segment and Recycle Counts selections are included on this dialog box e You can also assign values to all eight Auxiliary Outputs for each segment by clicking on each Aux button on the dialog box 166 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Sequencers What is Sequence Control Sequencers What
164. e earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements Chassis Ground Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Table of Contents LICENSE AGREEMEN DE icccsecicesecceiccceccetscewsectcecesestewenceckcesesectcncecsdicendeccdscobswedewele III ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT cccccccececcncececsncecsceneececeneeceeeneeseneneeeeeneeasaeaeeaes IV ADS 1 5 8 CDRS ANE Tee CARRIED Tea A rt ET REE aT ane OO eT eT eT eee ee Rr ee Te Te iV Re GOOO N a e IV COA CMS a6 cer Nae a tec teeta lin scent ase ae aie eae SYMON DENON S osaa a oak eGullet cheeses nal ails etuenheidieeteco ss V TABLE OF CONTE N O a aa ee ee eee me VII SOFTWARE INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW ccccccccececcscscsccncecsceecseeneas 1 MOCO aa a aaa a a E N 1 COUPES eee ioe ade Sec hate te aia ecient ca Ha Beceem Laeacaneneeeecinas 1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ccccececececeeencncecececeess 4 What to Know Before YOu Start cccccccccccccececececcccccccececececececceueceauaeauauausesesecssstseananennass 4 Rack Module and Channel Assignments ccccssccecsseeeeceseeeceeeceeseeeeeceeeeeseneeesseeeeesens 4 IMPLEMENTA T O N e e n e A a aA iida aoia T SlantiNG INeE ApPpliCalO Merina E ctec
165. e selected in the Setpoint Hours whichever has Schedule Function Block Properties Dialog Box been selected Setpoint Values Setpoint 1 through Setpoint 8 Enter a starting setpoint value in each active field Ghold Type Setpoint guarantee is provided for the master Click on an active field Ghold1 thru block setpoints with a single symmetrical value for and select a GHOLD each setpoint output Actions for the guarantee Type from Drop down soak may be set on a per segment basis for OFF HIGH setpoint deviation LOW setpoint deviation or both HIGH and LOW setpoint deviations OFF No Guaranteed Hold HIGH setpoint deviation The schedule will hold if a PV deviates above the Setpoint value set HIGH and LOW setpoint deviations The schedule will hold if a PV deviates above or below the Setpoint value set on the Setpoint Schedule Properties dialog box LOW setpoint deviation The schedule will hold if a PV deviates below the Setpoint value set on the Setpoint Schedule Properties dialog box Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 181 September 2013 Setpoint Schedules Setup Edit Setpoint Schedule in Pool Parameter Description Entry Information Auxiliary Outputs The auxiliary block supports up to 8 soak only Enter values for all Aux1 thru Aux8 outputs You can assign values to all eight Auxiliary Outputs in the Auxiliary Outputs for each segment appropriate fields Recycle Segment The seg
166. ear OPEN a Recipe To open a previously saved rcp file and insert it into the pool click on the Open icon DOWNLOAD a Recipe To download a recipe to the controller s recipe pool click on the Download icon Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 173 September 2013 Recipe Variables Setup Edit a Recipe in Pool Setup Edit a Recipe in Pool The Edit Recipes dialog box lets you set up or edit a recipe listed in the Recipe Pool Make sure you have clicked on Properties and have given that specific recipe a name and description See RECIPE POOL before proceeding Procedure Click on a recipe name in the active field and select Recipe or double click on the recipe name The Edit Recipe dialog box will appear To ADD Variable to a Recipe Select a variable and click on ADD A variable number will appear under Recipe Items To DELETE a Variable from a Recipe Select a variable number from the Recipe Items field then click Delete To SET UP a Recipe Item From the Recipe Items list select a variable name from the list of recipe items If itis an analog variable enter a value in the value field If it is a digital variable select ON or OFF from the drop down menu in the Value field as a digital state for the variable Repeat this procedure for each recipe variable desired for the recipe you are configuring Click OK The length of the Recipe number of variables will appear in the Recipe
167. ed Menu Convention Dimmed command An ellipsis following a command A check mark next to a command A key combination next to a command A triangle next to a command Revision 15 September 2013 You will not be able to use this command at the current time For example You may need to select another item before using this command A dialog box will appear when you choose this command The dialog box contains options you need to select before the command can be completed The command is in effect When you remove the check mark by selecting the command the command is no longer in effect The key combination is a keyboard accelerator shortcut for this command You can use this key combination to choose this command When you choose this command a cascading menu appears listing additional commands HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide User Interface Selecting a Menu Selecting a Menu In this application you select highlight a menu and then choose a command from that menu Choosing the command carries out the action To choose an item from a selected menu Mouse Using the mouse pointer point to the name of the menu on the menu bar and click the left mouse button This opens the menu To move directly to a menu item drag the selection cursor down the menu until the desired item is highlighted then release the button UP Down Arrow Keys Press the ALT key to highlight the menu
168. edients needed to make a product or run a particular batch The items represent Analog and or Digital Points that are assigned in the Function Block Configuration and are identified by their Variable Names Configuration Functions Basic functions that you will use to configure a Recipe Recipe Editor Create Edit a Recipe under the File New or File Open menus Accesses the Recipe Editor Recipe Pool When you select Recipes from the Recipe menu the Recipe Pool dialog box will be displayed Through this display you will add a new recipe or delete an existing one and also enter the properties function and the Edit Recipe function to set up each recipe 170 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Recipe Variables Using Recipes to Download Setpoint Profiles Recipe Properties The Recipe Properties is merely a name assigned to the recipe which will be added to the pool You can also include a descriptor Recipe Setup EDIT Recipe Set Up or Edit consists of selecting Variable names assigning an analog value or digital state and adding them to a list of Recipe items Using Recipes to Download Setpoint Profiles Recipes can be given an 16 character name and shown on the Recipe Menu display for user selection accessed through the Main Menu selections of the Operator Interface A Recipe can automatically load a stored profile number for use by a specific Set Point Programmer To do this conne
169. eet will be displayed with a yellow background whereas page connectors located on a Process worksheet will be displayed on a white background You cannot change the value of a page connector as they are Read Only Use the Find Feature to locate a specific I O on the Function Block Diagram Use the Sort Function to sort the table rows by a specific column See the Watch Window Summary for more details on this window Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 213 September 2013 Watch Summary Window Watch Summary Variables Watch Summary Variables 214 The number of pull down selectors at the top of the display will depend on the controller type For SIL compliant controllers there will be a leading selector which allows the variables to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet they are located on e All both Process and Safety worksheets e Process e Safety For all controller types there will be a pull down selector which allows the type of variable to be selected e All Variables e Analog Variables e Digital Variables For each variable in the selection list its Number Tag Name Descriptor and Value are displayed in the table as shown below Watch Summary x Show fan AI Variables Variable Tag Name Descriptor Value SPS NUM Schedule numberi3 eminent 3 SET_RUN OFF SET_HOLD M4 4 bri User Defined A Signals Page Connectors _ Variables For SlL compliant
170. eets e Process e Safety For all controller types there will be a pull down selector which allows the type of user defined tags to be selected e All e All Signals e All Page Connectors HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Watch Summary Window Watch Summary Signals e All Variables Note that in this case All refers to the list of user defined items and not to the full configuration For each item in the selection list its Tag Name Descriptor and Value are displayed in the table as shown below Watch Summary Page Connectors The number of pull down selectors at the top of the display will depend on the controller type For SlL compliant controllers there will be a leading selector which allows the page connectors to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet they are located on e All both Process and Safety worksheets e Process e Safety For all controller types there will be a pull down selector which allows the type of page connectors to be selected e All Page Connectors e Analog Page Connectors e Digital Page Connectors For each page connector in the selection list tts Tag Name and Value are displayed in the table as shown below Watch Summary x Show fai Digital Fage Connectors vale ONOFF A2 OFF ONOFF A1 For SIL compliant controller types the rows of data will be colored coded Page connectors located on a Safety worksh
171. eets A right click on any signal tag also allows selection of a Find Where Used listing for fast access to tag destinations and return to the tag source Configuration Download Configuration download capability Hot Start allows configuration changes such as block additions or block substitutions to be made with restrictions without switching the controller to program mode avoiding initialization Cold Start Corrections or additions are executed shortly after download within 3 normal scan cycles For scan information refer to the HC900 Controller Installation and User Guide Operator Interface Configuration for Legacy 559 1042 Ol Configuration of the Operator Interface is an integral part of the controller configuration Controllers that have been configured with Operator interface data provide the necessary display format data This unique attribute guarantees compatibility of the controller and user interface databases and greatly simplifies product maintenance Designer configuration software uses the database of the function block control strategy to develop operating displays for the Operator Interface A large selection of display templates is provided that may be assigned quickly and easily to the Operator Interface Additional Software Functions In addition to creating displays and defining display access Designer software allows users to set up data archiving schedules develop recipes create alarm grouping establish
172. eginning the upload Press START The dialog box will show Percent Complete The Uploaded Configuration File cde will appear with a temporary file name From the File menu select Save or Save As and enter a file name and path in the appropriate fields or Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 Implementation Connecting the PC to the Controller Connecting the PC to the Controller The PC can be connected to the Controller by Direct Serial RS 232 connection Modem connection via Remote Access Direct Ethernet connection Networked Ethernet connection For details refer to the HC900 Controller Installation and User Guide document 51 52 25 154 section Connecting the HC900 Controller to a PC with the Designer Software 8 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 User Interface User Interface Overview User Interface User Interface Overview The main components of the User Interface are Main Menu Main Toolbar Worksheet Window s File Browser Worksheet Toolbox Window Status Bar ods Designer Software HC900 C50S Rev 6 0x Pcd_ConfigC50S 2 Main menu P File Edit View Monitor Recipes Window Options Help Main toolbar D amp W A o o 6 Se 6 ae J 8 08 F i gt Be m Open Configuration Files a G aE HC900 C50S Rev 6 0k Ped_ConfigC 505 2 H Controller z File browser E Process Worksheets preteen ical PID Loo p with 4 20
173. em the speed is determined by the controller s modem Click OK Standard 8800 bps Modem For Advanced Network Setup click Advanced Network Setup on the MORE gt gt button at the bottom of the Serial Comm Port Properties dialog box Retry Delay i ms Number of Retries before Abort Enter a decimal value Timeout 1500 ms Retry Delay Enter a value in milliseconds Timeout Enter a value in milliseconds Note It is not recommended that you set the values lower than those shown in the dialog box since it may cause some communications operations to fail Press Reset button to reset these fields to their default values Retries Reset 54 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 PC Comm Ports and Connections PC to Controller Connection Settings For Telephony Settings click on the Telephony Settings MORE gt gt button at the bottom of the w Ten is Comm Port Properties dialog Sori Tha EE Click on a radio button to select one of the following two options No Timeout No timeout is performed and the application will stay connected until you Hang Up Connection Timeout Enter in the active field in minutes how long the application will leave the line open before hanging up automatically The Modem will hang up if there is no communications activity for this amount of time PC to Controller Connection Settings After setting up your PC Network and PC
174. ement buttons at the top right of the worksheet order dialog box The tabs will be reordered at the bottom of the worksheet area How to Delete a FBD Worksheet Right click on the new Worksheet name in the browser and select Delete Worksheet or Select the Delete icon on the Function Block Diagram Toolbar 2nd from left or From the Edit menu on the Main Drop down menus select Delete Worksheet The selected worksheet will be deleted 100 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet How to Add Worksheet Protection How to Add Worksheet Protection Introduction The HC900 Process Control Designer provides an optional configuration Worksheet protection New files default to No Protection Worksheets can be protected on individual basis where all protected worksheets use the same password A user has limited access to protected worksheets Protected Worksheet Type View Worksheet Edit Worksheet Controller YES NO Display YES NO Function Blocks NO NO Modbus Map YES NO Protected Worksheets e can be unlocked Protection is disabled but not removed from the file If you save the file the worksheet protection will be locked when the file is reopened e can have their passwords changed In order to change a password you will need to know the current password e Can have their protection removed Removing the protection is permanent If you save the file the w
175. en loading into a controller s active configuration Changes to variables via deletions renaming or re directing may affect the recipe content Step Item Action Description Select File Open Lets you choose an RCP file to edit After selecting file the Recipe Editor appears Select File New Choose a new file type box appears Select Recipes tab Recipe types appear Select Recipes The Recipe Editor appears Variables Select a Reference A recipe must have a configuration to give it context Select an open Configuration configuration from the pull down list If none available select Open Configuration to open one The configuration will open Click back to Recipe Editor and select the reference configuration Name and Description Identify the recipe the Identify the recipe Variable Tag List Lists all variable tags in the reference configuration Click on a tag and click Add to add it to the recipe Recipe Items Lists all variables in the recipe Name Name of variable Value Value state of variable If analog variable enter a value in the value field If digital variable select ON or OFF Deletes selected item from recipe Prints the recipe Saves the recipe as RCP file Download Downloads recipe to the controllers recipe pool where it can be edited or loaded into the controller s active configuration 172 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Recipe Variables Recipe Poo
176. ent of selected display screens to keyboard buttons may be viewed using the Operator Interface Worksheet All of the information for control loops and setpoint programmers will be accessed by the associated tag name while selected screens such as bar graphs trends and overview displays will require the user to specify the individual data points to be represented on the screen Display Buttons Configuration Overview This function lets you customize display access by assigning specific display screens to a set of assignable buttons OI Model 1042 has 8 assignable buttons Model 559 has 5 Each assignable button supports a sequence of up to ten screens Screens assigned to these buttons may be Monitor screens view data only or Operate screens take actions The type of screen and the data presented on the screen is defined during configuration Configuration Procedure j on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Display Buttons Configuration dialog Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 65 September 2013 Display Worksheet Display Buttons Configuration by Pd ke e T hth nti m jo ia oie im is im ia Select one of the tabs one for each button located across the top of the dialog box Choose a display format field This will determine what will be shown in the Groups Tags field located below the Display Format selection box Display Formats categories are as follows For examples see the O
177. ented User Defined Signals and Variables Tab Procedure for editing signal or variable addresses 1 Select the type of signal or variable you want to choose from User Defined Signals and Variables Function Blocks Signals and Yariables Filter Analog Signals Analog Signals Digital Signals Analog Yarables Digital Variables ARGONTSP Argon 1 Flow SP CYCLES Cycle Count F1 LPOUT F1 TC1 Furnacel TC1 Add gt gt F1 T C2 Furnacel TC2 FITEMP Furnace 1 TAvg FI WSP Furnace 1 WorkoP Delete FIZON STC FurndZonesT emp _ Delete 2 Highlight the desired signal variable 3 Select an address range you want to add to There are 20 ranges of 50 addresses each for a total of 1000 addresses Then click on the address you will assign the signal variable to Modbus Registers Show as Decimal Address Range 45057 451 DE C Show as Hex aadress TagWame Descriptor naate aos fanow OOOO o raea r A A 00 E a 4 Click Add to insert the signal variable 268 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Modbus Register Addresses Fixed Modbus Map 5 Click on the Data Type area of the signal variable and select a data type 32 bit data types require 2 adjacent addresses Modbus Registers f Show as Decimal Address Range 45057 451 0E C Show as Hex aadress TagName Descriptor patatype gt 45057 AIRFLOW f unsigned 1 16 e Oo
178. enu 16 17 Function Block Address 126 Closing 17 Function Block Definition 105 Selecting 17 Function Block Diagram Configuration Toolbar Menu Conventions 16 89 Message Display Configuration 75 Function Block Diagram Rules 127 Modbus Address 247 Function Block Diagrams 127 Adding function block parameters to custom Function Block Identification 105 map 255 Function Block Monitor Window 187 Adding system parameters to custom map 258 Function Block Parameters 126 choosing fixed or custom map 244 Function Block Usage Guidelines 108 Custom Modbus Map 250 Function blocks 112 Fixed Modbus Map 247 connect disconnect 112 Modbus Map Overview 244 G Modbus Initiator TCP Port Diagnostics 237 Modbus Master Serial Port Diagnostics 234 General Designer Window Terminology 10 Monitor menu 23 General Steps to Build a Control Strategy 109 Monitor Mode 184 General Terminology 10 indicator 184 General Windows Terminology 10 Monitor Toolbar 184 Monitor Update Rate 184 H Monitoring 181 185 192 Hand Calibration Procedure 151 how to start 185 Hardware and Software requirements 4 how to stop 192 Help Menu 25 Host Connections Diagnostics 231 Host Connections Diagnostics Status Indicators 232 How Do Start Monitoring 185 How Do Stop Monitoring 192 How to Add a New FBD Worksheet 90 290 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 N Navigational Tools 28 Network Port Diagnostic Status Indicators 227 Network Port Diagnostics 226 Numeric Co
179. eptember 2013 User Interface Main Toolbar Functions ICON Function Dialog Box Comments Places the contents of the clipboard containing FBD diagram items onto the Function Block Diagram at the location determined by the blinking insertion point caret This command is unavailable if the clipboard is empty Cut and pasted items maintain their links e g display references Modbus addresses recipes they are not deleted and pasted as a new copy If you paste a cut function block and soft wires to the same or different worksheet in the same configuration the soft wires will be dangling unconnected and you are asked to specify how you want to resolve dangling soft wires Click once to undo the last action Click on the down arrow to see all previous actions To undo several actions move mouse to an earlier action and click on it all actions from that action forward are undone If you accidentally undo an action use redo You can undo only actions that affect the contents of the configuration you can t undo actions that affect the display of the configuration such as zoom Click once to redo the last Undone action Click on the down arrow to see all Undone actions To redo several actions move mouse to earliest desired action and click on it all actions from that action forward are redone If you accidentally redo an action use undo You can redo only actions that affect the contents of the configuration you cant redo ac
180. equence selected in the Sequence Pool If you are adding a Sequence this dialog box will automatically appear It will also appear if you select the Worksheet Properties Icon 2nd from left from the Toolbar on the dialog box The information configured here will appear in the Edit Sequence dialog box Configuration Refer to the table below and enter the properties information in the appropriate fields in the dialog box then click OK to return to the Sequence Pool dialog box Parameter Description Entry Information Description of Sequence 16 characters r Jog Step Logic input JOG on state switch Step number jog block will cause the Sequencer to will go to jump to the start of the step designated then continue Time Units This selection assigns the time units hours or minutes for all Steps Minutes Time unit in Minutes Click on Radio button 188 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Overview On Line Monitoring Overview Designer Monitoring provides the following e Multiple concurrent function block Monitor Windows You can open as many Function Block monitor windows as you want until you run out of physical resources on the PC You can open Function Block monitor windows concurrently for Function Blocks on different Function Block Diagram Worksheets Function Block monitor window can be resized to better suit concurrent windows e Provides a W
181. er The Tag name and tag descriptor is listed in field below the banner Events do not have multiple priorities like alarms They are considered a lower priority than alarms Details include E Mail Notification of events on a point by point basis Check the box to allow Email notification The E mail will be sent if an event occurs on a point configured to send E mail to any all of the 3 E mail addresses that have events assigned Event priorities are always indicated as Store to OI Archive List OI Event File on the data archive disk on an event by event basis Display on Ol presentation on Ol Status line and Event Summary display Trigger Direction ON Event on rising edge Off to on transition OFF Event on falling edge off to on transition click on radio button to select E Mail Notification opens the E Mail Notification dialog box It lets you configure up to three E Mail addresses per controller configuration for Alarm and Event notification There are two tabs on the dialog Box General Tab FROM The Controller name is configured by the builder of the Configuration file Read Only SUBJECT Enter an Event Subject up to 31 characters Enter an Alarm Subject up to 31 characters To List Tab Enter up to 3 configurable E Mail addresses 32 characters per addresses For each Email address check the Alarm Event priorities you want the E mail address to receive Events do not have multiple
182. er are setup for the correct rack address If a hub is used check that all cables are properly connected to the hub proper crossover cables are used and that hub is powered Cycle power to the rack Cycle power to the hub Replace the HC900 C50 expansion rack s power supply Replace the HC900 C50 expansion rack Replace the HC900 C50 expansion rack s scanner board Replace the main CPU Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 243 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics Hardware Failure The power up test of the 1 All rack monitor block Replace main CPU module expansion rack Ethernet XIO PORT DIAG are set controller failed to HWFAIL Allrack monitor block RACK OK pin are turned off All modules in the configuration have their diagnostic set to MOD_NOCOMM their rack monitor module fail pin is turned on and the rack monitor block s RACK OK pin is turned off ASYS block s HW OK pin is turned off The statuses for the AO and Al channels that are affected are set to BAD CHANNEL Port A B Cable C7OR only The I O Controller continues to run but Swap the cables so that I O Mismatch cables from CPUA and is not able to access the V O Ais connected to I O on CPUB are connected to on the associated rack CPUA and I O B is the wrong ports on the connected to I O on CPUB I O scanner CPU Protocol Mismatch C7OR only The Controller continues to run but U
183. es longer than 3 controller scan cycles a dialog box displays a the estimated duration of the Hot Start and b options to initiate or cancel the Hot Start COLD START the controller will transition through normal PROGRAM TO RUN mode transition Controller memory will be re initialized Outputs will be turned off during re start Controller will return to RUN mode ABORT the controller will disregard the new configuration and continue to use the previous configuration 9 The dialog box status line will state Mode Change in Progress then Download Successful when completed Downloading in Run Mode N WARNING While we provide application assistance personally through our literature and the Honeywell web site it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of the configuration in the application and the potential dangers of downloading a configuration while running Downloading in RUN Mode has the potential to create a hazardous situation Changes to the configuration result in a short suspension of the control program followed by an immediate execution of the new configuration It is the user s responsibility to ensure that configuration changes will not result in a hazardous situation It is the user s responsibility to assess this risk for his process Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury to people and or property 38 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 1
184. esaaaes 64 Operator Panel Configuration Toolbar ccccccccccesecceseeeeceeeeeseeeseeeeeeesseeeeesaeeeeessaaaes 64 Operator Iniermace DiSOlayS ciicicin en raieh tas a Sand a iedacemt ee aceceeneneindh a 65 Display B tons COMMUN OM elie crite tn Marca a se area Mini head ties 65 Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups cccccecccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeesaeeeeeneas 67 PAV AUN DE VANS ctaacch ees tats pte a Genco eee E EEE E T 71 EVENULIST GOMNGUNATIOMN oraren e Ea o AA aA 72 EW SHLD Vell S pnie iacaseemmcobedemesicuisiandenecubsapiasanie stpenoatoueamnis me tedetanecueleleeaeeul 73 EMail NOTA CAMO M omino Anais ate eee anette ue ata intact alsm tee Tala Ge 73 OperalomintetaGe Seting Sereen aed tot oea eb eed ala tes dansidedesetea duct 74 Of File Names for DISK StOraG sisirin E ET 76 stant Wp Display GONMGUNAL OM sascissatenscetn EE cu vetvekdcertatesusaeamensneeneacoinabere yas 76 Message Display Configuration ccccccccccsseeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeceesseaeeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeess 77 WIMOCK NEG VV ONKSINGC IS s2tare tat ee cet tea a a neat el Mae elt 77 vii HG900 Process Control Designer User Guide i assti t OO Revision 15 September 2013 DATA STORAGE sissioni bisioa E EE 79 pala Storage OVE NICWN ioiii a ai 79 Data Storage GONVENUOAS ersin E E 79 Data Storage Enable Conditions ccccccccesccceceeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeseeaeeeessaneeessaaeeees 81 Data Storage Co
185. ese differences Factors affecting scan time Using the Advanced protocol the HC900 controller can potentially scan all of the Modbus registers on the serial link at a rate that is equal to the analog cycle time The actual scan time for any given application is affected by the following factors 1 Characteristics of the slave devices e g the maximum baud rate the message turn around time support for Modbus packets the maximum allowable packet size etc 2 Configuration of the Modbus slave blocks 3 Programmed baud rate of the serial port The Modbus Master scan time is adjusted automatically by the HC900 at run time no user intervention required The actual scan time of the link is displayed on the Modbus Communication Diagnostics display in Monitor Mode Configurable parameters The parameters on this dialog can be used to match the behavior of the Advanced protocol to the characteristics of the slave devices on the link Please consult the documentation for your slave devices to determine the best settings for your application In general the best overall performance of the Modbus Master Advanced link can typically be achieved by using the largest possible packet sizes Slave Reply Timeout milliseconds This parameter defines the Modbus message turnaround time for the link It has a range of 10ms to 255ms This parameter should be set to handle the slave device that has the worse case turnaround time on the link If there
186. evision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 93 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet How to Navigate Between FBD Worksheets It allows you to move quickly between files and worksheets To select a particular Worksheet double click the Function Block Worksheet name Use the Connection Traceback Access the Trace Window from the Main Menu Toolbar Or from the View Menu on the main menu Trace Back List Function Black VO Pin Worksheet Name E SPS109 SPS104 setpoirits PFID113 LOOF 1 Loops The Trace Window provides a list of all blocks pins you have traced and lists Block ID Tag Name I O Pin Name Worksheet name The last trace is on the top of the list Selecting a function block from the list will activate the associated function block worksheet Use the Find Item feature From the Edit Menu on the main menu select Find It lets you search for an item on the FBD Worksheet Select the item type from the Show drop down menu on the Find Item dialog box Select an item from the Item drop down menu Click on the Worksheet in the Find Results field and the associated worksheet will be selected and the Tag Variable or Function Block will be highlighted on the worksheet 94 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Keyboard Navigation Keyboard Navigation PAGE UP Go to the previous worksheet page Other
187. f process information on a storage device for analysis by an off line computer equipped with Honeywell data analysis software Data stored files can not be reviewed from the operator interface The instrument can support both continuous and discontinuous batching modes of the following storage types Trends Two Trend groups of up to 12 points each can be stored Floppy disk capacity for trends is inversely proportional to the number of trend points and the storage time interval that is the time between trend samples For example when storing 2 trend groups of 12 points each at a storage interval of 2 seconds the storage device will be filled in a few hours Conversely when storing 1 trend group of 3 points at a storage interval of 30 minutes the storage device could take several months to be filled Point Log unit data samples A point log file to take a snapshot of process data for up to 12 points is also provided Point log samples can be scheduled to occur at a user specified time synchronized to the controllers Real Time Clock RTC or by a digital event in the controller The maximum sample rate for point log data is 60 seconds per sample The Point log file has a maximum capacity of between 2000 and 5000 records per file Alarms Alarm recording is available to store on and off alarm actions Alarm data includes the point tag a 16 character point description and the time and date of alarm occurrence The Alarm file has a capacity
188. f the Watch Summary Window you can view a list of tags that you want to monitor You can add the following to the list e Signals e Page Connectors e Variables The Watch Summary window doesn t have to be visible in order to add items to the list of User Defined tags to display nor do the drop down selectors on the User Defined tab have to match what you ll be adding For example you can add a signal to the User Defined tab of the Watch Summary window even if the window is not visible or the User Defined tab s Show drop down selector is set to All Variables As long as you are in monitor mode you can add items at any time Note that there is no limit to the number of items that you can add to the list but the list is not saved between sessions of the software To add Signals Page Connectors or Variables to the user defined watch list 4 Navigate to the function block worksheet that contains the item 5 Right click on the item to display the context menu 6 Select Add to Watch Summary from the context menu See the Watch Window Summary for instructions on how to view the Watch Summary Window The number of pull down selectors at the top of the User Defined tab of the Watch Summary window will depend on the controller type For SlL compliant controllers there will be a leading selector which allows the signals to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet they are located on e All both Process and Safety worksh
189. f the drawing and drag the mouse to form a visible dotted rectangle ADi 2 oo0000 000000 FAIL FAIL oe DIS WARN Release the mouse button Everything entirely within the rectangle is selected and highlighted Drawing Conventions To delete a selected item press the DELETE key or right click on the item and select DELETE To move a Selected item press the left mouse button on an already selected item and drag the selection to the desired location on the function block diagram To copy a selected item use the CUT COPY and PASTE functions on the EDIT menu or Toolbar or right click on the item and select the desired menu item To abort a move operation press the ESCAPE key before releasing the mouse Function Block Changes If a function block is deleted Designer does not re use the block number If a function block is added Designer uses the highest current block number 1 Restrictions When a configuration uses the last block number 500 or 2100 and you try to add another block Designer will prompt you to de fragment the table and recover previously deleted blocks The next configuration download to the controller following the defragmentation process requires a Cold Start Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 119 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Connecting Disconnecting Blocks Connecting Disconnecting Blocks Introduction A control strategy is
190. ficatio Type in a name for your controller configuration same as Worksheet name n Also indicates controller type and revision read only E Mail Click to open the E Mail Notification dialog box Notification Two Tabs on Dialog Box General FROM name displayed for convenience read only and SUBJECT information 31 character configurable text To List enter up to 3 configurable E Mail addresses For each Email address check an Alarm Event priority See E Mail Notification Unlock Click to open the Unlock Worksheets dialog box Enter a password and click Worksheets Unlock to unlock all worksheets Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 61 September 2013 Controller Worksheet E Mail Notification E Mail Notification opens the E Mail Notification dialog box It lets you configure up to three E Mail addresses per controller configuration for Alarm and Event notification There are two tabs on the dialog Box General Tab FROM The Controller name is configured by the builder of the Configuration file Read Only SUBJECT Enter an Event Subject up to 31 characters Enter an Alarm Subject up to 31 characters To List Tab 62 Enter up to 3 configurable E Mail addresses 32 characters per addresses For each Email address check the Alarm Event priorities you want the E mail address to receive Events do not have multiple priorities like alarms because they are considered at a priority lo
191. finition This DANGER symbol indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury This WARNING symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury This CAUTION symbol may be present on Control Product instrumentation and literature If present on a product the user must consult the appropriate part of the accompanying product literature for more information This CAUTION symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in property damage WARNING PERSONAL INJURY Risk of electrical shock This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms 42 4 Vpeak or 60 Vdc may be accessible Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury ATTENTION Electrostatic Discharge ESD hazards Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices Protective Earth PE terminal Provided for connection of the protective earth green or green yellow supply system conductor Functional earth terminal Used for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement NOTE This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements Earth Ground Functional earth connection NOTE This connection shall be bonded to Protectiv
192. from FROM the PC TO the controller See page 37 and page 40 Set Controller Port Menu selection lets you Set Protocol for controller s configuration ports Calibrate Controller Click to open the Calibrate dialog box Four Tabs on the Dialog Box Al Channel see Calibrate Al Channel CJ Temp see Calibrate CJ Temp AO Channel see Calibrate AO Channel PPO Block see PPO Block Calibration Set Controller Mode Click to open the Set Controller Mode dialog box Read the current mode select a new mode then write the new mode to the controller Set Controller A Wizard interface guides you through connecting to a Network Parameters controller in order to view and edit the controller s network parameters In order to change the controller s network parameters the controller must be in PROGRAM mode Set Controller Time Click to open the Set Controller Time dialog box Data Storage Utility Available only for software revision Rev 4 4 and earlier Click to open the Data Storage Utility dialog box Select a Removable Disk Drive Group Number and Trend group number Press Initialize to prepare the disk for storage Back Up Controller Backs up controller s configuration and port settings See Information Back Up Controller Information Restore Controller This button visible for open backup files only See Restore Information Controller Information Manually Write see Manually Write Database to Flash Database to
193. from the drop down list OR From the Worksheet Toolbox group Other Items drag and drop the Numeric Constant symbol to the function block diagram The Constant symbol will appear on the Function Block Diagram for configuration 0 000 Numeric Constant symbol Double click on the symbol to open its dialog box Enter Numeric Constant value Humenc Constant Properties c Click OK Hint To save the number of numeric constants used when a given constant is used more than once connect a signal tag to the output pin of the constant and use a connector object as the input pins of the appropriate blocks Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 123 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Adding a Connector SUBIZS 134 Ei e Two f MULIZ4 132 ADDAZS 133 TWO gt ae 3 Adding a Connector Procedure Right click on an Input pin and select Connector from the drop down list OR From the Worksheet Toolbox group Other Items drag and drop the Connector symbol to the function block diagram The Connector symbol will appear on the Function Block Diagram for configuration Connector symbol CONNECT Double click on the symbol to open its dialog box Enter Connector Name Choose Connector Name x EV PAVALVE PURGE Find Purge Actuat Cancel CARB ACK ACTIVE AVERAGE AVYGTEMP BZbSN029 DO 2 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 DO 3 DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 DO 4 DIGITAL O
194. ge is enabled samples are taken at regular intervals known as the storage intervals These intervals can be from a few seconds to 30 minutes Each data type has its own storage interval For example Trends can be stored using one interval like 5 seconds Point Log using another interval like 10 per day and Alarms Events stored as they occur Or they can all use the same interval It depends on how data storage has been configured In Continuous and Batch modes the storage interval determines how often data is sampled and stored For trends data is first sampled when storage is enabled and again at equally spaced intervals thereafter For example if trend storage is enabled at 2 03 p m and the interval is 10 minutes trend storage occurs at 2 03 2 13 2 23 etc until storage is disabled For Point Log data is first sampled after storage is enabled but not until the programmed Start Time Data is sampled at equally spaced intervals after the Start Time For example suppose the Start Time is 3 00 p m and the storage interval is 10 minutes If storage is enabled at 2 03 p m the first sample will occur at 3 00 and every 10 minutes thereafter If storage is disabled at 3 35 and enabled at 3 42 storage will resume at 3 50 Notice that the interval is synchronized to the Start Time Alarm Events are logged on occurrence with time and date No interval In On Command mode for Point Log there is no storage interval or Start Time A single
195. ge the execution order by assigning a specific Block Execution Order number to a single function block or by changing the relative execution order of multiple function blocks Assigning a Block Execution Order To change the Block Execution Order of a specific function block on a function block diagram double click in the top portion of the block s graphic where the Block Number and Block Execution Order are displayed circled in the diagram below 106 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Execution Order PID104 4 Pi Thim a O I a FIG104 D108 5 000000 l FAIL a RSF m FFY AL a TRV AL oO o TRO DIRECT a BIAS ee SV ATI a MDOROI MODE a BCI HCO m This action will display the Change Block Execution Order dialog on top of the function block graphic as shown below Block Execution Order E p BIAS i Swi ATI m MDRQI MODE je BCI The block s execution order can be changed by entering a new number in the entry box and clicking on the OK button You can increase or decrease the block s execution order to any value from 1 to 2100 If you enter a value outside this range an error message will be displayed When you click on the OK button the Block Execution Order of the selected function block is set to the new value Any other function blocks in the same execution rate that have current execution orders equ
196. gnal Tags Controller Toggles the Controller Diagnostics Window that lets you view the Diagnostics controller parameters and values Rack Diagnostics Toggles the I O Rack Diagnostics window that lets you view the Rack Diagnostics Expansion I O Comm Diagnostics except C30 CPU and the I O Module diagnostics Serial S1 Port Opens the Serial Port S1 RS232 Default Configuration Port Diagnostics Diagnostics window that lets you view the parameters and values of the S1 port default R2 232 on the controller Serial S2 Port Toggles the Serial Port S2 RS485 default Ol Port Diagnostics window Diagnostics that lets you view the S2 port default RS485 Operator Interface parameters and values Network Port Toggles the Network Port Diagnostics window that lets you view the Diagnostics network port parameters and values 192 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 On Line Monitoring How Do Start Monitoring Expansion I O Toggles the Expansion I O Comm Diagnostics window that lets you view Comm the expansion port parameters and values Diagnostics except C30 CPU Host Connections Toggles the Host Connections window that lets you view the host Diagnostics connections parameters and values Peer to Peer Toggles the Peer to Peer Connections Diagnostics window that lets you Diagnostics view the Peer to Peer parameters and values Function Block Toggles the Monitor Function Block window that lets you moni
197. gnals can be filtered by type All Analog Digital Page Connectors can be filtered by type All Analog Digital Variables can be filtered by type All Analog Digital I O can be filtered by type Al AO DI DO Ol Display groups Overviews Panel Meters Alarms Trends etc Docking and Undocking the Window Double clicking in the Title Bar area of the Watch Summary Window will toggle its docked state If the window is docked double clicking in the title bar area will undock the window If the window is Undocked double clicking in the title bar area will dock the window at it last docked position Dragging the window to the top bottom left or right edge of the main viewing area of the application will dock the window at that location Press and hold the CTRL key down to prevent Docking when moving the window Hot Links You can click on any I O function block or Signal on the Controller Worksheet or any I O function block Signal or Variable in the Watch Window and that item will be located on the Function Block Diagram As you move the mouse over a HOT LINK the text changes to Underlined Blue and the cursor changes to a Hand Writes or Forces By clicking on the item in the Value column you may write a value such as for a Variable or force a value for an analog input or digital input For I O a Forced column will indicate that the I O point is forced 16 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision
198. gure entry limits for analog variables Use entry limits for analog variables Use entry limits of 0 low and 1 high for digital limits Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 69 September 2013 Display Worksheet Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups Select the Overview tab then Select Display Group from the drop down menu Analog signal tags digital signal tags analog variables and digital variables will be displayed in the Selected Tags field From the Selected Tags List drop down menu select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list The default selection is ALL Enter the group title Use any mix of numbers letters and spaces Select a Tag Name from the Select Tag List Click on ADD the selected signal tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in the Selected Tags field OR Select a position in the Selected Tags field then click on INSERT The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required Enter the Min Value and Max Value values for each signal selected Defaults are 99999 and 99999 Repeat the selection for up to 12 tags for each group Click OK Single Point Rotating Panel Display Tag Groups This selection lets you configure 2 groups of Single Point Rotating Panel Displays Single Point Panel displays provide a single point alohanumeric readout that consists of the tag and current value
199. h a new pair of block pins The first item is the signal source the second item is the signal destination Select any of the rows in the Traceback window to recall the diagram to display the selected block The last trace is on the top of the list Right Mouse Click Procedure to Trace Signals Select a Function Block of interest Right Mouse click on any INPUT pin Select TRACE Traceback will find the source of the connection you selected and refresh the FBD view with that block visible Highlighted even if the other side of the connection is on a different worksheet The Output pin of the block the signal source will be displayed in RED From that block repeat the traceback to another block and another block etc Use the Traceback list to view your Traceback history You can clear the Trace List by pressing the bar at the top of the window 96 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Resolve Dangling Soft Wires Resolve Dangling Soft Wires When you cut a function block s and any connected soft wires after you paste the selection onto the same or different worksheet in the same configuration the pasted soft wires are left dangling unconnected To resolve these dangling soft wires a dialog box appears with the following choices Delete dangling soft wires Select this to delete the soft wires from the pasted function block s The soft wire connection
200. h on RSM is set The controller will continue Make sure switch is in detected between two positions to operate with a missing desired position RSM Module is not inserted RSM Module has failed RSM Switch is indicating an invalid position RSM Automatic failover is still possible if required The controller will continue Install RSM module Replace RSM Replace RSM to operate with a bad RSM Automatic failover is still possible if required Reserve CPU is The lead controller will Verify all cabling unable to communicate continue to control the between the reserve 1 O comm error on reserve Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 with one or more of the I O racks Hardware failure on the reserve CPU Hardware failure on the lead CPU Hardware failure on the CPU rack backplane process Failover to the reserve is still possible if a subsequent failure renders the current lead less capable than the reserve The lead controller will continue to control the process but failover is not possible CPU and the scanners Replace any Ethernet switches between the reserve CPU and the I O rack s Replace the reserve CPU Replace the scanner CPU Contact Honeywell service Replace the reserve CPU Replace the lead CPU Replace the CPU rack backplane Contact Honeywell 281 Redundancy Redundancy Link Status Indicators Configuration Firmware Vers
201. hat contains the item 2 Right click on the item to display the context menu 3 Select Add to Watch Summary from the context menu See the Watch Window Summary for instructions on how to view the Watch Summary Window The number of pull down selectors at the top of the User Defined tab of the Watch Summary window will depend on the controller type For SiL compliant controllers there will be a leading 210 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Watch Summary Window Watch Summary User Defined selector which allows the signals to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet they are located on e All both Process and Safety worksheets e Process e Safety For all controller types there will be a pull down selector which allows the type of user defined tags to be selected All All Signals All Page Connectors All Variables Note that in this case All refers to the list of user defined items and not to the full configuration For each item in the selection list its Tag Name Descriptor and Value are displayed in the table as shown below Watch Summary Gg x Show fai E All z ee as ih User Defined Signals A Page Connectors Variables Inputs Outputs _ For SlL compliant controller types the rows of data will be colored coded Items located on a Safety worksheet will be displayed with a yellow background whereas items located on a Process worksheet will be
202. hat could not be interpreted by HC Designer Typically these occur when the response message contains garbled data Check physical connections between the Controller and the PC If you are using a modem or a serial cable this error may be the result of line noise Physical Errors Count of hardware type errors These typically occur when the Controller doesn t respond Check cable and other hardware connections If using a modem or a serial cable verify the cable connections and baud rates of all pieces 58 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Worksheets Overview What is a Worksheet Worksheets Overview What is a Worksheet A Worksheet is a logical partition of a configuration file Worksheets can be further categorized by function into 6 main categories Each category is assigned a tab in the worksheet category tab control that makes up the main Worksheet Window of a configuration There are restrictions on the number of individual worksheets that can exist in a given category and not all categories are available to all controller types and revisions of controller firmware Below are the different worksheet categories Controller Worksheet e Displays the configuration of I O modules e 1 per configuration Operator Panel Worksheet e Display and configure Operator Interface displays Also referred to as Display Worksheets e 1 per configuration e Not available in revision 6 0 and above Function
203. have dialog boxes to allow operation and test Stored profiles or sequences may also be selected on line e User selected Watch Window lists allow access to digital and analog I O Signal Tags Variables for write actions and custom display data groups by tab selection A user defined watch window provides custom association of parameters for a debug session Watch windows also allow write or force capability e Logic power flow indication using color coded soft wiring for digital connections to and between block pins including signal tags and connectors e Live data at block pins analog floating point or digital status on a complete block or pin basis e Signal Trace back for any input to a block for finding the signal sources for quick identification of potential errors e A Forced Blocks window shows all forced outputs and allows release of force conditions individually e Data update selection as fast as 250 ms e Retention of monitoring setup when moving back and forth between editing and monitoring modes The user selected dockable Watch Window lists and Signal Trace back finds the signal sources and provides a clear view of the configuration operation allowing quick identification of potential faults Read write interaction is provided for most blocks including PID Setpoint Programmer and Sequencers A FIND function allows location of multiple instances of specific tags variables and function blocks across all worksh
204. he controller model and revision selected is a SIL compliant model revision There are Process Worksheets e 20 per configuration for C30 C30S C50 C50S e 40 per configuration for C70 C70S C70R C75 C75S Safety Worksheets e 20 per configuration for C30S C508 e 40 per configuration for C70S C75S e Only available for SlL compliant controller types e Only available in revision 6 0 and above Revisioni5 HC 900 Process Control Designer User Guide i t lt O O O CSSNS September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet FBD Configuration Toolbar e Up to 20 40 worksheets per configuration depending on controller model A total of up to 400 Function Block Pages 20 x 20 for non SIL controllers C30 C50 e A total of up to 800 Function Block Pages 40 x 20 for non SIL controllers C70 C70R C75 e A total of up to 800 Function Block Pages 20 x 20 x 2 for SIL controllers C30S C50S e A total of up to 1600 Function Block Pages 40 x 20 x 2 for SIL controllers C70S C75S There is extended use of Right Mouse Click FBD Configuration Toolbar Click on ICON to open the dialog box ICON Function Dialog Box Comments Print Click to print the active worksheet It opens the Print dialog box for printing Worksheet Append Adds a new Process or Safety block diagram If selected a new worksheet will i Process be created and a new sub tab for it will appear at the bottom of the diagram Works
205. he fixed map gt 32 loops gt 8 SP Programmers etc If you accidentally switch from custom to fixed you can use the Undo feature on the main toolbar Fixed or custom map There are two kinds of Modbus maps available fixed or custom Basically the fixed and custom maps both can contain the same types of items but the custom map has more flexibility with those items quantities addresses and data types The maps have these characteristics The items that can be in the fixed map are limited The items that can be in the custom map are to certain types of function blocks and other limited to certain types of function blocks and configuration data other configuration data same as fixed map Items are automatically assigned to the fixed map At the moment you switch from fixed to custom map mode any items in your configuration maintain their addresses from the fixed map However once you are in custom map mode if you add more items to your configuration they are not automatically added to the custom map you must add them manually Each item type is grouped in a fixed address You can create partitions with custom names and range of the map For example the address address ranges Partitions can contain any item range designated for Loops is restricted to Loops types you can mix and match items if needed only it can not contain Setpoint Programmers Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 265 September 2013 Modbus
206. heet WINGO Append The new diagram reference will be placed in the File Browser Click on the Safety diagram name in the File Browser to edit the name Worksheet Delete Click to delete the selected Process Safety Worksheet highlighted on the File At Process Browser This will delete all the items in the worksheet Worksheet Delete Safety Worksheet Reorder Opens the Worksheet order dialog box Allows you to change the order of the Process worksheets as they appear at the bottom of the Worksheet area Click on Worksheets worksheet name and use the increment decrement buttons at the top of the Reorder dialog box to change the worksheet order Safety Worksheets FBD Type in a title and description of your FBD Worksheet The title will appear in Worksheet the File Browser and on the associated FB Worksheets tab at the bottom of Properties the diagram Moves the currently selected FBD diagram items from the current Function Block diagram and places them on the clipboard Indicated by a red dotted line Upon pasting the items all links to them e g display references Modbus address recipes are preserved as if they were moved they are not deleted and pasted as a new copy Copy Copies the currently selected FBD diagram items from the current Function Block diagram and places it on the clipboard Indicated by a blue dotted line Places the contents of the clipboard containing FBD diagram items onto the Function Block Di
207. hlLUl NL NLNNk eee E i Eai A f B10110945 a block output i ERE ee a Ta WBNS I I AND101 131 VAROO D 0101 001 PAGE CONNECTOR VYAROFITB ANDI21 132 PAGE CONNECTOR 0101 001 UNCONNECTED OUTPUT co HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Blocks Overview Types of Function Blocks Types of Function Blocks Function blocks come in three main classes Input These process the physical inputs from the controller Examples are Analog Input Digital Input They are the first stage in the controller s configuration Calculations and logic These process the data from the input blocks and perform arithmetic logic and sequencing operations Examples are PID Setpoint Programmer AND Math etc They are the middle stage of the controller s configuration Output These process the data from the calculations and logic blocks and are the link with the physical outputs of the controller The Analog output and Digital output function blocks convert this output information into a voltage or current which is fed to the corresponding output hardware such as a current output or relay Overview Function blocks are graphic representations of instrument like functions They are accessible through the Worksheet Toolbox on the Designer Main Window They have inputs and or outputs for connections to other blocks or functions as applicable Each function block is assigned a unique number from 101 to 500
208. ht click menus See also Right Click In Monitor Mode Right Click On Function Block Object not pins Help Calls up Topic Help for Function Block selected Execution Order Cut Copy Paste Delete Edit Modbus Register Address Properties Right Click On Unconnected Function Block pins Signal Tag Page Connector Analog Variable Digital Variable Numeric Constant Connector Paste Reconnects a signal tag or page connector that you cut from another pin When you drop one of these items it automatically connects to the pin you right clicked on Right Click on Connected Function Block Input Pins Trace Right Click on Variable Help Calls up Topic Help for Function Block selected Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 29 User Interface Right Mouse Click Execution Order Cut Copy Paste Delete Add to Modbus Registers Properties Right Click on Signal Tag Help calls up help Find Where Used Opens Find dialog box Lets you locate any and all places where the signal tag is used Cut Cuts the signal tag so you can reconnect paste it to a different unconnected pin of the same type digital or analog Can reconnect to a different function block Item is grayed out indicating the cut Press Esc to cancel Delete Deletes the signal tag Add to Modbus Registers Properties Right Click on Page Connector Help calls up help Find Where Used Opens F
209. iagnostic Number of Messages Data Link Errors Clear Statistics Rack 4 Comm Diagnostic Number of Messages Data Link Errors Clear Statistics Rack 5 Comm Diagnostic Number of Messages Data Link Errors Clear Statistics This window can be launched from the Utilities Worksheet 2 The Expansion I O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box will appear It shows Port Status Diagnostics Statistics and parameters for the I O Expansion I O Comm subsystem 3 The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list 4 Click on X to exit box Refer to Expansion I O Comm Diagnostics Status Indicators for status indications possible cause and actions to correct the problem 242 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics Expansion I O Comm Diagnostics Status Indicators The Expansion I O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list except C30 CPU teense Data Link Failure The communications to 1 Related rack monitor Use the Ol to a particular rack is block s RACK OK pin is determine which rack resulting in a lot of DLL turned off Is experiencing the errors 2 Depending on the nature DLL errors Verify that of the DLL errors the the expansion rack associated rack monitor should be in the block s module configuration diagnostics and pins Verify that the could be affected jumpers on the scann
210. iated rack and force a cold start monitor block s RACK 3 Replace CPU board OK pin is turned off ASYS block s HW OK pin is turned off Address Error The reserved exception Same as above Same as above occurred for an unknown reason Data Abort CPU failed when Same as above Same as above attempting to access data Software Interrupt Software Interrupt Same as above Same as above Error occurred which is not supported by the software Memory Diagnostics 5 Day Low Battery Estimated battery life is 1 Associated rack monitor Replace battery Warning less than 5 days block s RACK OK pin is turned off ASYS block s HW OK pin is turned off Battery voltage is low Associated rack Replace battery monitor block s RACK OK pin is turned off ASYS block s LOW BATTERY pin is turned on ASYS block s HW OK pin is turned off Flash failed to burn Associated rack Force a cold start monitor block s RACK Replace CPU board OK pin is turned off ASYS block s HW OK pin is turned off Low Battery Flash Error Real Time Clock Good 222 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications L Diagnostics Not Programmed RTC not programmed Time and date is setto Program RTC 00 00 00 January 1 1970 2 Associated rack monitor block s RACK OK pin is turned off ASYS block s HW OK
211. iated rack monitor block s RACK OK pin is turned off Associated rack monitor block s HITEMP pin is turned on ASYS block s HITEMP pin is turned on ASYS block s HW OK pin is turned off HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Diagnostics I O Module Diagnostics Status Indications Parameter Value Possible Cause Controller Action Message Requires unit shutdown Replace Redundant Power Backplane Requires unit shutdown Replace rack backplane Requires unit shutdown Replace Scanner2 N A Improve ventilation to rack Replace Al module 231 Diagnostics I O Module Diagnostics Status Indications The module does not agree with the module required for the control scenario Wrong Module Module No Comm Main CPU is unable to communicate to the module for one of the following reasons Module is not installed The module cannot communicate with the controller CPU or the expansion rack CPU because of a backplane problem Module is on an expansion rack and the expansion rack communications are failing Associated blocks set their fail pin on their warn pin off and their output pin to the failsafe value Associated blocks set their IO status to Channel No Comm Associated rack monitor block s module fail pin is turned on Associated rack monitor block s RACK OK pin is turned off ASYS block s HW OK pin is turned off See Wrong Module Bad Mo
212. ics Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 43 September 2013 File Management How to Add Worksheet Protection File Properties Statistics Config Hemon 38 39 61 61 2097152 Dynamic kemo O44 99 56 1500000 User Function blocks Block s gt 100 5 4995 FOOU Loop blocks i i SF programmer blacks SP scheduler blocks Sequencer blacks Hand Off Auto blocks Device Control blocks Pos Prop Out blocks Stage blocks Ramp blocks Alternator blocks Peer blocks a2 dz m dm mam dom Io A mn G m G ma G m A a G m G a D Cycle Time 0 51 seconds CPU 2 used i O0 Fast Cycle Time 0 03 seconds Fast CPU used 0 00 Based on Memory Limits Shows usages and capacities for all items in the configuration Asterisk indicates there is no specific limit for this item its limit is determined by available memory Cycle Time and Fast Cycle Time increase slow down as the following increase CPU Used Fast CPU Used Dynamic Memory Config Memory Also extensive use of Free Form Logic blocks as opposed to equivalent gate logic can substantially increase Fast Cycle Time Be aware that deleted function blocks consume memory this memory can be made available by defragmenting Read Protection Indicates current protection If file is unprotected click on Protect File to allow new password entry or change current password Worksheet Protection Indicates current protection If worksheet is unp
213. ics parameter in the Expansion I O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box 288 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide See the Rack Comm Diagnostics parameter in the Expansion VO Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box See the Rack Comm Diagnostics parameter in the Expansion O Comm Diagnosti mm dialog box See the Rack Comm Diagnostics parameter in the Expansion mm Diagnosti mm dialog box Revision 15 September 2013 Index Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators index A Create edit Data Storage File 83 Create edit Recipe Variables File 164 Accessing Port Diagnostics 221 Create edit Schedule file 171 Adding a Numeric Constant 115 Create edit Sequence File 176 Adding a Variable 114 Create edit Setpoint Profile File 167 Adding function block parameters to custom Custom Modbus Map 250 map 255 Cut 20 28 89 Adding system parameters to custom map 258 Alarm Details 69 101 D Alarm Group Configuration 100 Data Storage Configuration 83 Alarm Event Storage Configuration 87 Data Storage Configuration Access 83 and 125 Data Storage Conventions 77 Auto Calibration Procedure 149 Data Storage Enable Conditions 79 B Data Storage File 83 Data Storage Overview 77 Backup Controller Information 141 Data Storage Utility 140 Batch File Management 160 Default Annotation Attributes 125 Before you Start 109 Changing 125 Diagnostics C configuration port 222 223 Calibrate Al Channel 146 controller 205 207 Calibrate AO Ch
214. ific Recipe type for specifics New Data Storage Select the Data Storage tab On the tab click on a radio button to create a new Data Storage File Open Toolbar Shortcut CTRL O Displays the Open dialog box From the Files of Type drop down menu select a file type Hybrid Control Designer Configuration cde Hybrid Control Designer Configuration cde All Hybrid Control Designer Files Recipes rcp Profiles prf Schedules sch Sequences seq Data Storage dss HC Controller Backup File chk UMCS00 Version 5 0 Files fod Navigate to folder where the file is stored Click on the desired file name then click OPEN Opens files and converts UMC800 FBD configuration files Close Closes the active document window It will also close a minimized window if active It will not close an active dialog box Save Saves the active configuration First time save displays the Save As dialog box Toolbar Shortcut CTRL S Save As Displays the Save As dialog box Prompts user to name the active configuration and select the file in which the file is to be stored Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 19 September 2013 User Interface File Menu Menu Selection Function O O Download Configuration Download transfers a saved configuration FROM the PC TO the controller The Controller may be in either RUN or PROGRAM mode Upload
215. igner User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications C70R Diagnostic Overview parameters System Diagnostics Good Controller is in RUN Executes the run mode None mode Outputs are updated Rack n Rack n is reporting a Diagnostic may causea Refer to the Rack Diagnostics diagnostic failover for more details Diagnostic may prevent a failover Multiple Racks More than one Rack is Diagnostic may causea Refer to the Rack Diagnostics reporting a diagnostic failover for more details Diagnostic may prevent a failover Lead CPU The Lead CPU is None Refer to the Lead CPU reporting a diagnostic Diagnostics for more details Reserve CPU The Reserve CPU is None Refer to the Reserve CPU reporting a diagnostic Diagnostic for more details Serial Port S1 or S2 There is a diagnostic on None Refer to the Serial Port S1 or the Lead CPU Serial Serial Port S2 Diagnostic Port S1 or S2 Screen for more details Network E1 or E2 There is a diagnostic on None Refer to the Network Port the Lead CPU Network Diagnostic Screen for more Port E1 or E2 details Scanner Link Lead CPU is reporting a None Refer to the Lead CPU diagnostic on the Diagnostic and the Scanner Scanner Link Link Diagnostic screens for more details Redundancy Link Lead CPU is reporting a None Refer to the Lead and diagnostic on the Reserve CPU Diagnostic Redundancy Link screens for more details There is a prob
216. ile or the entire program may be repeated up to 100 times or indefinitely as specified in the program Cycles count value Engineering You must assign a descriptor consisting of up to 4 keyboard characters for the engineering units Units that the setpoint value represents For example GPM for gallons per minute NPS for number per second RPM for revolutions per minute and DEGF for degrees Fahrenheit Guaranteed Limits High and Low above and below the Setpoint value can be configured in selected Hold Soak engineering units If the PV is outside of configured limits just prior to entering the Soak segment Limits the soak timer will not be permitted to start It will start when the PV is within the High and Low limits Once the soak timer has started and then the PV goes out side of configured limits the soak timer will halt It will remain halted until the PV is again within the configured limits A Guaranteed Hold High or Low limit setting of 0 00 is equal to no limit at all Number of Segments are timed ramp and soak subdivisions of a setpoint program Consecutive ramps and Segments soaks are allowed The last segment must be a soak Power Loss A recovery ramp rate value is provided in the event of a power loss while a program is running The ramp rate value is used to return the process to the last operating setpoint prior to power loss A power OFF digital input and separate timing block will abort the running program if power loss has bee
217. ill proceed using the selected file Revision 15 September 2013 File Management File Properties could result in damage to the scanner card s An incomplete code download has been A previous code download was aborted or failed Code download detected Code download will proceed will proceed using the selected file using the selected file No scanner racks detected Most likely cause is no expansion racks connected to the main controller It can also be caused by a failed scanner card Ifa scanner is properly connected to the controller and this message is displayed replace the scanner card Rack 1 SUCCESS Rack 2 FAILED Completion report for scanner code download There should be a SUCCESS status for each card connected to the main controller rack A FAILED status could be caused by a communications problem between the main controller rack and the scanner racks or by a failed scanner card Restart code download again File Properties Lets you fill in the title and author of the file as well as view the file statistics Number of Blocks Inputs and other items From the Designer Window File menu select Properties Or in the File Browser Window right click on an open configuration The File Properties dialog box will appear Select a tab General Enter Title and Author Read only Path and file name Date created and Last Modified Schema Device information CPU type Revision number Statist
218. in all configured racks Toolbar The Controller Worksheet has a Toolbar to launch dialog boxes to configure Print Worksheet Prints the I O Summary as viewed on the worksheet Controller Identification Enter a controller name It will be displayed on the Operator Interface used for Peer Communications 16 characters Controller E Mail Notification Unlock Worksheets I O Summary A summary of each addressed I O point as well as unassigned I O points in the configuration indicates Rack Module Channel Block ID a hot link when clicked finds the I O block on the Function Block Diagram Engineering Units and Al Input range Signal Tag of primary output pin if present a hot link when clicked finds the signal tag on the Function Block Diagram Signal Descriptor of primary output pin if present This assignment summary is built and updated dynamically on the worksheet body It can be printed from the toolbar Icon 60 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Controller Worksheet Controller Configuration Toolbar Controller Configuration Toolbar Click on ICON to open a dialog box Print Click to open the standard Print dialog box Worksheet Fill in appropriate fields Printed Output is the I O Summary as viewed on the worksheet To display each page as it will look when printed click Print Report Preview on the File menu Controller Click to open the Controller Identification dialog box Identi
219. ind dialog box Lets you locate any and all places where the page connector is used Cut Cuts the page connector so you can reconnect paste it to a different unconnected pin of the same type digital or analog Can reconnect to a different function block Item is grayed out indicating the cut Press Esc to cancel Delete Deletes the page connector Add to Modbus Registers Properties Click On FB Diagram White Space Cut Copy Paste Drop Other Items Execution Order Fast Logic Order Find Go To View displays the view menu Properties File 30 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 User Interface Keyboard Navigation Keyboard Navigation PAGE UP Go to the previous worksheet page Other keyboard functions If necessary you can use the standard keystroke conventions to move around ALT used together with the underlined letter in text labeling an object lets you select that object TAB select next field or object in dialog boxes and configuration templates SHIFT TAB select previous field or object in dialog boxes and configuration templates UP ARROW previous choice in the field DOWN ARROW next choice in the field ALT DOWN ARROW opens a drop down list box Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 31 September 2013 User Interface Keyboard Navigation 32 This page has been intentionally left blank HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 Se
220. ion COOKIES actively loaded and running in your controller s function blocks This example applies to all recipe types recipe variables schedules sequences profiles 168 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Recipes Recipes Menu Recipe file types After creating a recipe or editing one in the recipe pool you can save a recipe to disk using the following extensions assigned automatically Recipe variables RCP Set Point Profile PRF Set Point Schedule SCH Sequence SEQ When part of a configuration s recipe pool a recipe is not saved as a separate file but is saved in a slot in the pool as part of the configuration CDE Any recipe can be accessed in the configuration s recipe pools and saved as its own recipe file if desired Recipes Menu Accesses all recipe pools To learn about the different recipe types read Recipe Overview enu selection Fmt Allocate Recipe Memory Allocates the controller s memory for the four recipe types This is the number of recipes that can be stored in the controller s four recipe pools Recipes in these pools can be loaded and run by Recipe Selection Blocks Programmers Schedulers and Sequencers As recipe memory usage increases less memory is available for other parts of your configuration such as function blocks Recipes Variables A recipe variables is a list of Variables with settings that define the ingredients needed to make a p
221. ion Mismatch Database Not Synchronized Invalid Configuration Firmware Version Mismatch Neither CPU has a valid configuration database The reserve controller does not have the same version of controller firmware installed Hardware failure on the reserve CPU Hardware failure on the lead CPU Hardware failure on the CPU rack backplane Neither CPU has a valid configuration database The reserve controller does not have the same version of controller firmware installed Redundancy Link Status Indicators The Redundancy Link Diagnostics dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the following list Parameter Redundancy Link Port Status An empty database is created The lead controller will continue to control the process but failover is not possible The lead controller will continue to control the process but failover is not possible An empty database is created The lead controller will continue to control the process but failover is not possible Feo Download the desired configuration file and perform a cold start Upgrade the CPU firmware so both the lead and reserve have the same version Replace the reserve CPU Replace the lead CPU Replace the CPU rack backplane Contact Honeywell service Download the desired configuration file and perform a cold start Upgrade the CPU firmware so both the lead and reserve have the same version
222. ion CPU displayed in the file list box Select the Port and Address on the Download File dialog box Click on the Start button in the Download File dialog box The download will start and progress is displayed The download itself will take a few minutes depending on the Port type and connection A Download Succeeded status will be displayed in the Download File dialog box If a failure is detected an error message will appear in the Status section of the Download File dialog box See Error Messages for a list of possible messages and resolutions Also see Eailure Modes Scanner Module From the Controller Utilities Functions select Download to Controller BIEI On the sub menu select Controller Firmware then Scanner Module Use the Look in drop down list in the Open dialog box to select the drive and folder you placed the files in Select and open the file Version SCN displayed in the file list box OB Select the Port and Address on the Download File dialog box Click on the Start button in the Download File dialog box The download will start and progress is displayed The download itself will take a few minutes depending on the Port type and connection A Download Succeeded status will be displayed in the Download File dialog box If a failure is detected an error message will appear in the Status section of the Download File dialog box See Error Messages for a li
223. is Sequence Control The need to control a sequence of operation is a very common control requirement in industrial equipment today Sequence control can be a very rigid series of inter related events used to start up or shut down a unit process or it can be a series of timed and process measurement dependent events that are executed to produce a final product Sequences can be very simple with only timed or cascaded events that occur regardless of process feedback or they can be very complex with multiple nested default sequences programmed to occur only if process feedback indicates a need to take alternate actions When sequence control is used to produce final product sequence variations are often required to allow the same equipment to be used to produce multiple types of product In these applications the sequence is often partitioned into logical units to allow operators and supervisors to monitor the progress of the process using familiar terminology Heat up cool down filling venting mixing and other similar terms are often used to describe the particular phase the control equipment is executing Variations in the product being processed can require changes to the sequence where particular phases are bypassed duplicated or executed in an alternate manner When all of these requirements are combined in a single control specification developing a suitable control strategy can be a demanding and sophisticated endeavor Sequence Configura
224. ismatch between the PC s serial port type and the controller s serial port type If this behavior occurs make sure that the DIP switches on the controller s CPU card are set correctly The legacy controller factory settings are RS232 for Serial Port S1 and RS485 for Serial Port S2 COM I Enable Port 3 The Serial CommPort Button will now show an icon indicating that the port has been set up Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 53 September 2013 PC Comm Ports and Connections PC Serial Com Port Setup 4 For Advanced Network Setup click on the Advanced Network Setup MORE gt gt button at the bottom of the Serial 7 Comm Port Properties dialog box Number of Retries before Abort Enter a Rety Delay 10 rs decimal value yer Ti t 5 F t Retry Delay Enter a value in milliseconds imeout f1 500 i ese Timeout Enter a value in milliseconds Retries Note It is not recommended that you set the values lower than those shown in the dialog box since it may cause some communications operations to fail Press Reset button to reset these fields to their default values Setting Up a Serial Comm Port with a Modem 1 Modems must be Installed in MS Windows 2 Click on the Serial Comm Port Setup button 3 The Serial Comm Port Properties Seral Comm Port Properties Dialog Box will Open Click the Enable Port box COM M Enable Port There is NO Baud selection because Mod
225. isplay button Refer to Display Button Configuration Configuration hg on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Display Tag Group Configuration dialog box Select one of the tabs one for each group located across the top of the dialog box Click on tab below to access the configuration procedure for the specific tab Alarm Panel Meter Trend Bar Overview angle Point ha ulti Point Alarms Display Tag Group The Alarm Display Tag Group configuration tab provides a drop list of Alarm groups You can configure 20 Alarm Groups of 12 alarm points each Each group contains a set of selected digital signal tags An Alarm may be any Digital Signal Tag There are up to 240 alarm points available Each alarm point can be configured to generate an E mail notification Select the Alarm tab then Select Display Group from the drop down menu Digital signals will be displayed in the Selected Tags List field You can also select Alarms from the EDIT menu on the Main Menus the FBD Worksheet toolbar button Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 67 September 2013 Display Worksheet Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups when you do not have an Ol and do not need to use Alarm Group logic in the control strategy the FBD Worksheet by dropping an ALMGR block onto the configuration and either double clicking on the block or right clicking on the block and selecting the properties menu item on the c
226. isplay or edit The map takes a few seconds to build the contents Default partitions are based on the fixed map and can be edited or resized See Edit Partitions Currently displayed partition Name of the current partition See Select a partition Show Register Address as Select whether to display addresses in hexadecimal or decimal ltem Filter Select the type of item block signal tag etc whose parameters you want o assign to the map ee of this type will then be listed as choices under the Item column For example if you select Loops then all your configuration s loop blocks will be listed under the Item column when you click there 272 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Modbus Register Addresses Custom Modbus Map rete O foon 5 Item Click on any address under the Item column All items of the Item Filter type will be listed If no items of the filter type are in your configuration the list will be empty Click the item you want to add to the address If you are adding a function block it will display a checklist of parameters from which to choose Click here for details If you are adding system parameters you must add them by clicking an address they can t be dragged from the Configuration tab Parameter Name If the item is a function block this is the parameter name Click on this field to see a list of that item s other parameters from which to choose if reassig
227. ital or input versus output The list of available sub types is determined by the data group selected through the tab control Information about each item in the filtered list is displayed in the table in the middle of the window The amount of information displayed will vary based on the selected tab but will always include a current value from the controller The rows of data may be sorted by clicking in the header for most of the configuration information columns Subsequent clicking within a column header will toggle between ascending and descending sort orders See also Sort Feature For SlL compliant controller types the rows of data will be colored coded Items located on a Safety worksheet will be displayed with a yellow background whereas items located on a Process worksheet will be displayed on a white background Docking and Undocking the Window Double clicking in the Title Bar area of the Watch Summary Window will toggle its docked state If the window is docked double clicking in the title bar area will undock the window If the window is undocked e Double clicking in the title bar area will dock the window at it last docked position e Dragging the window to the top bottom left or right edge of the main viewing area of the application will dock the window at that location Press and hold the CTRL key down to prevent Docking when moving the window Hot Links You can click on any I O function block or Signal on the Contr
228. ition has been captured The status will change to indicate that the motor is currently undergoing speed calibration The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor The progress bar will indicate progress Time Remaining for this step The status will change to indicate that the PPO Calibration has been saved A message box appears indicating that the calibration is complete Three choices will also appear Select one Revision 15 September 2013 Press F2 to Position Motor at 0 Press F3 to Position Motor at 100 Press F4 to Leave Motor at Current Position HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 157 Utilities Worksheet PPO Block Calibration Semi Auto Calibration Procedure Controller automatically positions the motor and the user captures the positions NOTE Put the controller in Offline or Program mode in order to perform calibration 1 Select the Utilities tab at the bottom of the Main Window S Utilities 2 Under the Controller Utility Functions select the Calibrate Controller icon E The Calibrate dialog box will open Select the PPO Block tab at the top of the dialog box In the Calibration Block field drop down the list of PPO blocks and select one Under Calibration Mode select the SEMI AUTO radio button Under Calibration Procedure press Start The Start button is disabled and the Status indication at the top of the dialog box will change to indicate th
229. k s secondary inputs and outputs 6 Block outputs can be labeled with a Signal Tag Name Right click on the Output pin to drop a signal tag symbol Signal point names are used to display value state of block output signals on operator displays 7 Many blocks have configuration parameters to tailor operation to control requirements at hand 8 Outputs exit block as straight lines from bottom or right hand side Outputs can be connected to any number of control block inputs but they cannot be connected to an output of another block a named variable ore a constant Note that unused outputs can be left unconnected 9 Inputs enter block as arrows from top or left hand side Inputs can be from An output of another block soft wire A named variable values that can be changed from the Operator Interface max 150 Right click on Input pin to drop a variable A connecior that references a signal tag or page connector Right click on Input pin to drop a connector A constant that references a signal tag Right click on Input pin to drop a constant Note that unconnected inputs will default to 0 or OFF 10 There is a visual distinction between analog and digital pins Analog Inputs and Outputs are indicated by a solid pin and Digital Inputs and Outputs are indicated by a hollow pin 11 A Digital pin without the symbol indicates it is level sensitive The pin is ON when its source signal is ON OFF when source signal is OFF A digital pin
230. k then select Monitor Block The Monitor Block dialog box will open Monitor 41725 write ja Unfarce Block status Forced output Calibration Status Factory Calibration Date Fu Channel Sensor Status Forced DISABLE OFF Filter Time sec 0 000 0 000 Failsafe value 0 000 ON WARNING OFF 0 000 FORCED Disabled Channel Output Value 0 000 Click on the forced output indicated by FORCED Click Unforce The original selection for the parameter will return Forced Blocks Window Overview The Forced Blocks window provides a list view of all function blocks that have forced outputs and provides a quick means of removing the forced outputs on selected block The Forcing and Unforcing of function block outputs is a feature that is only available in Monitor Mode For more information on how to force function block outputs see Forcing Unforcing an Output Opening the Window 198 The Forced Blocks Window is represented by the Exclamation Mark icon and can be accessed in 3 ways as described below For each method the system must already be in Monitor Mode for the option to be available Monitor Menu 4 Select Monitor from the main application menu 5 Select Forced Blocks to launch the Forced Blocks window Monitor Mode Toolbar 1 Click on the EI button in the Monitor Mode Toolbar from the main application toolbar Utilities Worksheet 1 Select the is Utilities tab from the main Worksheet Ca
231. keyboard functions If necessary you can use the standard keystroke conventions to move around ALT used together with the underlined letter in text labeling an object lets you select that object TAB select next field or object in dialog boxes and configuration templates SHIFT TAB select previous field or object in dialog boxes and configuration templates UP ARROW previous choice in the field DOWN ARROW next choice in the field ALT DOWN ARROW opens a drop down list box Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 95 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Traceback Window Traceback Window Overview This feature helps you find problems with soft wire and signal connections between Function Blocks For Example If you are testing a configuration that you ve built and want to know why a Digital Output is ON when it should be OFF you can search for the source of the Input Signal Traceback is useful for finding the analog or digital source signal Trace Window Access the Trace Window from the Main Menu Toolbar Or from the View Menu on the main menu Trace Back List SP51049 5F5105 S 2 setpoint 5F5109 5F5109 setpoirits PID113 LOOF 1 Loops It is a dockable sizeable window The Trace Window provides a list of all blocks pins you have traced and lists Block ID Tag Name I O Pin Name Worksheet name Trace Window Update Each time you perform a Trace the window will update wit
232. l Recipe Pool Introduction This is the recipe variables pool The Recipe Pool lets you add or delete a Recipe on a list of configured Recipes and also enter the Properties function and the Edit Recipe function to set up each recipe Configuration When you select Recipes Variables from the Recipes menu the Recipe Pool dialog box will be displayed From left to right the icons are x Feller Bae as E a Tal ADD a Recipe Put cursor on an empty pool line and select the NEW Icon The Recipe Properties dialog box will open EDIT the Properties of an Existing Profile Select the Worksheet Properties Icon The Recipe properties dialog box will open EDIT a Recipe Select the Edit Recipe Icon The Edit Recipe dialog box will appear COPY and PASTE Select a recipe from the pool window then select the Copy Icon Select another location in the pool window then select the Paste Icon The copied recipe will be inserted into the location selected DELETE a Recipe Click on a recipe name and then click on the Delete icon PRINT a Recipe Click on a recipe name and then select the Print icon The Print dialog box will appear Select OK A recipe report will be printed with all the information entered on the Recipe Properties dialog box Variable Description Value or State SAVE a Recipe To save a recipe as a rcp file click on a recipe name and then select the Save icon The Save As dialog box will app
233. l Designer User Guide 203 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Logic Flow Displaying Function Block s Pin Values Function Block pin value s can be monitored briefly and you can set one or all of the values on display constant display until you dismiss them Analog Values are in decimal format and Digital States are On Off Displaying a Single Pin Value 010101 Displaying Briefly Hover the cursor over any pin momentarily The pin s value will be displayed next to the pin as long as the cursor remains motionless over the pin To remove the briefly displayed value remove the cursor from the pin Displaying Until Dismissed Constant Display Hover the cursor over any pin and left click while the pin value is displayed or right click and select Monitor Pins from the menu To remove the constantly displayed value left click on the pin again or right click and select Monitor Pins again from the menu Displaying All Function Block Pin Values Displaying Briefly Hover the cursor over the interior of a function block momentarily All of the Function Blocks pin values will be displayed next to the pins as long as the cursor remains motionless over the block To remove the briefly displayed values remove the cursor from the block Displaying Until Dismissed Hover the cursor over the interior of a function block and left click while the pin values are displayed or right click and select Monitor Pins from the menu To
234. l when the register data is written to the slave device Instead they control the value that is written to the block For example if a Modbus function block has the value 10 on its Write pin and the Enable pin is ON then a value of 10 is written to the slave device If the Enable pin is changed to OFF the HC900 controller will continue to write a value of 10 to the slave device once every Modbus Master scan cycle If the value on the Write pin is changed to 100 while the Enable pin is OFF the controller will continue to write a value of 10 to the slave device The next time the Enable pin is changed to ON the controller will write the value 100 to the slave device 3 Modbus Register write operations are performed using Modbus Function Code 16 Preset Multiple Write The number of registers written in a single transaction is based on the Advanced Setup settings for the serial port HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Modbus RTU Master Advanced Setup 4 If there are gaps in the Modbus register addresses referenced within the HC900 configuration the controller will write a value of zero to the undefined registers For example if Modbus Registers 1 and 10 are assigned to Modbus function blocks but Registers 2 through 9 are not the controller will write zeroes to Registers 2 through 9 The Advanced protocol can be used in any Modbus Master application that can accommodate th
235. ld and select a GHOLD Type from Drop down menu OFF No Guaranteed Hold HIGH setpoint deviation The schedule will hold if a PV deviates above the Setpoint value set LOW setpoint deviation The schedule will hold if a PV deviates below the Setpoint value set on the Setpoint Schedule Properties dialog box HIGH and LOW setpoint deviations The schedule will hold if a PV deviates above or below the Setpoint value set on the Setpoint Schedule Properties dialog box Recycle Segment The segment number at which a recycle will start Enter a value 0 to 50 Recycle Count This number lets the schedule repeat loop a specified number of times Enter a value 0 999 or 0 for infinite Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 179 September 2013 Setpoint Schedules Setpoint Schedule Pool Step Item Action Description Deletes selected item from schedule Pini the schedule Saves the schedule as SCH file Download Downloads schedule to the controller s schedule pool where it can be edited or loaded into the controller s active configuration Setpoint Schedule Pool Introduction The SP Schedule Pool lets you add or delete a schedule on a list of configured schedules Through this dialog box you will set the properties for each schedule and then set up or edit the information for each segment that make up a schedule Configuration When you select Setpoint Schedules from the Recipe menu the
236. left is the same as under Details Comm quality right NONE Slave communications are disabled BAD Errors are occurring in the communications Possible causes to check for Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 251 September 2013 Diagnostics Modbus Initiator TCP Port Diagnostics Physical link might be bad Slave device might be off No slave device found at the selected Modbus IP Address Slave device set to the wrong baud rate Port scanning To enable disable port scanning for a slave device 1 Click a Modbus slave device in the slave device window Slave details will appear at left 2 Click on the Enable Disable button at the bottom right to enable disable the port scanning of that slave device 252 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Modbus Initiator TCP Port Diagnostics This page has been intentionally left blank Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 253 September 2013 Reports Print Report Print Report Select Print Report from the File menu If you selected from the Custom Modbus Map toolbar it will print the currently displayed partition Print Report lets you print a report for various functions Click on the Icon on the toolbar and select a report from the drop down menu that appears The Print dialog box will open to let you print a specific report You can also print a report from Print Report Preview
237. lem with Check the Redundancy Link the communications Diagnostic screen for more between the Lead and details Reserve CPUs Memory Diagnostic See CPU Diagnostic for possible values Real Time Clock See CPU Diagnostic Diagnostic for possible values Communication See CPU Diagnostic Port Diagnostics for possible values Rack IO See CPU Diagnostic Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 225 U fe te 3 D Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications Rack a See CPU Diagnostic nostic for possible values Power a See CPU Diagnostic nostic for possible values a Available There is a Reserve CPU Available for failover l 1 No Reserve CPU is System will not be able to 1 Check that Reserve available perform a failover CPU is powered ON Reserve CPU may lf powered ON check be powered off the Reserve status LED _ Reserve CPU is on the Reserve CPU powered on but and the RSM Module synchronizing with Check Reserve CPU the Lead CPU Diagnostics for i There may be other additional details physical problems with the Reserve CPU Redundancy Link Diagnostics Data Link Failure 1 No Reserve CPUis System will not be ableto 1 Check that Reserve CPU available perform a failover IS powered ON 2 Reserve CPU may be 2 If powered ON check the powered off Reserve status LED on 3 Reserve CPU is the Reserve CPU and powered on but the RSM Module synchronizing with 3
238. les Select a Set Shows contents of the selected Setpoint Profile No Point Profile Select a Set Shows contents of the selected Setpoint Schedule No Point Schedule Select a Shows contents of the selected Sequence No Sequence Selecting any of the 4 report options noted above brings up a selection dialog similar to the one below that allows one of the available Variables Set Point Profile Set Point Schedule or Set Point Sequences to be selected from a pool for printing Clicking on the Print button completes the report printing Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 259 September 2013 Reports Print Report Alarms amp Events Reports Clicking on the Alarms amp Events button provides a drop down menu which allows the selection of 2 reports related to displays as shown below Print Repo Select a report category to print Report Description SIL Filtering Alarm Groups Shows contents of each Operator Interface alarm group Yes display Events Shows all configured events and their triggers Yes See Also Reports Overview Print Report Preview Export Report 260 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Reports Print Report Preview Print Report Preview Report Categories The Print Report Preview function provides a means of previewing reports before they are printed As such the reports available for previewing is essentially the same as those available in th
239. ll Function Block Modbus Addresses Modbus Partition Registers Report Partition Name All Modbus Registers Report Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 263 September 2013 Reports Export Report This page has been intentionally left blank 264 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Modbus Register Addresses Modbus Map Overview Modbus Register Addresses Modbus Map Overview Overview Modbus addressing is available in revision 2 0 and later In your controller s configuration certain parameters are each automatically assigned a Modbus address These include certain types of function blocks such as loops and set point programmers signals and variables among other items Through their addresses these parameters can be accessed or displayed remotely such as by a third party operator interface Collectively these Modbus addresses and parameters are known as the Modbus map You can use a predefined fixed map where common parameters are mapped out automatically at fixed addresses or you can create a custom map for configurations rev 4 0 or higher Click here for details on fixed vs custom map Configure Modbus Map Method Overview Lets you select your preferred Modbus mapping method fixed or custom Access 1 Edit menu 2 Configure Modbus Map Method Caution If you change from custom map to fixed map you will lose all custom addresses partitions and quantities not found in t
240. ll write zeroes to Registers 2 and 9 Restore Default Settings This button allows you to restore the original default settings for the Advanced Setup parameters Note you must click the Set button on the Set Protocol dialog to activate any changes that are made on this dialog Calibrate Controller See page 153 Set Controller Mode Set Controller Mode lets you set the controller mode It can only be set when the controller s mode switch is in the center Run Mode position ATTENTION If the controller s mode switch is in one of the Locked positions the mode cannot be changed from this position It can be changed only by changing the position of the switch opens the Set Controller Mode dialog box Follow the steps on the dialog box 1 Select anew mode RUN PROGRAM or OFFLINE 2 Write the new mode to the controller Press Set New Mode button Program to Run takes some time An Indicator on the dialog box shows the progress Set Controller Network Parameters IP Hi opens the Controller Identification Setup Wizard dialog box You can select a serial port or the Ethernet port over which the network parameters will be read written The controller must be in PROGRAM mode to set the Network Parameters There are set up options on the wizard The option you choose depends on how you are connected to a controller and what current knowledge you have of that controller Important before configuring your controller to work on a
241. loaded configuration except that in addition to the configuration the port settings are saved Versions 4 1 and up save time settings time zone DST NTS IP addresses You are prompted to specify the comm link settings for the controller to be backed up Backup files are read only to edit you must save as cde Save As P x Save it E Furnace Configurations d E cE Ei File name HCS00ControllerB ackup Save a type JHC Controller Backup File chk Cancel Le Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 149 Utilities Worksheet Restore Controller Information Restore Controller Information This button is visible for currently open backup files cbk Choices Back Up Controller Restore Controller Same as doing a download to controller except port settings are also downloaded Controller must be in Program Lock Mode View Port Settings Shows all port settings in the backup file Serial S1 Serial S2 ports Back Up Controller Information X sernal 5 Serial S2 General Properties Network E1 Network E2 f Honeywell ELN E Modbue ATU Master M hodbus HTU Slave Slave Type Slave Address Modbus Slave Double Register Format Fort Enable Enabled FF E Big Endian 4 3 2 1 Speed bpa 38400 Modbus Parity none Modbus Stop Bits i 150 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Utilitie
242. log box Allows you to Set up or Edit Events Also available from the Process or Safety worksheet toolbar 22 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 User Interface View Menu Configure Modbus Map Type Available for configuration revision 4 0 or higher Selects a method for configuring the Modbus register map fixed or custom See Configure Modbus Map Method Modbus Register Map Available for configuration revision 2 0 or higher Lets you Edit Fixed Modbus Register Addresses dialog box Trend Backfill Log Point Available for configuration revision 4 4 or higher Lets you select method for Selection configuring points to be saved in the trend history buffer either via signal tag name or Modbus address Defragment Function Block Frees up memory occupied by previously deleted function blocks After List defragmentation is complete downloading the configuration to the controller requires a cold start When configuration memory is 100 full but includes fragmented space from deleted blocks the defragment window appears automatically To avoid untimely cold starts we recommended you defragment before configuration memory is full See Statistics Find Searches for an item on the Find Item dialog box Select an item type from the Shortcut CTRL F Show drop down menu to search then select an Item from the Item drop down menu The Tag Variable or Function Block will be highlighted on the Func
243. long as you understand they are all recipes in the broader sense A recipe needs a configuration for context A recipe by itself is useless it must be associated with a specific controller configuration to give it context Therefore when creating or opening a recipe you must specify by name which configuration the recipe applies to Set Point Profiles are excluded from this requirement Recipe type How linked to configuration Not linked to configuration Compatibility It is up to you to understand how your recipes will work with your configurations For example when you download a recipe variables rcp to a controller the recipe s variables sequential order and their values might make sense in one controller configuration but not another Recipe locations Once created a recipe can reside in several places Be aware that having multiple copies of a recipe can cause mixups For example suppose you ve created a recipe any type called COOKIES It can reside in the following places COOKIES saved as a separate recipe file to disk or floppy Recipe files can be added to a recipe pool See Recipe file types COOKIES in the recipe pool of a configuration saved to disk as a CDE file COOKIES in the recipe pool of a currently open configuration in the software See Recipes menu COOKIES in the recipe pool of your controller s running configuration Here it is available to be loaded into the controller s function block configurat
244. m The Variable symbol will appear on the Function Block Diagram for configuration Analog Variable VAROO 1 Ya Double click on the symbol to open its properties dialog box Enter Name and Descriptor Decimal Places 1 5 Engineering Units Decimal Places Initial Value Also displayed is the item s default Modbus address and data type followed by any user defined addresses Analog Variable Properties Variable 38 x e BATCH sl Modbus Addresses and Data Types 6411 01904 float 32 Descrint BATCH Select 45057 08000 unsigned 16 jii 45107 0 8032 unsigned 16 Units Decimal Places p m Initial Value fo l Cancel Digital Variable VAROOTD yo Double click on the symbol to open its properties dialog box Enter Tag Name and Descriptor Off Label On Label Initial Value Off or ON Also displayed is the item s default Modbus address and data type followed by any user defined addresses 122 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Adding a Numeric Constant Digital Variable Properties Variable 5 Modbus Addresses and Data Types Variable ALARM EN 6345 021808 float 32 Descriptor 45058 06001 unsigned 16 45065 0E 008 un igned 16 Initial value OFF label OFF OFF On label g DN Cancel Adding a Numeric Constant Procedure Right click on an Input pin and select Drop Constant
245. mation The stuffing order of the bytes into the two registers differs among Modbus hosts To provide compatibility the Double register format is configurable Selections are FPB Floating Point Big Endian Format Byte order 4 3 2 1 Default FP LB Floating Point Little Endian with byte swapped Byte order 2 1 4 3 FP BB Floating Point Big Endian with byte swapped Byte order 3 4 1 2 FP L Floating Point Little Endian Format Byte order 1 2 3 4 Port Enable Enables or disables port Speed bps Select Baud rate All slaves on the same PC port must be the same Modbus parity Odd or even All slaves must be the same Modbus stop bits 1 or 2 All slaves must be the same Set Activates settings If you changed the controller s Baud Rate via a PC RS232 Comm Port your PC will no longer communicate with the controller In this case you are prompted to detect the controller s Baud Rate This feature will synchronize the PC s Comm Port with the controller and set the PC Baud Rate to the correct Baud Rate Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 139 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Modbus RTU Master Advanced Setup Modbus RTU Master Advanced Setup Advanced Setup for Serial Port 1 Timeout Slave Reply Timeout milliseconds 10 Maximurn number of Modbus registers per transaction Read Coil Registers Function Code 1 Read Digital Input Registers Function Code 2 Read Holding Registers Func
246. mation about that topic If the information about a topic exceeds the height of the window a vertical scrollbar will be displayed Selecting the Index tab lets you type in the first few letters of the word you are looking for Selecting the Find tab lets you search for specific words and phrases in Help topics instead of searching for information by category About Help Displays copyright and software version and user name and company name entered during software s installation ADDITIONAL HELP ACCESS Right click Help for Help Topics Right click on any Function Block to access topic help for that particular Block Hotspots When the cursor is over a hotspot area on an image it turns to a hand indicating that when clicked some sort of action occurs 26 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 User Interface Main Toolbar Functions Main Toolbar Functions Click on ICON to open a dialog box Displays a Choose a New File Type dialog box with these tabs New Configuration Select the Configuration tab From the drop down menus select Controller and Revision Click OK and a new Designer Configuration file is listed in the Designer Browser and a new diagram is placed in the Main Window area New Recipes Select the Recipe tab On the tab click on a radio button to select one of the following Recipes Variables Setpoint Profile Setpoint Schedule Sequence Click OK The associated Edit
247. ment number at which a recycle will start Enter a value O to 50 Recycle Count This number lets the schedule repeat loop a Enter a value 0 999 specified number of times or 0 for infinite Events Segment events are digital switches that provide Select from the drop Events 1 thru 16 ON OFF output through an SPS function block down menu which events you want to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment Click on the box for each segment When a segment event is turned ON it remains on until the end of the segment at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the next segment A zero will change to 1 in the selected event position 182 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Setpoint Schedules Setpoint Schedule Properties Setpoint Schedule Properties Introduction This function lets you set the properties for the schedule selected in the Setpoint Schedule Pool If you are adding a schedule this dialog box will automatically appear It will also appear if you select the Worksheet Properties Icon 2nd from left from the Toolbar on the dialog box The information configured here will appear in the Edit Schedule Segment dialog box Configuration Refer to the table below and enter the properties information in the appropriate fields in the dialog box then click OK You will return to the Setpoint Schedule Pool dialog box Parameter Description E
248. module diagnostic is posted One of the cold junction sensors is failing to convert The temperature compensation for the thermocouple readings could have a slight error because only the good CJ is being used in the temperature calculation The AO block s input is greater than the block s configured high range value The AO block s input is less than the block s configured low range Disabled V Al channel is programmatically disabled Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 233 September 2013 Diagnostics I O Channel Sensor Status Channel Sensor Status Failed to convert j No Channel Available Over range Sensor amp Range type not available T C Failing T C Warning Channel type a ae a i alas a L L a 2 L L a meee A TTT HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 Possible Cause When attempting to take a reading Check the signal the analog to digital ADC fails level being applied to This can occur if the incoming the terminals signal is either too large or too small It also could result if the ADC circuit is failing If the problem is the ADC circuit most likely other channels will have the same failure A BAD CHANNEL I O module diagnostic is posted Replace module The point has been manually forced to its present value probably via a PC host There is no hardware on the I O module to support this
249. more serious will trigger an error message indicator elsewhere such as a I O Module Diagnostic Error or a flashing LED on the I O rack Here is an alphabetical list of possible statuses for each I O channel type Possible Cause Channel Sensor Channel type nn _ alho pipo reo resc 1fpo Fi ava CC 7 UL Burnout Failure CJ Failure CJ High Temperature CJ Warning Clamp High Clamp Low There are two possible causes for Check terminal this error connections 1 If the channel is an Analog Replace module Output There is no physical output device connected to this channel or the output device is showing an open connection 2 If the channel is a Pulse Output The channel is failing to output the correct value A BAD CHANNEL I O module diagnostic is posted The sensor T C RTD or mV Check terminal block source is failing burnout checks connections A BAD CHANNEL I O module i ic i Repl our diagnostic is posted eplace source element Replace module Two conditions can create this Improve ventilation failure to rack 1 Both cold junction sensors are Replace Al module failing to convert 2 The CJs are converting properly but their differential is greater than 10 degrees C In either case a HI CJ TEMP I O module diagnostic is posted One of the CJs is indicating a Improve ventilation temperature reading above 70 to rack CEES CATU TEUR Replace Al module
250. n Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Adding Moving Deleting Function Blocks to a FBD cee fo Develop the Operator Interface and Data Storage using the Display Worksheet Legacy controllers V 4 3 and older cee fo Oa omero SSS e omenen a f comoro ne sy Botons tor e Operar meae 4 tee St pad messae oss OO as se EE Notes You can initiate a print out of your control strategy whenever you want to assist you in configuring The above is a general approach to building a control strategy One of the benefits of this product is its flexibility and integration You can develop some I O Control Displays then download and repeat Adding Moving Deleting Function Blocks to a FBD Adding Drag and drop a function block symbol in the Worksheet Toolbox tree to the function block diagram The Function block will appear on the Function Block Diagram for configuration Selecting a drawing item To select a drawing item either click on it Shift Click to add an existing selection or capture it ina selection net Auto scrolling to select offscreen items Click and drag the mouse to the window s edges to automatically scroll to offscreen items 118 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Adding Moving Deleting Function Blocks to a FBD Manipulating a drawing item To form a selection net press the left mouse button on an empty area o
251. n OFF for more than a specified time period Program The term Program is used to identify the process for selecting and entering the individual ramp and soak segment data for a Setpoint Program function block SPP needed to generate a required setpoint versus time profile also called a program Program Name During configuration you must assign a name descriptive reference consisting of from 1 to 8 letters or numbers without spaces Thus a name can be a combination of letters and numbers Note that lowercase letters are automatically converted to uppercase Program This number is assigned when the software or the Operator Interface creates the profile The Number program number is assigned in the Setpoint Profile Pool and is shown on the Edit Setpoint Profile dialog box Ramp A ramp segment is a starting setpoint and the time or rate to reach the setpoint of the following Segments segment Typically segment 1 will be a ramp Ramp time is determined in either TIME Hours or Minutes Range 0 00 hr to 999 99 hr 0 00 min to 999 99 min OR RATE EU MIN or EU HR Range 0 to 999 99 This selection of time or rate is made when you configure properties Make this selection before entering any Ramp during Profile Edit NOTE When Ramp unit is configured for TIME entering 0 will imply an immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak Running a Setpoint profiles may be started held advanced jogged to a predefine
252. n one of the selected function blocks and holding and dragging it to the desired location and releasing the mouse button Dragging to the top or bottom of the list box bounds will cause the list to scroll if the scrollbar is visible HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Event Details Non Consecutive Function Blocks e Select the first function block or consecutive group of function blocks as indicated above Add additional function blocks by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking e Make all of the selected function blocks have a consecutive execution order starting with the position of the first selected function block by clicking on the Make Blocks Consecutive button e Note that neither the Up and Down arrows in the list box title bar or Drag and Drop work with this selection method When all function blocks have been repositioned click on the OK button to enforce the new execution order or click on the Cancel button to revert back to the existing execution order When the new execution order is enforced the new Block Execution Order numbers will be assigned consecutively starting from 1 so any previous gaps in the execution order numbers will be eliminated See also Tag Order Event Details The Event Details dialog box enables you to enter details for the tag selected when you configure events The block number and output number are listed across the bann
253. n range is not big enough to hold all the parameters you must select fewer parameters or edit the partition to make it larger You can use templates to apply the same list of parameters to each function block of that type This saves you the effort of creating the same checklist for each block and ensures the same parameters are checked Templates are saved as separate files with ptf extension Each block type is limited to templates created for that block type only You can t apply a PID block s template to a Setpoint Programmer block for example Example of how to use templates 278 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Modbus Register Addresses Adding system parameters to custom map 1 Add a PID loop to the map We ll refer to this as PID 1 2 Check PID 1 s desired parameters to be addressed 3 Click Save Template to save this checked list to a template file extension ptf Use a descriptive filename that describes the type of block for future reference For example P ID1 ptt 4 As you add other PID loops to the map you can Load Template PID1 into them which applies the same checklist of parameters 5 You can also Save Template As Default for that block type which saves you from loading a template into each block For example if you want all your PID blocks to have the same parameters checked as the template PID1 save PID1 as the default When you add subsequent PID blocks to the map they
254. nfiguration expansion rack that is in Verify that the jumpers on its configuration the scanner are setup for Please note that there the correct rack address are NO expansion Check that expansion rack racks permitted on the is on HC900 C30 controller _ Check the expansion rack s status LED for diagnostic information Check that cable is connected to expansion rack Ifa hub is used check that all cables are properly connected to the hub proper crossover cables are used and that hub is powered Cycle power to the rack Cycle power to the hub Replace the expansion rack s power supply 10 Replace the expansion rack 11 Replace the expansion rack s scanner board Rack SW Incompatility The Main CPU determined that its software is not compatible with the scanner module All associated module 1 Upgrade the scanner diagnostics are set to software either by MODULE NO COMM replacing the module or doing a code download Refer to MODULE NO 2 Update Main CPU COMM diagnostic for software either by further details replacing the module or doing a code download Diagnostics Warning One of the comm port s Refer to related Comm Access the Comm port Is reporting an application port diagnostic diagnostics screen error Failed One of the Comm ports Refer to related Comm port Same as above is reporting a physical or diagnostic data link failure 224 HC900 Process Control Des
255. nfiguration ACCESS cccccsseeccceseeeeeeesaeeceeesaeeeeeeseueeeesseeeeeessaaeeeeesaaeeees 85 Greate Edit Data Storage File cic vsssceccavoeewardegesthau ta tacboacsdete teeta tins n a tes 85 Trend Storage Configuratio Nsei aaa E A 86 POINT LOG Strage COMMUNAL ON erpa E nace Do es 87 Alarmi Event Storage GOnmliguration 24 23 scccccacssichoceeieaceliieicenntedsan dan secne E eE ERa 88 FUNCTION BLOCK DIAGRAM FBD WORKSHEET ccceeeeeeeeneeees 91 FB Worksheet OVErVIEW eristeen iian te ccader erences atsivndecucdocta teem casee a ecabaeedates 91 FBO COMIGUIATON TOODA rescriere O A 92 How to Add a New FBD WorkSheeet ccccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeseesaeeeesaeeenes 93 How to Navigate Between FBD Worksheets cccccseceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesseeeeseeeeeeaeeeseeeesees 93 KEVDO TA NaVIC a NO Ms e a T a N 95 Traceback WINGOW sxce cine Sis acicacicobncadadtedre etamusacsbeenuncastacestaaridviadte dened E 96 Resolve Dangling Soft WIES assisas etandi a ae a T ae iT 97 How to Find an Item on the FBD Worksheet cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeesees 99 How to Change a FBD s Worksheet Properties cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaees 100 How to Change the Worksheet OFde cccccccseeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeceeeseeeeeeseaeeseeseaeeeeeesaaes 100 How to Delete a FBD Worksheet cccccceeccceseeceesecceeeecseecsueeseusecsueesseeeesseeesseeesees 100
256. ngling Soft Wires Restore Controller Information Restore Factory Calibration Right Mouse Click RS485 Ol Port Diagnostics RS485 Ol Port status Indicators Saving A Configuration File Saving A Function Block Diagram Select the Number to Call Selecting a Menu Semi Auto Calibration Procedure Sequence File Sequence Pool Sequence Properties Sequencer Configuration Overview set controller serial ports Set Controller IP Address Set Controller Mode Set Controller Network Parameters Set Controller Time Set Instrument Time Set Serial Port Setpoint Profile Setpoint Profile Pool Setpoint Profile Properties Setpoint Program Index Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators 169 154 155 291 Index Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators configuration 155 User Assigned Tag Names 126 What is 154 User Interface Overview 9 Setpoint Schedule 176 Using Recipes to Download Setpoint Profiles163 setup edit 176 Utilities Worksheet Overview 129 Setpoint Schedule File 171 Setpoint Schedule Overview 158 V Setpoint Schedule Properties 176 Adding 114 SETPT l 126 View Menu 22 Setup Edit a Recipe 166 Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode 184 Setup Edit Sequence 178 Signal 119 W N ee ty a Watch Summary Display Groups 203 CoA Funcion 199 Watch Summary Inputs Outputs 202 l I Watch Summary Page Connectors 201 Start Up Display Configuration 74 Watch Summary Signals 504 et the Application Watch Summary User Defined 199 tatus Bar 16 W atch Summary
257. nitor block s RACK OK pin is turned off 3 ASYS and FSYS blocks HW OK pins are turned off 4 lf configured as a Modbus master ASYS and FSYS blocks Modbus Master Fail pins are turned on All Modbus slave and Modbus read blocks have their read pins The DUART is failing to operate frozen to the last properly value read All slave blocks HW Failure STATUS is set to COMMSTATUS all slaves in the all slaves is function block background scan rate have their BAD COMM and NO SCAN pins turned on IN SCAN NO for all slaves is set to BAD for function block Statistical data for frozen All slaves in the diagram are diagram scanned at the 238 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Replace CPU module Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics Serial Port S2 Port Diagnostics The Designer provides live monitoring of the S2 Port The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start up and during on line operation 1 Select Controller Ports Diagnostics from the Monitor drop down menu then select Serial Port S2 from the list provided or from the Monitor toolbar k 2 The Serial Port S2 Diagnostic Summary dialog box will appear It shows Port Status Diagnostics Statistics and parameters for the Serial S2 Port default R8485 for 559 1042 Operator Interface This window can be launched from the Utilities Worksheet
258. nly in the configuration open in Designer That is why it is recommended that you perform an upload from the controller before monitoring so that current values from the controller are shown on the function block property pages Select the Comm port and controller address to monitor Press OK It checks to see if information is the same in the controller The feedback will be the monitor toolbar Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 193 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Right Click Procedure in Monitor Mode IC ted m _ The Status Bar shows S LJ on bar indicates that monitor mode is in effect The green square is an activity indicator and flashes bright green when requests for monitored data are made to the controller There is also the word Monitoring indicated on the banner of the worksheet the FBD worksheet background turns yellow and an eye appears with the cursor arrow See Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode for on line monitoring indicators Right Click Procedure in Monitor Mode Depending where you right mouse click on the FBD worksheet during monitoring the resulting menu will have some differences In each column is shown the menu items that appear when you right click on that item on your FBD during Monitor Mode Right click on these Function Variable Yellow Signal Block Space Tags Connectors To see Monitor Monitor Execution Watch these Block Block Order Fol re Summary ch
259. nment is desired If the item is a signal tag or variable this is the tag name Click to see a list of other signal tags or variables from which to choose ATTENTION when you assign a different parameter here the Data Type does not automatically change you must manually change to the correct Data Type for the parameter Read only Description of signal tag or variable Data Type Choices Unsigned 16 Signed 16 Unsigned 32 requires 2 registers Signed 32 requires 2 registers Float 32 requires 2 registers If 2 registers are required the higher register is grayed out and not assignable Note For signals and variables when changing data type from float 32 to integer 16 Keep in mind the decimal point location For example 1000 1 translates to 10001 Note For function blocks when changing data type from float 32 to integer 16 the value is rounded For example 1000 1 translates to 1000 and 1000 5 translates to 1001 a Read only Decimal places of signal tag or variable 10 Type of access to the parameter Read Write Read Write Configuration Tab This tab shows all configured items Click and drag an item from here to an address under the map s Item column Not all items can be assigned to an address Dragging a function block will display its checklist of parameters from which to choose Click here for details Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 273 September 2013 Modbus Register A
260. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 51 How to Manage PC Comm Ports and Connections cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeees 51 PC Network Port Set Up For Controller ACC SS ccccccccseeeeeeteeneeeeseeeeseeseeeeeeesaaaeees 51 PG Senal Com POR Setup saicenconcant sensvectautnennsstictce udadehedis dete r 53 PC to Controller Connection SettingS cccccecccccsseecceceeseceeceeeeeeesaeeeeeesseeeeeeseageeesseeneees 55 Remote LOODD ACK CSU icvistecsts arene ees cle we ott alee eo ued cha a cae E ae 56 PROMOS ACCC SS oori naO on inci buslihaata nbeaminlaiaundnea unum E E 57 select Ihe NUMDer TO Cal ara E 57 COMMUNICATIONS Slat Stes sisisi neseni a ri ease nehintendaeene see 58 WORKSHEETS OVERVIEW ccccescceeceneceneceneeenecesecnseonseonssenseenscnseonseenesons 59 Whats Worksheet sng fsietonite cai esatee cele ael ei a eai 59 Worksiieet Galedony labS 3153522 cece a E eee eecene ete eae a 59 CONTROLLER WORK Slt BE p skinin aa 60 Controller WOrkSheel Overview nescienca A son putea eae ees 60 Controller Configuration TOOIDalssscccscisc teint a ae ete aves neces cow veda eeed 61 E Mail NOL CQUOM assetebieateesee ee a a tam Merteitndss cater 62 Unlock AINE Worksheets aes locos at cia cain E ee oun sdnaseadedessecenateuamanes 63 DISPLAY VV OIG wt es aide sa ce See dca Saad eeteateeiceacdecisen ectdectiectdaced 64 Operator Panel Worksheet OVErVieW ccccceeecceceeseececeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeceesseeeeeesaeaeee
261. nstant 115 Adding 115 O O I File Names for Disk Storage 74 Operator Interface Displays 63 Operator Interface Settings 72 Operator Panel Configuration Toolbar Test 62 Operator Panel Worksheet Overview 62 Output 188 Forcing Unforcing 188 Overview 192 Logic Flow 192 Overview On Line Monitoring 181 p Page connectors 194 Page Connectors 121 Paste 20 28 89 PC Comm ports and connection 49 how to manage 49 PC Network Port Set Up For Controller Access 49 PC Serial Com Port Setup 51 PC to Controller Connection Settings 53 Peer to Peer Connections Diagnostics 238 239 Peer to Peer Connections Diagnostics Status Indicators 238 239 Pin Value 195 placePlaceNameModbus PlaceNamelnitiator PlaceNameTCP PlaceTypePort Diagnostics 237 placePlaceNameModbus PlaceNameMaster PlaceNameSerial Place TypePort Diagnostics 234 Point Log Storage Configuration 85 Position Proportional Output Calibration 148 PPO Block Auto Calibration 149 PPO Block Calibration 148 PPO Block Hand Calibration 151 PPO Block Semi Auto Calibration 150 Print Report 239 Print Report Preview 241 Revision 14 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 Rack Module and Channel Assignments Rack Diagnostics Rack Diagnostics Power Supply Recipe Configuration Overview Recipe Overview Recipe Properties Recipes Menu Recipe Variables configuration overview Recipe Variables File Recipe Variables Overview Remote Access Remote Loopback Test Resolve Da
262. ntext menu View sub menu Worksheet Toolbox Window The Worksheet Toolbox is a dockable window which provides two main functions e Categorized library of available function blocks and other items that may be placed on function block worksheets e Categorized library of all function blocks variables and signal tags currently in use on all worksheets providing easy access to properties and navigation to the containing worksheet You can collapse or expand the tree and you can enlarge or shrink the size of the window This toolbox applies to the current active document and the name of the active configuration appears ona button at the top of the window Click on this button to view the active configuration s file statistics The Worksheet Toolbox contains a tab control with either 3 or 4 tabs The first two tabs contain the library of available function blocks grouped by the rate that they will be executed at either Normal Scan or Fast Scan as shown below 12 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 HCS00 C 0S Rev 6 0 HC900ControllerBackup Function Blocks Elf I0 Blocks H Analog Input H Analog Input Voting J Analog Input RCJ a Analog Out J Analog Out Validated J Discrete Input H Digital Input Voting T 8 Point Digital Input Discrete Output J Digital Output Validated T 8 Point Digital Output 4 Time Prop Out 4 Pos Prop Out Frequency Input a Pulse Input T Pulse Output
263. nto two contiguous partitions of any size and names you specify Does not delete contents of the partition s registers You can split undefined partitions Combine merges selected partitions into one partition of any name Does not delete the contents of the partition s registers You can combine undefined partitions Resize changes the starting and ending address of the selected partition New Creates a new partition within an undefined partition To erase the entire map and start from scratch select all partitions and select Delete then select all undefined partitions and select Combine Horizontal Scroll Use to scroll to offscreen areas of the map Vertical Scroll Lets you scroll through the partition 274 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Modbus Register Addresses Custom Modbus Map rem O Replace map with fixed Replaces the entire custom map with all your Modbus map data configuration s loops programmers etc at their preassigned addresses and partitions up to the fixed map s quantity limits e g 32 Loops 8 SP Programmers etc Beyond these quantity limits items will not be added to the map unless you add them manually Since you are still in custom map mode you can edit the map after doing the replacement ATTENTION Do not select Replace unless you are willing to overwrite your entire custom map s registers and partitions Consider backing up your custom map fir
264. ntry Information Schedule Name Description of schedule 16 characters Jog Seg Logic input JOG on state switch Segment number jog block will cause the schedule to will go to jump to the start of the segment designated then continue This selection assigns the time units hours or minutes for all segments Click on Radio button Minutes Time unit in Minutes Click on Radio button Guaranteed Hold Limit Revision 15 September 2013 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide The schedule will hold if a PV Enter a setpoint value deviates above or below or both the Setpoint value set here Select Guaranteed Hold Type on the Setpoint Edit Schedule dialog box 183 Sequences Create Edit Sequence File Sequences Create Edit Sequence File Creates edits a sequence be saved as a file SEQ File can be downloaded to the sequence pool A sequence in the pool can be edited or loaded into the controller s active configuration Step Item Action Description Select File Open Lets you choose a SEQ file to edit After selecting file the Sequence Editor appears Choose a new file type box appears THEN o Select a Reference A sequence must have a configuration to give it context Select an Configuration open configuration from the pull down list If none available select Open Configuration to open one The configuration will open Click back to Sequence Editor and select the reference configuration T
265. o proprietary operations while allowing other users to modify unprotected worksheets or generate recipe and data storage files Blocks are simply selected from a categorized list dropped on a selected worksheet page and soft wired to other blocks directly or via tag references Editing tools such as box copy and paste speed development With Controller Rev 6 0 and higher there is also the concept of Safety function block diagram worksheets vs the regular Process function block diagram worksheets for controllers that support it The Safety worksheets allow definition of Safety enabled configurations to run on SIL compliant controller models Within Safety worksheets certain restrictions at both configuration and run time are Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 1 September 2013 Software Introduction and Overview Features enforced to ensure safety compliance is achieved See below section on Function Block Configuration development Note that a reference to a Safety block refers to a function block that is placed on a Safety worksheet Monitoring On line monitoring tools allow quick analysis of execution problems These include e Multiple function blocks monitor access on a single display from multiple worksheets Most internal parameters are available for read write plus block outputs may be forced including I O and logic blocks Major blocks such as PID Setpoint Programmer and Sequencers
266. o l e moo CS mo A sw sSNA 6 You can assign a signal variable to multiple addresses Just repeat the preceding steps 7 To clear a single address select it and click Delete To clear all signal variable addresses select Clear All Registers This does not clear the item s default address it only clears the addresses assigned here 8 To view all addresses of an item display its Properties Signal Tag Properties Variable Properties Function Blocks Tab Procedure for editing function block addresses 1 Use Filter to list all configured function blocks of a certain type Types whose Modbus address can be changed are Loops PID On Off Carbon Potential 3 Position Step Auto Manual Bias Alternator Hand Off Auto Switch e Sequencer e Setpoint Programmer e Setpoint Scheduler e Stage e Device Control Ramp Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 269 September 2013 Modbus Register Addresses Fixed Modbus Map 5 6 User Defined Signals and Vanables Function Blocks Modbus Registers Filter C Show as Decimal f Show as Hex Address Block TagName Descriptor F2 ZO E1 Furn2 Zone 1 F2 F0NE2 Furn2 Zone F2 ZO E3 Furn2 Zones F4 Temp Zone F4 Temp Zone 2 F4 Temp Zone 3 Furnace Temp F2 CARB F2 Carbon ome ooo S e a coro a ooo a z Aoo E gt Addresses containing that type of function block are shown in numerical order For exampl
267. o prevent other users from viewing your configuration Once a file is protected and saved or downloaded to a controller it cannot be opened or uploaded unless you know the password Adding Read protection to a file From the File menu select Properties then select the Read Protection tab Click on the Protect File button Enter a password for the file in the New Password field up to 14 characters Re enter the password in the Confirm New Password field Click OK To Change a Password Click on the Change Password button Enter the current password in the appropriate field Enter a New Password in the appropriate field Confirm the new password in the appropriate field Click OK To Unprotect a File Click on the Unprotect File button Enter the current password in the appropriate field Click OK the file is unprotected Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 47 September 2013 48 File Management Write Protect a File Write Protect a File Introduction Optional configuration File Write protection is provided This feature makes use of the disk general file Read Only attribute All the files default to No Protection When set to Read Only the file is Write Protected which means it cannot be over written or deleted Select Write Protect File from the FILE menu Use the Check Box on the dialog box that appears to turn the attribut
268. of between 150 and 1500 records per file Events Digital event recording is also available to store on and off transitions of digital events in the controller Event data includes the point tag a 16 character point description and the time and date of event occurrence An Event file has a capacity of between 150 and 1500 records per file Setpoint Programs Schedules instrument configurations recipes variables diagnostics and calibrations are not part of the Data Storage feature Data Storage Conventions Storage Modes Trends Point Log and Alarms Events can be stored in Continuous or Batch modes In addition Point Log can be stored in On Command mode Mode Description No data will be collected Data is sampled at the storage interval Data is sampled at the storage interval but also a Batch Enable Signal separates the sampled data into numbered batches Batch 1 begins when the Batch Enable Signal turns on and ends when the signal turns off Batch 2 begins when the Batch Enable Signal turns on and ends when the signal turns off etc No batch mode data is collected while the Batch Enable Signal is off The Batch Enable Signal does not affect data being stored as Continuous or On Command Point Log data is sampled on each off to on transition of the Point Log Enable Signal Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 79 September 2013 Data Storage Data Storage Conventions Storage intervals When data stora
269. of the dialog If the calibration is successful the Save Cal button will be available 5 Click on the Save Cal button to save the current CJ calibration 6 Ifthe calibration fails a message will be displayed in the Instrument status section 7 Click on Close to close dialog Note Click on Restore Factory Calibration button to do same NOTE Refer to the Calibration section in the HC900 Installation and User Guide for additional Hardware details 154 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Calibrate Modules Calibrate AO Channel The Calibrate AO Channel option allows you to calibrate the selected AO to ensure that the 0 and 100 values selected during configuration are actually correct ATTENTION You should not access the Utilities Calibrate Controller Analog I O display while the OIl calibration display is being displayed or vice versa Calibration can t be done as long as both displays are shown user must exit either display to do a calibration To calibrate an AO Channel 1 Enter a Rack Module and Channel 2 Click on Select Output The program will then poll the controller to see if the selected AO exists 3 The Cal 0 button is now available Measure the actual output of the AO at the terminal block with a meter and enter the measurement into 0 Measured Click on Cal 0 button to calibrate the 0 measurement The reference value is displayed below the Instrumen
270. oft wire configuration e Supports on line configuration changes e Configuration upload that includes graphic configuration to recreate the function block diagram and Ol assignments e Configures Controller and Operator Interface in an integrated environment e Configures View OI data storage e mail alarms e Configures recipes Variables only SP profiles SP schedules sequences with on line operation provides easy file generation for media transfer to HC900 Ol s locally and file management e Configuration partitioning using Worksheets e Extensive monitoring tools including watch windows concurrent detailed block parameter windows digital logic power flow via color coding live data at block pins and a signal traceback facility e Windows XP Vista Windows 7 support e Use Ethernet or RS 485 to access controller Worksheets Worksheets are a logical partition of a configuration and selected by tabs that appear on the Main Window A configuration is built using four main elements or Worksheets of configuration The user friendly graphic development environment allows partitioning of the control strategy into up to 20 or 40 worksheets of 20 pages each depending on Controller model This allows the configuration to be organized according to process function allows faster configuration access and improves documentation The configuration originator may apply additional security to specific worksheets to prohibit access t
271. oices aie Ponce East Logic cr Help Monitor Go To Pins Execution Help View i i Find Where Eei Used Used Properties Execution Properties Properties Properties Order File Signal Connector Tag Properties Function Block Properties Function Block 194 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Function Block Monitor Window Right click on these these choices Function Block Monitor Window The Designer provides live monitoring of all Function Blocks To access select Monitor Function Block from the Monitor menu or from the Monitor toolbar Right Click a function block or variable in Monitor Mode and select the Monitor Block menu item The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list For Loop blocks the current mode will be shown in the lower right of the window LSP AUTO Local Setpoint Automatic Output LSP MAN Local Setpoint Manual Output RSP AUTO Remote Setpoint Automatic Output RSP MAN Remote Setpoint Manual Output To change Mode settings of a loop block click on a radio button to select Local or Remote Setpoint Automatic or Manual Output Click the Change Mode button to change the mode Changing a Parameter Some blocks allow you to change some parameters Click on a parameter name if allowed the Write field will bec
272. ol Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Forcing Unforcing an Output Right Click on a selected function block then select Monitor Block The Monitor Block dialog box will open Monitor 41725 WTE E Unfarce Block status Forced output Calibration Status Factory Calibration Date Fu Channel Sensor Status Forced DISABLE OFF Filter Time sec U 000 Bias 0 000 Failsafe value 0 000 FAIL ON WARNING OFF Out 0 000 FORCED Disabled Channel Output Value 0 000 Select OUT or Output in the dialog box of the Live Monitor screen If Forcing is allowed the Write field becomes active Enter the Output value in the entry field next to the Write button NOTE for Loop Blocks put the controller into Manual Mode Click WRITE The output value will change to the value entered for forcing The word Forced will appear next to Output and Block Status Changing Force a Digital Value from ON to OFF Select ON or OFF from the drop down list box and click WRITE The selection for the parameter selected will change to the selection entered for forcing If there is a problem with the forcing Check your communication Set Up for correct settings Make sure the Mode Switch on the controller is in RUN mode Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 197 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Forced Blocks Window Unforcing an Output Right Click on a selected function bloc
273. oller Worksheet or any I O function block Signal or Variable in the Watch Window and that item will be located on the Function Block Diagram As you move the mouse over a HOT LINK the text changes to Underlined Blue and the cursor changes to a hand _ See also Find Feature Writes or Forces By clicking on the item in the Value column you may write a value such as for a Variable or force a value for an analog input or digital input For I O a Forced column will indicate that the I O point is forced Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 209 September 2013 Watch Summary Window Find Feature Find Feature You can click on any I O function block or Signal on the Controller Worksheet or any I O function block Signal or Variable in the Watch Window and that item will be located on the Function Block Diagram As you move the mouse over a HOT LINK the text changes to Underlined Blue and the cursor changes to a Hand You can also find within the Watch Summary window itself any tag descriptor signal number variable number as well as rack number module number channel number or block on the Inputs Outputs tab For example to find a tag in the Watch Summary window click anywhere in the Tag Name column and start typing the characters of the tag you want to find The tag matching the characters you type will scroll into view To find a tag name and prevent the tag hot link from re positioning the Function Blo
274. ome active Enter an override value in the field Channel Sensor Status I O blocks display a parameter called Channel Sensor Status to indicate any abnormalities See I O Channel Sensor Status for details Click on X to exit box Attention All function blocks dialog boxes have a MONITOR button when in Monitor mode that will access this window Below is an example of a Monitor Window for a PID block Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 195 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Forcing Unforcing an Output Monitor LOOP 1 wte g Less Start Sccutune Parameter Block status OK Mode Settings Mode LSP MAN Process Variable 0 000 n an Working Setpoint 10 000 Local C Auto Local Setpoint 10 000 Local Setpoint 10 000 C Remote Manual Manual Output Value 0 000 Out 0 0 Direct Control OFF Alaa OFF Change Mode Alarm 2 ON Accutune Disabled Curent kode Accutune In Progress OFF Gain 12 750 LSF MAN Forcing Unforcing an Output Overview The ability to force and unforce the output pin of function blocks and variables from the Designer is provided as an aid to startup and configuration troubleshooting The feature is limited to single output per block The majority of blocks have a single output and most of the multiple output blocks have an obvious primary i e most important output This may apply to the block s primary analog output such as for an Al block or digi
275. on 15 September 2013 1 File Management Downloading a File to the Controller Uploading Configuration From the File Menu select Upload Configuration or click on the Upload icon on the Main Toolbar l click on the Upload icon on the Utilities Worksheet Toolbar HL then select Upload Configuration The Upload File dialog box will appear A temporary file name will be place in the File Name box Under Current CommLink Settings select the port and address to communicate to a controller Reference Utilities Worksheetin the appropriate fields for configuring the PC Ports Press START The dialog box will show Percent Complete The Uploaded File will appear with an automatic file name containing the controller name its local name or alias and the network it is on From the File menu select Save or Save As and enter a file name and path in the appropriate fields Uploading Recipe or Data Storage 1 From the File Menu select Upload The Upload File dialog box will appear A temporary file name will be place in the File Name box 2 Under Current CommLink Settings select the port and address to communicate to a controller Reference Utilities Worksheet for configuring the PC Ports 3 Press START 4 Select a file type to upload If uploading a recipe you ll be asked to choose which recipe in the controller s memory to upload 5 The dialog box will show Percent Complete When the upload
276. on to off click on radio button to select Alarm Acknowledge Group acknowledge Manual Acknowledge Can be acknowledged by operator When a manual acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out of alarm without being acknowleged by the operator it will be indicated as cleared Use when you want the operator to be able to acknowledge the alarm or see that the alarm was acknowledged and cleared Auto Acknowledge When an auto acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out of alarm without being acknowledged by the operator it will show no indication it was in alarm Alarm can still be acknowledged by the operator when it is in the alarm state An alarm point with this attribute will never indicate clear status click on radio button to select Note an alarm will always be stored to the O I Archive list 104 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Event List Configuration Event List Configuration on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Configure Event List dialog box You can also select Events from the EDIT menu on the Main Menu the FBD Worksheet toolbar button Up to 64 digital signals can be configured as events The most recent 150 events will be available for display at the Operator Interface Events can generate Emails From 150 to 1500 event records can be stored on the Operator Interface archive disk Each event must have at leas
277. on to set up each sequence Sequence Properties Sequence Properties is information for the sequencer Label Description a Jog Step and Time Units Sequence Setup EDIT Sequence Setup or Edit consists of configuring each step of the Sequence with a State Number and Name Time In Step Time Next Step Event 1 Next Step Event 2 Next Step Advance next step and an Auxiliary value Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 167 September 2013 Recipes Recipe Overview Recipes Recipe Overview Multiple meanings of recipe Loop control users apply the word recipe differently in different contexts There is no industry standard for the word s meaning In a broader sense a recipe is any collection of data specific to a process setup that can be downloaded into and then run as part of controller s function block configuration The following are recipe types Recipe Variables Set Point Profile Set Point Schedule Sequence Notice the first recipe type is also called a recipe The two uses of the word recipe can get confusing In this narrower sense a recipe is a collection of data specifically variables To distinguish it from the broader meaning HC Designer calls it recipe variables To one user a recipe is a collection of variables to another user a recipe is a set point profile to another user a recipe is a set point schedule to another it s a sequence These different uses of the word recipe are all ok as
278. ontext menu to bring up the Alarm Group Configuration dialog box when you do not have an OI and do need to use Alarm Group logic in the control strategy From the Selected Tags List drop down menu select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list The default selection is ALL Enter the group title Use any mix of numbers letters and spaces Select a Tag Name from the Select Tag List Click on ADD the selected signal tag will be placed in the next available position in the Selected Tags field OR Select a position in the Selected Tags field then click on INSERT The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required Repeat the selection for up to 12 tags for each group Select a signal in the Selected Tags field and click on ALARM DETAILS and enter Alarm details in the Dialog Box Click OK Note when you edit Alarm Group 1 20 from either the O I Worksheet the FBD worksheet or the FBD Alarm Group block you are editing the same data Panel Meter Display Tag Groups This selection lets you configure groups of Panel Meter Displays Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags digital signal tags analog variables and digital variables Select the Panel Meter tab then Select Display Group from the drop down menu Analog signal tags digital signal tags analog variables and digital variables will be displayed in the Selected Tags field
279. operator security and define a number of other operator interface attributes Documenting your configuration is supported through a variety printable presentation formats A few of these include a summary of the controller I O the graphic configuration diagram function block HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Software Introduction and Overview Features properties recipe groups setpoint profile groups Operator Interface display and point selections among others Recipe Data Storage File Generation Recipes and data schedules may be defined within the configuration and or created as files via File New for external file transfer to HC900 operator interfaces or for file management Reports Documenting your configuration is supported through a variety of report formats Each can be print previewed A few of these include a summary of the controller I O used function block worksheet selection each page of diagram worksheet printed as 8 5 x 11 sheet function block properties variable and tag parameters Modbus addresses Data Storage Settings recipe listings setpoint profile listings Sequencer listings setpoint scheduler listings Ol display groups Alarm and Event Groups and controller setup Function Block Configuration development Function Block configuration development is performed using Drag and Drop techniques for positioning graphic icons on a FBD Worksheet from a list of availa
280. or Daylight Saving Changes Use DSTI Pin on Time and Date Function Block One Year Every Year Disabled controller s time will not be synchronized with a network time server Enabled controller s time will be periodically synchronized to a network time server in Greenwich Mean Time Different time zone or Daylight Saving must be configured separately Disable or enable will take effect when you click on Write Time Server Settings to Controller Primary primary time server s IP address Secondary secondary time server address as a backup in case the primary can t be accessed Writes time server settings enable or disable to controller Status will confirm the completed write This button does not update the controller time it just enables the connection To see the current controller time go to the Time and Date tab Important Network time servers use Greenwich Mean Time Go to the Time and Date tab and set the time zone for your controller Lets you select one of the three Daylight Saving methods below Controller time will be in Daylight Saving when DSTI pin on the Lim function is ON Time will be in Standard when pin is OFF Controller time will change to Daylight Saving then to Standard on the dates and times specified for a single year Controller time will change to Daylight Saving then to Standard on the weekdays and times specified for every year HC900 Process Control Designer Use
281. or dialog box will appear and a new Opened Recipe File is listed in the File Browser Refer to the specific Recipe type for specifics New Data Storage Select the Data Storage tab On the tab click on a radio button to create a new Data Storage File Dialog Box Comments Displays the Open dialog box From the Files of Type drop down menu select a file type Hybrid Control Designer Configuration cde Hybrid Control Designer Configuration cde All Hybrid Control Designer Files Recipes rcp Profiles prf Schedules ch Sequences seq Data Storage dss HC Controller Backup File chk UMCSO0 Version 5 0 Files fod Navigate to folder where the file is stored Click on the desired file name then click OPEN Opens files and converts UMC800 FBD configuration files Saves the active configuration First time save displays the Save As dialog box Moves the currently selected FBD diagram items from the current Function Block diagram and places them on the clipboard Indicated by a red dotted line Upon pasting the items all links to them e g display references Modbus address recipes are preserved as if they were moved they are not deleted and pasted as anew copy Copies the currently selected FBD diagram items from the current Function Block diagram and places it on the clipboard Indicated by a blue dotted line Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 27 S
282. or a list of unconfigured I O blocks 6 Click Yes to view the summary of unconnected inputs or unconfigured I O blocks 34 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 File Management Creating Other File Types 7 Click Log File to save the list to a text file if desired To Save a File as a Different Device or Revision i e conversion 1 Select SAVE AS from the FILE menu The Save As dialog box will open 2 Type inthe new file name in that field 3 From the drop down menu in the Save as Type field select the configuration type and revision that you wish to convert to 4 If there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0 and there are no I O blocks with unassigned I O addresses then the data is saved automatically and the rest of the steps may be skipped 5 If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0 and or there are I O blocks with unassigned I O addresses the Process Control Designer will notify you of the situation and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs and or a list of unconfigured I O blocks 6 Click Yes to view the summary of unconnected inputs or unconfigured I O blocks 7 Click Log File to save the list to a text file if desired Note that if you convert a safety enabled configuration to a non safety configuration then all the safety worksheets in the configuration will be converted to process workshee
283. orage Create Edit Data Storage File Creates edits a data storage file DSS File can be downloaded to the controller Step Item Action Description Select File Open Lets you choose a DSS file to edit After selecting file the Data Storage Editor appears Select File New Choose a new file type box appears Select Data Storage tab Data Storage button appears Select Data Storage The Data Storage Editor appears THEN I Select a Reference A data storage file must have a configuration to give it context Select Configuration an open configuration from the pull down list If none available select Open Configuration to open one The configuration will open Click back to Data Storage Editor and select the reference configuration Trend setup Point Log Point Log setup Alarm Event Alarms Events setup Pre initialize Disk Prepares zip disk for data storage Select this to avoid the long initialization time on the operator interface Prints the data storage settings Saves the data storage file as DSS file Downloads data storage file to the controller Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 85 September 2013 Data Storage Trend Storage Configuration Trend Storage Configuration Trend storage will provide the following Points per Trend 12 maximum Analog or Digital Storage Modes Off Batch Continuous Storage Interval 2 5 10 20 30 40 50 seconds 1 2 5 10 20 30 minutes External Con
284. orage media or upload and save to your PC via the software s Utilities Worksheet Controller Firmware Files The firmware files for the various CPU and Scanner versions are placed in the C Program Files HC900 Firmware directory when HC Designer is installed or upgraded It is strongly recommended both controller and scanners be upgraded together Controller Mode Before starting the Controller Firmware Download switch the controller to Program Lockea or Program mode Program Locked offers more security by requiring a key to change the mode switch position See set controller mode Download Procedure Backup the controller configuration either by uploading to floppy disk on the operator interface or uploading and saving via the Designer Make sure the controller s mode switch is in Program locked or Run Prog position If the switch is in Run Prog position go to set controller mode display and change mode to Program Ta In Designer select the Utilities Worksheet tab Controller Module 40 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 File Management Downloading Controller Firmware From the Controller Utilities Functions select Download to Controller BIEL On the sub menu select Controller Firmware then Controller Module Use the Look in drop down list in the Open dialog box to select the drive and folder you placed the files in 6 Select and open the file Vers
285. oring Logic Flow ON or Inverted ON D0146 32 c W 010311 DO144 0 4 010205 FAIL OFF or Inverted OFF DOSS 21 FAIL DOSE oe wy 010311 FAIL ce SR 010309 FAIL 206 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Logic Flow This page has been intentionally left blank Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 207 September 2013 Watch Summary Window Overview Watch Summary Window Overview Overview The Watch Summary window is a dockable movable re sizable window that lets you view the current values of groups of related data such as I O and Signal Tags from the controller Opening the Window The Watch Summary window is represented by the icon and can be accessed in 2 ways as described below For each method the system must already be in Monitor Mode for the option to be available Monitor Menu 6 Select Monitor from the main application menu 7 Select Watch Summary to launch the Watch Summary window Monitor Mode Toolbar 2 Click on the button in the Monitor Mode Toolbar from the main application toolbar Using the Window The Watch Summary window will have a slightly different appearance depending on the revision of software and the type of controller however the general layout is as shown below e Tab control to select from different groups of data e Pull down selectors at the top to
286. orksheet will not be protected when the file is reopened Protection Symbols There are three symbols that could appear on the Worksheet Protection tab that indicate the level of protection for the file No protection is in place worksheets are Unlocked Protection exists and the worksheets are Unlocked Protection exists and the worksheets are Locked Protecting a Worksheet When There is No Protection From the File menu select Properties then select the Worksheet Protection tab Click on the Change Protection button Click on the box next to the worksheet names you want to protect then select DONE button Click on the Lock button to setup a password Enter a password for the file in the New Password field up to 14 characters Re enter the password in the Confirm New Password field Click OK In version 4 4 and greater click Disable Master Password if you wish to prevent others from overiding password protection by getting a master password from Honeywell IMPORTANT NOTE If you forget your password after Disable Master Password has been selected you will not be able to view any protected worksheets Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 101 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet How to Add Worksheet Protection To Change a Password From the File menu select Properties then select the Worksheet Protection tab PB Click on the
287. ort is configured as a Modbus Master Use Set Controller Serial Ports on the Utilities tab to set up a Modbus Master port Master port status The master port S1 or S2 is shown along with its status No Slave Blocks There are no MBS Modbus Slave Blocks in the configuration Program Mode Controller is in Program Unlocked Mode Modbus Slave Communications is disabled return to Run to communicate to Slave Devices ELN Slave Controller is in Program Locked Mode Port switches to Serial ELN Protocol while in this mode Scanning Port is configured as a Modbus Master Controller is in RUN or OFFLINE mode and is scanning the slave devices Protocol Shows the protocol for the port If Modbus RTU Advanced you can click on View Advanced Setup Cycle time S This is the computed cycle time of the Modbus Master link This time is computed by the HC900 controller Execution time S This is the actual execution time of the Modbus Master link as measured by the HC900 Controller Peak time S This is peak execution time of the Modbus Master link as measured by the HC900 controller Overruns This parameter counts the number of times that the actual execution time of the Modbus Master link exceeded the computed Cycle Time Overruns can occur in the following situations e The baud rate configured for this serial port is incorrect e There is a physical problem on the serial communications link e g a bad connection a faulty or dis
288. ow cccccecccceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeseneesseeeseeeeesaeeeseneeseeeesaeeesaes 195 FOrcing UNIOrCinG Al QUIDUT sses EEEE aeea 196 Forced IBIOCKS VVINGOW ssc2aechedadanin leader dacet tected Sons a t dade daud sage ewer A 198 POW DOIL SIOD MONON G orraa EEA e eed etaceed esa neenioiel eats 201 MO CUS TOW easels S a a amps Soa lan eu aeal 201 Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 xi WATCH SUMMARY WINDOW oo cccecccceteeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeaseeeeeeneeeeeseeeseeseeesens NONION i aaa at er eetate ts gen she gaccoetrasdta se aresten eatin T ea eto ae ie N FNL she QUIN oer E a saen resents mmesasamne nage awe a OOM FUNCOM reen i E a a Watch Summary User Defined nrrionnnena a e Wath Summary ogna asa A cata NA Wath Summa y VanaDle Seisis a a ciaeetin Watch Summary INPUtS OUtDUTS cece ceeeecceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeceeeaeeeeeesaeaeseesaeeeessaanes Watch Summary Display GroupsS cccccssecceceeseeeeceeeeeeseeeeseeseeeseesseeseeeseeeeeesaaaes DIAGNOS FICS ssscssesscascce ss taccewst ease vi reeeeeci essai tenaet essere ase eee et GONTONEr DIAGNOSTICS xccn tietectlancictcnstatar E EE Controller Diagnostics Status Indications ccccccceeeeececeeeeceesaeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeeas RACK DIAGNOSI Sisse eater Noman teen Cnateeuacnae eae arias Rack Diagnostics Power SUDDIY siaaa iaie e e a ET I O Module Diagnostics Status Indications cc ceccccceeeecce
289. own menu Analog signal tags and digital signal tags will be displayed in the Selected Tags field From the Selected Tags List drop down menu select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list The default selection is ALL Enter the group title Use any mix of numbers letters and spaces Select a Tag Name from the Select Tag List Click on ADD the selected signal tag will be placed in the next available position in the Selected Tags field OR Select a position in the Selected Tags field then click on INSERT The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required Enter the Scale High and Scale Low values for each signal selected Defaults are 0 and 100 Repeat the selection for up to 6 tags for each group Click OK Overview Display Tag Groups This selection lets you configure groups of Overview Displays An Overview display will present the current status state for analog or digital tagged points The display allows operator entry of values via assigned analog and digital variables Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags digital signal tags analog variables and digital variables for monitor only and or operator entries Analog entries for variables have range limits and digital variables may be turned on or off via corresponding label The user may adjust analog and digital variables listed on overview displays while in operation Confi
290. ows a detailed report of each function block s parameters Modbus Register Map appears if using fixed map Shows the starting Modbus address of each function block as well as the Modbus addresses of all its parameters Click here for details Shows the starting Modbus address of each function block Click here for details also available if using custom map Shows the user defined Modbus addresses of signals and variables Shows the system defined Modbus addresses of all signal tags Shows the system defined Modbus addresses of all variables HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Reports Print Report SIL Filtering Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 257 Reports Print Report Signal Tags and Variables Shows the system defined Modbus addresses of all Yes signal tags and variables Modbus Partition appears if using custom map Modbus Partition Shows the Modbus addresses and contents of the No selected partition Hovering over this menu option will display a sub menu s which allows selection of the desired partition The report generated by this method is equivalent to the report printed when the same Modbus address partition is selected in the Custom Modbus Map worksheet and the Print button on the worksheet s toolbar is clicked Where Used Shows location worksheet and page of every item in Yes the function block diagram Shows useful file s
291. ox option available from also be hidden or made visible by toggling the state of the e The Main View menu e The Main Toolbar e The worksheet context menu View sub menu 14 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 User Interface Traceback Window Traceback Window Overview This feature helps you find problems with soft wire and signal connections between Function Blocks For Example If you are testing a configuration that you ve built and want to know why a Digital Output is ON when it should be OFF you can search for the source of the Input Signal Traceback is useful for finding the analog or digital source signal Trace Window Access the Trace Window from the Main Menu Toolbar Or from the View Menu on the main menu Trace Back List SPS109 ePStng ePST Og PID113 LOOF 1 Loops It is a dockable sizeable window The Trace Window provides a list of all blocks pins you have traced and lists Block ID Tag Name I O Pin Name Worksheet name Trace Window Update Each time you perform a Trace the window will update with a new pair of block pins The first item is the signal source the second item is the signal destination Select any of the rows in the Traceback window to recall the diagram to display the selected block The last trace is on the top of the list Right Mouse Click Procedure to Trace Signals Select a Function Block of interest Right Mouse click on
292. perator Interface User Guide Category Available Display Formats 1 Loop faceplate with trend 1 Loop Numeric Auto Manual Bias Multi loop Faceplate Loops Profiles Recipes Pushbuttons Switches Overviews 66 Recipe Load Sequencer Setpoint Programmer Setpoint Scheduler Device Control Operate Four Selector Switch HOA Switch Pushbutton Horizontal Trend Horizontal Trend with Digitals Horizontal Trend with Vertical Bars Vertical Trend Vertical Trend with Horizontal Bars 3 Pt Horizontal 3 Pt Vertical 6 Pt Horizontal 6 Pt Vertical 1 Pt Rotating Panel Multipoint Panel Overview Panel 4 Pts Panel Meter Alarm Alternator Operate Data Storage Status Messages Ramp Operate Operate HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Stage Revision 15 September 2013 Display Worksheet Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups A list of configured Groups Tags and their titles will appear in the Groups Tags selection window on the tab The format selection title is listed under Groups Tags Click on a Group Tag number Click ADD to add the selection to the Selected Display Formats list Click INSERT to insert into a screen position Other entries will shift down Note that you must first select click the position in the Selected Display Formats list on the right hand side of the dialog where you want to insert this display Click DELETE to delete a page from a selected position in the
293. pgrade the firmware in the firmware version inthe is not able to access the VO CPU and or scanner to be controller CPU is not on the associated rack compatible versions compatible with the firmware version in the O scanner 244 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics Host Connections Diagnostics The Designer provides live monitoring of the Host Connections The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start up and during on line operation 1 Select Controller Ports Diagnostics from the Monitor drop down menu then select Host Connections from the list provided or from the Monitor toolbar i This window can be launched from the Utilities Worksheet 2 The Host Connections Diagnostic Summary dialog box will appear 3 The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list 4 Click on X to exit box Refer to Host Connections Diagnostics Status Indicators for status indications possible cause and actions to correct the problem Host Connections Diagnostics x Wa rite Paramete Protocol Network IP Address Messages Recenved Application Errors Clear Statistics Port Diagnostic Protocal Network IP Address Messages Recenved Application Errors Clear Statistics Port Diagnostic Protocol Network IF Address Messages Recernved Application Errors Clear Statistics Port Diagnostic Protocol Network
294. porarily Unlock a Worksheet From the File menu select Properties then select the Worksheet Protection tab PR Click on the Unlock button p38 Enter the current password in the appropriate field Click OK the worksheets are unprotected NOTE the Controller Display and Function Block worksheets also have a toolbar button to unlock worksheets From the File menu select Properties then select the Worksheet Protection tab Click on the Remove Protection button Enter the current password in the appropriate field Click OK the worksheets are unprotected Protecting a Worksheet When Worksheets Protection is Active From the File menu select Properties then select the Worksheet Protection tab Unlock the worksheet Change protection Select worksheet names then DONE Select LOCK 46 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 File Management File Read Protection File Read Protection Protected files are password protected You will be prompted for a password to open them Introduction The HC900 Process Control Designer provides an optional configuration File Read protection All the files default to No Protection Through the Properties selection on the FILE menu you can enter a password to read protect each file You can change the password and also remove Write protection using the same password Use this security feature t
295. priorities like alarms because they are considered at a priority lower than all alarms Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 111 September 2013 112 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Unlock the Worksheets Alarm priorities were set during Alarm Group Configuration under Alarm Details 2 Low Priority Alarm 3 Medium Priority Alarm 4 High Priority Alarms 5 Emergency Alarm The priority of an event is always indicated as 1 see Event Configuration Attention See Set Controller Network Parameters and follow the wizard to set up a SMTP mail server IP Address Examples Somebody somewhere com receives only priority 5 Alarms only the check box for 5 is checked Aperson somewhere com receives all Alarms and Events all 5 boxes are checked People somewhere com receives only Events only check box for 1 is checked Unlock the Worksheets opens the Unlock Worksheets dialog box Enter the password to unlock all protected worksheets Oooo Cancel Enter the password in the field and then press UNLOCK HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Blocks Overview Function Block Definition Function Blocks Overview Function Block Definition A Function Block is a unit of software that performs a set of operations on its Inout Signals and Function Block parameters and produces Output Signals These output signals can be configured as inputs
296. provides a mechanism to upgrade the firmware in your HC900 Process Controlto a newer version without the need to replace the CPU card This can be useful if you wish to upgrade your controller to take advantage of new features and functions as they are introduced or in the event that a software bug requires field repair The HC Designer upgrade files can be downloaded from website httos www honeywellprocess com en US explore products control monitoring and safety systems modular control systems hc900 control system Pages hc900 controller aspx Getting Started Before you begin the download there are a few things you need to be aware of e Code Download can take from a couple of minutes using Ethernet to over one hour if using a Modem Therefore it is highly recommended that you do not start the code download procedure at a time when the likelihood of power failure is increased such as during thunderstorms e The code download function is only available through the HC900 Process Control Designer program connected to the controller via the CONFIGURATION port or Ethernet port on the HC900 Use the Utilities Worksheet to do the download e The controller will not allow the controller firmware download to begin if the battery is bad e Code download will destroy the configuration database in the controller Therefore before code download is started either upload the configuration file via the operator interface and save on floppy disk or other st
297. ptember 2013 File Management Opening an Existing File File Management Opening an Existing File Select Open from Displays the Open dialog box Drop down the Files of Type the File Menu menu and select a file type or Hybrid Control Designer Configuration cde Hybrid Control Designer Configuration cde All Hybrid Control Designer Files rs Recipes rcp from the Main Profiles pr Schedules sch Toolbar Sequences seq Data Storage dss Shortcut CTRL O HE Controller Backup File chk UMCS00 Version 5 0 Files fbd All Files Navigate to folder where the file is stored Click on the desired file name then click OPEN From the File menu select one of the most recently opened file listed above the Exit item Creating a New Configuration File Select New from Displays a Choose a New File Type dialog box Select the File Menu then the Configuration tab From the drop down menus select Configuration tab Controller and Revision from the dialog box Click OK and a new Designer Configuration file is listed in or the Designer Browser and a New diagram is place in the 5 Main Window area D from the Main toolbar Shortcut CTRL N Saving A Configuration File To Save an Existing File 1 Select SAVE from the FILE menu or from the Main Toolbar El 2 If there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0 and there are no I O
298. r Use any of the following methods Right click on the white space of a function block worksheet OR Right click on a function block input pin OR Drag and drop the connector from the Worksheet Toolbox Double click on the connector A list of signal tags or page connectors is shown Display all page connectors and pick one to assign to the input When you pick one the unconnected input Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 129 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Page Connectors ANDAOA 1 _ E m connector changes to an input page connector ANDAOA 1 m B E Double click on the page connector tag name area to view or change the page connector properties Analog Page Connector Properties Tag Name Engineering Units Digital Page Connector Properties Tag Name Off Label On Label Page connector tag names must be unique An input page connector can be changed to another page connector or to a signal tag connector Double click on the assigned input connector to see a selection of different signal tags or page connectors If you change the name of an output page connector you break the connection to any connected input page connectors Input and output page connector names must match exactly to be a valid connection Unconnected input page connectors are displayed as ANDAO 1 TER 130 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013
299. r Guide Click to select Enter addresses If using one server only enter the same address as the primary Click to write to the controller Check box to enable one of the following options Click to select Click to select Enter dates ad times Begin Daylight Saving Time setting must be earlier than Begin Standard Time setting Click to select Enter dates and times Last will be either 4th or 5th week whichever is last 147 Utilities Worksheet Data Storage Utility Data Storage Utility Note This section does not apply to the 900 Control Station opens the Data Storage Disk Initialization Utility dialog box It is used to initialize ZIP disks offline It takes a long time to initialize a disk on the Operator Interface Pre initializing ZIP Diskette Insert the 100MB Zip disk into your PC drive sep ES 2 See Daa Soage Wany enon te wms e ma Sata Leter tom te aap donn menw ospea meanen Pe s T Stet eee Groups Par te Operaio Meraca wend ont dip dwn an e omon pemazo openenen OOo Remove disk insert it into the operator Interface and initialize it See Initializing Disk under this section entitled Data Storage Operation 148 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Back Up Controller Information Back Up Controller Information Saves a controller s active configuration as a backup file with cbk extension Similar to saving an up
300. r Ports Diagnostics Network Port Diagnostic Status Indicators The Network Port Diagnostic Summary dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list Parameter Possible Cause Controller Action ne Port Good N A N A Diagnostics Network Setup Controller network 1 Rack 1 monitor block s Correct the setup Error names determined COMPORT DIAG is problem on network are set to FAILED illegal 2 Rack 1 monitor block s RACK OK pin is turned off 3 ASYS block s HW OK pin is turned off No IP Address DHCP and IP Same as above 1 Ifa DHCP server is address are not present configured download a configuration that uses DHCP 2 Enter an IP address Hardware Failure Ethernet port tests Same as above Replace CPU failed during power Module up Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 241 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics Expansion I O Comm Diagnostics The Designer provides live monitoring of the Expansion I O except C30 CPU Comm subsystem The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start up and during on line operation 1 Select Controller Ports Diagnostics from the Monitor drop down menu then select Expansion I O Comm from the list provided or from the Monitor toolbar Expansion O Comm Diagnostics Pte Total Data Link Errors Clear Totals Rack 2 Comm Diagnostic Number of Messages Data Link Errors Clear Statistics Rack 3 Comm D
301. r of one or more function blocks executing at either the Normal Scan or Fast Scan rates may be changed through the Function Block Execution Order dialog This method has an advantage over the method described above even for single function blocks because the absolute values of the assigned execution order numbers does not have to be known and the function blocks from all function block diagrams are displayed together The Function Block Execution Order dialog can be accessed in a number of ways as described below Note that while the same dialog is used to change the execution order of either the Normal Scan or Fast Scan function blocks there are separate selection methods to pre populate the dialog s list with the correct function blocks Edit Menu 1 Select Edit from the main application menu 2 Select Block and Tag Order and activate sub menu 3 Select either 123 Block Execution Order or fee Fast Block Execution Order to launch the Function Block Execution Order dialog Function Block Diagram Worksheet Toolbar 1 Click on the 123 icon in the Worksheet Toolbar displayed above any Function Block Diagram Worksheet to activate the drop down menu 2 Select either 12 Block Execution Order or 8 Fast Block Execution Order to launch the Function Block Execution Order dialog 108 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Execution Order Function Block Diagr
302. r ren a eee a a ee eee eae ee 122 Ading a Numen Constant secsi a a daub toeelseecia ae eE 123 Adang aC ONMC CON aerisit dds aderesgeennsttaenaunusacnesateeetuedaaiootenccaeees 124 Wall DIC e EER EE A A E REAA EE E E E A EAS A EEEE 125 WENO dE G erena a a a a a a es hae ae 125 Sonata e a T acum aceuac et eae aaatcen ine 127 Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 PAGS SOMMOCIONS aseena a EN erin oi ans 129 MOXT SUING E E S E E E EE E N E E T connate Maanweatuantenies 131 Changing the Default Annotation Attributes ccccccccsseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 132 CONVENTION S este sereccreaarecanessa cicicse csseancezosspeaezessseedcaiaesazesiceaussnsesauecsuceaeaenucs 133 PTAA ING FO Deets amineca tan ata ie anareunneicaiane 133 ACCESSING Context SENSITIVE ICID watiiasokn diwatiinnvelvakcns E E N S e T e 133 RONCMOUSE CICK creena e aO E E 133 HOW TO CONFIGURE FUNCTION BLOCK PARAMETERG 00 134 PICCOSSING BIOCK Detalls rasteira en dacuddncee teu teceidstcuesbonaeiaces nea benidsics 134 FUNCTION Block Addres Sian loci foc cect ant oeieustc EA 134 User Assigned Tag NAMES 6 cosas ecsataniusuacncutacterddnien deatad seals erandon aei apat 134 F nction Block Paramete S cicirine A A 134 FUNCTION BLOCK DIAGRAMG ccccseceneeeneeeneeeseenseenseenseenseenecesecneeens 135 OVENI OW aasar a a a N 135 FUNGON BIOCK Diagram RUGS piana e diode dace cotaiiceneans 135 saving A
303. r signal This error should not occur when exchanging data between HC900 controllers 1 Reset the controller to restart the UDP IP protocol stack and reset buffer allocations 2 Contact Honeywell Technical Assistance if the problem exists Contact Honeywell Technical Assistance if the status occurs 1 Check the controller name and network name of the peer device to assure that they match that specific PDE block 2 Check that the IP addresses of the peer devices are all within the range of the IP mask 3 Check that the peer devices have the same IP subnet mask See Network parameters for IP mask setting 1 Reset the controller to restart the Ethernet IO hardware and reassign processor IO mapping 2 Contact Honeywell Technical Assistance if the problem exists 1 If this status persists during run time check that the peer device is properly connected and that the control name and network name is correct 2 Check that the IP masks of all peer devices to assure that all IP addresses are within the same subnet 3 Check that all external network components such as switches and routers allow passing of UDP packets on port 502 4 Check that the peer device is powered on and is in RUN mode 247 Diagnostics Modbus Master Serial Port Diagnostics Connections 7 Diagnostics Network Setup Controller network Rack 1 monitor block s Correct the setup problem Error names determined on COMPORT DIAG
304. r the value To delete a signal tag click on a tag and click Delete Storage Storage Interval Intervals From the Storage Interval drop down menu select a storage interval of from 2 seconds to 30 minutes When Data Storage is enabled samples will be taken at the interval selected here Refer to Storage Intervals in Storage Conventions Data Type This enable signal turns storage on and off for trends Enable Signals From the pull down menu select 86 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Data Storage Point Log Storage Configuration NONE Trend Storage Enable is started stopped only through the operator interface s Data Storage Control Menu defaults to Enable on configuration download or ANY DIGITAL TAG Trend Storage is started stopped only through the on off state of the selected Digital Signal It will not appear on the operator interface s data Storage Control Menu For detailed information concerning Trend Storage Enable refer to Trend Storage Enable Conditions Storage Mode From the pull down menu select a Storage Mode Refer to Data Storage Conventions for mode definitions Rollover Click this box to allow data storage to continue collecting data in a circular storage mode where the oldest data is discarded as new data is collected Clear this box to allow data storage to stop collecting data when the file is full You can configure a Warning Level for Disk Full
305. ration A jog function allows a single jump to a designated segment number through a digital input to the State Switch block Labels Main Output Labels Eight character labels and four character engineering units are provided for each Setpoint plus a decimal point selection Auxiliary Output Labels Eight character labels and four character engineering units are provided for each Setpoint plus a decimal point selection Event Labels Eight character labels are also provided for the Digital Event block Assigning these labels first will aid you in the setpoint schedule configuration process These labels will appear in the configuration dialog boxes Setpoint Schedule Overview Introduction Setpoint Schedule configuration provides a quick and easy way to create edit and save up to 20 different Setpoint Schedules for the Setpoint Scheduler SPS control blocks in the configuration An operator can interact with the configured schedules through the Setpoint Program Operate display at the operator interface or operation can be directed through integral actions connected by Softwiring functions Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 165 September 2013 Setpoint Schedulers Setpoint Schedule Overview Setpoint Scheduler Display Configuration ATTENTION Before you proceed with the Setpoint Schedule assign the appropriate labels for the Setpoint Scheduler displays Assigning these labels first will aid you in the schedul
306. re are more function blocks that can be displayed in the list box a vertical scrollbar will be displayed e Ifthe dialog is accessed through the function block graphic context menu or the worksheet toolbox context menu the corresponding function block will be selected in the dialog e Ifthe dialog is accessed through the edit menu worksheet toolbar or the worksheet context menu and a function block has been selected on an active function block diagram worksheet that function block will be selected in the dialog e Otherwise the first function box in the list will be selected in the dialog Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 109 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Execution Order Function Block Execution Order x Multiple function blocks may be selected using the Shift and Ctrl keps A mgle tunctior Black ora single group of consecutive tunchon blacks may be moved quickl By using the Up Diowr arrows or by using Drag and Drop Multiple non consecutive functon blocks may be made consecutive using the Make Blocks Consecutive Button Process aafety Block Tag Description Safety Al V104 Cancel Safety A0105 Safety DI 106 Safety DOM OF eae Safety A118 onseculive Safety 0119 Safety D120 Safety DOT Safety OMOFFT8 OMOFT28 Belt Orive Motor Process FF0117 FF0117 Valve Position Process BOlT09 Process apain Process WOTT16 Process CARB 29 CARB 29 Process OAOIF
307. rm details in the Dialog Box 8 Click OK Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 103 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Alarm Details Alarm Details Select a tag in the Selected Tags area of the Alarm Group Configuration dialog box then click on Alarm Details button The Alarm Details dialog box opens and enables you to enter details for the selected tag The block number and output number are listed across the banner The Tag number and descriptor is listed in field below the banner Details include Alarm Priority used for routing alarms to Email which Email addresses get which alarms Each of 3 E mail address may have any all alarm priorities assigned to it 2 Low Priority Alarm 3 Medium Priority Alarm 4 High Priority Alarm 5 Emergency Alarm select from the drop down menu E Mail Notification of alarms by priority on a point by point basis check the box to allow Email notification The E mail will be sent if an alarm occurs on a point configured to send E mail to any all of the 3 E mail addresses that have the associated alarm priority assigned Detailed Text appears on the Operator Interface enter 2 lines of detailed text 24 characters max for each line Trigger Direction Trigger on ON state means alarm goes ON when triggered by rising edge the discrete goes off to on Trigger on OFF state means alarm goes ON when triggered by falling edge the discrete goes
308. roduct or run a particular batch This selection opens the Recipe Pool dialog box and allows viewing adding editing and printing of Recipe details You can save the selected recipe item to a file open a recipe file and insert it into the pool and download the selected recipe item to a controller s recipe pool Setpoint Profiles Setpoint Program Profile configuration provides a quick and easy way to create edit and save different ramp soak setpoint profiles for the Setpoint Programmer SPP control blocks in the configuration This selection opens the Setpoint Profile Pool dialog box and allows viewing adding editing and printing of Setpoint Profile details You can save the selected SPP item to a file open a SPP file and insert it into the pool and download the selected SPP item to a controller s Setpoint Profiles pool Setpoint Schedules Setpoint Schedule configuration provides a quick and easy way to create edit and save different Setpoint Schedules for the Setpoint Scheduler SPS control blocks in the configuration This selection opens the Setpoint Schedule Pool dialog box and allows viewing adding editing and printing of Setpoint Schedules details You can save the selected SPS item to a file open a SPS file and insert it into the pool and download the selected SPS item to a controller s Setpoint Schedule pool Sequences Sequence configuration provides a series of inter related events used to start up or shu
309. roller and Revision Click OK and a new Designer Configuration file is listed in the File Browser and a new diagram is placed in the Main Window area New Recipes Select the Recipe tab On the tab click on a radio button to select one of the following Recipes Variables Setpoint Profile Setpoint Schedule Sequence Click OK The associated Editor dialog box will appear and a new Opened Recipe File is listed in the File Browser Refer to the specific Recipe type for specifics New Data Storage Legacy feature for 559 1042 OI Select the Data Storage tab On the tab click on a radio button to create a new Data Storage File or al a or OPEN Displays the Open dialog box From the Files of Type drop down menu select a file type Hybrid Control Designer Configuration cde Hybrid Control Designer Configuration cde All Hybrid Control Designer Files Recipes rcp Profiles prf Schedules sch Sequences seq Data Storage dss HC Controller Backup File chk UMCS00 Version 5 0 Files fod Navigate to folder where the file is stored Click on the desired file name then click OPEN or ry or Upload Configuration The Upload File dialog box will appear A temporary file name will be place in the File Name box Check the current connection This will indicate over which communications port the upload will occur Change the current connection if necessary prior to b
310. rollers use unique network names Furnace 1 and Furnace 2 Network name Controller name are bound to the IP address of each controller Finally use a local name alias to identify each controller to the end user This local name is a convenient name such as for displays on the PC it is not referred to for actual communication Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 143 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Network Parameters 144 a stage furnace Fumace 1 Stage 1 Controller Network Mame Furnace Controller name Larry Local name F15Stage 1 Stage 2 Controller Network Mame Fumacev l Controller name Curly Local name F15tage2 Stage 3 Controller Netwyvork Mame Fumacet Controller name Moe Local name FlStages PO monitoring both fumaces stage furnace Furnace 2 Each stage has its awn controller Each stage has its own controller stage 1 Controller Network Mame Furnace Controller name Larry Local name F2Stagel stage 4 Controller Network Mame Furnacet Controller name Curly Local name Festagez Stage 3 Controller Network Mame Furnacet Controller name Moe Local name F4 Stages HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Set Controller Time Designer Version 4 0 and earlier This window lets you set your controller s date and time Note Use of Daylight Saving or Network Time Server requires Version 4 1 CO P
311. rotected click on Protect to allow new password entry or change current password Also you can change or remove worksheet protection How to Add Worksheet Protection Introduction The HC900 Process Control Designer provides an optional configuration Worksheet protection New files default to No Protection Worksheets can be protected on individual basis where all protected worksheets use the same password A user has limited access to protected worksheets The HC900 Process Control Designer provides an optional configuration Worksheet protection New files default to No Protection Worksheets can be protected on individual basis where all protected worksheets use the same password A user has limited access to protected worksheets Protected Worksheet Type View Worksheet Edit Worksheet Controller YES NO Display YES NO Function Blocks NO NO Modbus Map YES NO 44 HG900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 File Management How to Add Worksheet Protection Protected Worksheets e can be unlocked Protection is disabled but not removed from the file If you save the file the worksheet protection will be locked when the file is reopened e can have their passwords changed In order to change a password you will need to know the current password e Can have their protection removed Removing the protection is permanent If you save the file the worksheet will not be protected when the file
312. rs and Sequencers As recipe memory usage increases less memory is available for other parts of your configuration such as function blocks Recipes A recipe variables is a list of Variables with settings that define the ingredients needed Variables to make a product or run a particular batch This selection opens the Recipe Pool dialog box and allows viewing adding editing and printing of Recipe details You can save the selected recipe item to a file open a recipe file and insert it into the pool and download the selected recipe item to a controller s recipe pool Setpoint Profiles Setpoint Program Profile configuration provides a quick and easy way to create edit and save different ramp soak setpoint profiles for the Setpoint Programmer SPP control blocks in the configuration This selection opens the Setpoint Profile Pool dialog box and allows viewing adding editing and printing of Setpoint Profile details You can save the selected SPP item to a file open a SPP file and insert it into the pool and download the selected SPP item to a controllers Setpoint Profiles pool Setpoint Setpoint Schedule configuration provides a quick and easy way to create edit and save Schedules different Setpoint Schedules for the Setpoint Scheduler SPS control blocks in the configuration This selection opens the Setpoint Schedule Pool dialog box and allows viewing adding editing and printing of Setpoint Schedules details You c
313. rview Setpoint Schedulers Setpoint Scheduler Overview Setpoint Scheduler blocks may be configured for multi setpoint control Comprising the suite is a Master block SPS Auxiliary Setpoint block SPSA Event Decoder block SPEV State Switch Block STSW and State Flags block STEL The Master block supports ramp or soak outputs operating on a common time base It accepts one PV for each setpoint Setpoint guarantee is provided for the master SPS block setpoints with a single symmetrical value for each setpoint output You can assign a Failsafe value for each setpoint The Auxiliary block supports soak only outputs The Event block supports event outputs A single schedule may include segments and auxiliary block data The schedules are stored in the controller s memory Setpoint Schedules offer the same operating modes and digital controls as setpoint programs On line editing of a running schedule is supported through dedicated operator interface displays Setpoint Guarantee Setpoint guarantee is provided for the master block setpoints with a single symmetrical value for each setpoint output Actions for the guarantee soak may be set on a per segment basis for OFF high setpoint deviation low setpoint deviation or both high and low setpoint deviations Segments Each segment of the Setpoint Scheduler allows entry of a next segment recycle location This function allows unlimited recycle nesting and continuous recycle ope
314. s Control Designer User Guide 23 September 2013 User Interface Monitor Menu Menu Selection a Also available from FBD worksheet toolbar Monitor Menu a LF eC Enters or exits monitor mode While in monitor mode edits to the configuration Monitor Mode cannot be made If entering monitor mode selecting this menu item opens the Enter Monitor Mode dialog box Monitor Toolbar The Monitor Toolbar toggles each monitor window listed below Set Update Rate You can specify the monitor update rate that determines how often data is collected from the controller during monitoring Set Logic State Colors Watch Summary Window Controller Diagnostics Rack Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics Modbus Master Ports Diagnostics Monitor Function Block Shortcut CTRL M You can select a color scheme for indicating the on off status of digital wires digital signal tags page connectors and logic inversion Toggles the Watch Summary Window that lets you view groups of related data such as I O and Signal Tags Toggles the Controller Diagnostics Window that lets you view the controller parameters and values Toggles the Rack Diagnostics window that lets you view the Rack Diagnostics Expansion I O Comm Diagnostics except C30 CPU and the I O Module parameters and indicators Toggles the Configuration Port Diagnostics window that lets you view the Configuration Port parameters and values Serial Port S1
315. s Menus toolbars and worksheet window plus other items that help you navigate through the application The Main Menu is a top level menu for this application You select highlight a menu and then choose a command from the drop down menu Choosing the command carries out the action Status Bar The status bar is located along the bottom of the window It indicates information about the current window the time the date download upload monitoring and network information This status bar can be displayed or not displayed from the View menu Tab A configuration is built using three main worksheet types Controller Display and Function Blocks Select the desired tab located at the bottom of the configuration window for type of worksheet There are also Tabs in the Function Block Diagrams that allow you to navigate around the multiple FBD Worksheets Toolbox The Worksheet Toolbox located on the lower left side of the Worksheet is a dockable window and lists all the function block by category separated by fast and normal scan tabs at the base of the toolbox You can drag and drop function blocks onto FBD worksheets A Configuration Tab lists all configured items Click on any item to jump to it Trace Window Helps you find problems with soft wire and signal connections between Function Blocks The Watch Summary window lets you monitor the following groups of data from the controller Signal Variables I O Ol Display Groups
316. s Worksheet Restore Controller Information General properties Back Up Controller Information ae HET WORKI029 Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 151 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Manually Write Database to Flash Network E1 Network E2 ports Back Up Controller Information X Seral 51 Serial 52 General Properties Metwork E1 Network E2 The Controller has the following Network properties Lead IF Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Close Manually Write Database to Flash Causes the configuration and user settings of aC70R CPU to be written Saved to the controller s FLASH memory User settings include for example PID tuning parameters PP Output calibrations and changes to recipes setpoint profiles sequences schedules These settings are normally saved in battery backed RAM but if there is a power failure and the battery dies these settings would be lost By allowing an on demand write of the database to FLASH these settings will be retained and available immediately upon power up If using redundant CPUs C70R the database is saved to the FLASH of both Lead and Reserve controllers On demand write to flash memory is not available for C30 and C50 CPU types 152 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Diagnostics Diagnostics g ER l m qa 4 has menu selections on a drop down menu It let
317. s let you customize their Modbus address Function Block Address Addresses identify physical connection points for field wiring to Input Output modules Assign a unique address to each I O block See page 4 User Assigned Tag Names Some blocks have unique user assigned tag names They are used to identify values for operator displays When configuring displays you will be able to select from a list of tag name groups that you have assigned See Configure Tag Order Enter a Name in the Tag Name field Tag names are automatically displayed on the block in capital letters Function Block Parameters All Function Block Parameters are values that influence the function block s execution To enter a parameter e Click the cursor on the desired parameter field to highlight it e Key in the desired value make a selection from any drop down menus or select a radio button if necessary e Click OK when configuration is complete 134 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Function Block Diagrams Overview Function Block Diagrams Overview Function Block diagrams let you build your control safety strategy graphically right on the Designer Window It provides a full complement of SAMA style symbols that we call Function Blocks that can be softwired to each other It also includes signal tag generation capability for resident control data that can be linked to displays and other software programs
318. s prior to the cut will be broken Split dangling soft wires using signal tags Select this to restore the pre cut connections using automatically created signal tags The function blocks will again be connected not with soft wires but with signal tags Split dangling soft wires using page connectors available in configuration revisions 2 x or higher Select this to restore the pre cut connections using automatically created page connectors The function blocks will again be connected not with soft wires but with page connectors The last two choices are selectable only if sufficient quantities of signal tags or page connectors remain ATTENTION The automatically created signal tags or page connectors can sometimes overlap or hide the original connectors so check behind them don t assume the previous connectors were replaced Examples Before the cut AANDA2O 7 ca o a D EENE te i f ORAZ gj ea l i I g i I I ANDI21 7 wane ene nneee Dr E E FBD Configuration 1 FBC Configuration 2 After pasting on a different worksheet and Delete dangling soft wires AND120 4 oe oa ANDI E D D FBD Configuration 1 FED Configuration 1 FBD Configuration 2 ORS g p g Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 97 September 2013 Function Block Diagram FBD Worksheet Resolve Dangling Soft Wires After pasting on a different worksheet and Split dangling soft wires using signal tags AND
319. s you select from a list of diagnostic windows for various controller connections The controller must be in Monitor mode Select Monitor Mode from the Monitor menu or click on the Monitor mode icon on the Main toolbar Controller Diagnostics displays controller status and diagnostic parameters Rack Diagnostics displays the Rack Diagnostic Summary dialog box Information is for Rack I O expansion except C30 CPU and Module diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics select a port from the drop down list Serial Port S1 Serial Port S2 Network Port Expansion Rack Port except C30 CPU Host Connections Peer to Peer connections Modbus Master Port Diagnostics displays status of the Modbus Master port S1 RS232 or S2 RS485 if so configured Forced Blocks displays a list of Function Blocks by block ID that have a forced output pin Redundancy select from the drop down list Redundancy System Redundancy Link Lead CPU Reserve CPU Scanner 2 Link Calibrate Modules Overview The controller 1 O modules are factory calibrated to 0 1 accuracy But if greater accuracy is required you can calibrate the Al and AO modules using the Process Control Utilities on line connected to the controller You can also calibrate the Position Proportional Output block The calibration of the PPO block is similar to that of the Al and AO except that the calibration values are stored as part of the block s configuration not on
320. se Controller Action User Action lf scanners are in the configuration see Expansion Rack Link Diagnostics below See Expansion Rack Link Diagnostic below If a scanner 2 in the configuration is not mm Diagnosti communicating then a Summary dialog box communication diagnostic Same as above Is posted for that rack none Refer to the Expansion I O Comm Diagnostic 287 Refer to the Expansion Summary dialog box Same as above Lead CPU is operating normally using the I O Port Ato communicate with the Scanner Racks Lead CPU is operating normally using the I O Port B to communicate with the Scanner Racks Redundancy Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators Scanner 2 link Scanner 2s not in the configuration have no effect on the status Not in Configuration No Scanner 2s in the N A N A configuration Expansion Rack Good N A N A Link Diagnostics Data Link Failure Hardware Failure Port A B Cable Mismatch The ratio of the number of data link errors and the number of good messages exceeds a certain threshold The expansion I O port s hardware is indicating a failure At least one Scanner 2 has its A and B ports swapped with the Lead and Reserve See the Rack Comm Diagnostics parameter in the Expansion I O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box See the Rack Comm Diagnostics parameter in the Expansion I O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box See the Rack Comm Diagnost
321. sor is in the edit box Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 131 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Changing the Default Annotation Attributes Changing the Default Annotation Attributes You can change the default font characteristics for Text Annotations These include e Font Size e Color e Bold italic underline Settings Configuration Procedure From the Edit menu select Options Select a font size from the dropdown menu 6 10 12 or 16 points Select a color from the drop down menu black red green or blue Click on a button to select Bold Italics or Underline or all three Click OK to save the selections for default text annotations 2 ON 2 ee A 132 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Select Default Annotation Attributes The Default Text Attributes dialog box opens Revision 15 September 2013 Conventions Drag and Drop Conventions Drag and Drop To add a function block to a controller configuration select the desired block from the menu tree Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the block over to the diagram on the right hand side of the screen Position the block and then release the left mouse button to drop the item into place Accessing Context Sensitive Help While in a Controller configuration click the right mouse button to allow access to Topic Help Monitor functions Cut Copy Paste functions and Properties Dialog Boxes
322. ss Control Designer User Guide 51 September 2013 PC Comm Ports and Connections PC Network Port Set Up For Controller Access 2 The Network Port Dialog Box will Open Network Port Properties x To ADD a Network Port Click on ADD and enter the properties in the Device IP Address fields Honeywell HES00 Controller To EDIT a Network Port Click a device click on EDIT and enter the Delete properties in the Device IP Address fields ar Add To Delete a Network address Click on a device in the Network address list then click Delete button The address will be deleted E 3 To do a Loopback test for a specific BUTLER address click on the Loopback button sab OF Cancel Network Device Device Type Device Mame 64 char Honeywell HES00 Controller Network Port E1 4 For Advanced Network Setup click on Advanced Network Setup the MORE gt gt button at the bottom of the Retiies T _ Network Port Properties dialog box Number of Retries before Abort Enter a Retry Delay 10 decimal value Timeout hso Retry Delay Enter a value in milliseconds Timeout Enter a value in milliseconds Note It is not recommended that you set the values lower than those shown in the dialog box since it may cause some communications operations to fail Press Reset button to reset these fields to their default values m m Reset 52 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013
323. sses Modbus addressability of principal function blocks Modbus addressability of principal function blocks Available in fixed Available in custom Function Block Category Filter map map rroo session Comments Noi Yee Yes wooo O es Position Proportional Output NA No N Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 267 September 2013 Modbus Register Addresses Fixed Modbus Map Fixed Modbus Map Overview Certain items in your configuration are automatically assigned Modbus addresses in the fixed Modbus map These items include signal tags variables and principal function blocks like loops and setpoint programmers See page 267 As each item is added to your configuration it is assigned to the first lowest available Modbus address within the range reserved for that item type If you delete an item from your configuration it is removed from that Modbus address and that address becomes available for another item Also available is a range of 1000 addresses 45057 for assigning user defined signal tags and variables to any address or multiple addresses Within these 1000 addresses the data type of each signal tag or variable can be changed for example from float 32 to integer 16 Access To access the fixed Modbus register map to add or edit an address select the main menu Edit item Edit Fixed Modbus Register Map or right click on a configured signal variable or function block The following tabs are pres
324. st Parameter Value Possible Cause Controller Action Message Power Supply Unknown Redundant P S is not present Power Supply PS 1 Failed PS 1 LED is OFF No rack communication Single power supply configuration Redundant Power Backplane not detected No AC Mains on PS 1 Determine amp correct cause of communication failure If under power I O will switch to failsafe values Loss of Comms Restore rack operation If not powered un powered outputs Restore AC main power reset breaker Loss of AC mains Bad power supply Replace Power supply Replace scanner2 Failed scanner2 Status reported No action required if single power supply Rack continues to rack function properly Status reported If dual power Rack continues to supplies installed function properly Replace Redundant Power Backplane Replace rack backplane Replace Scannerz Restore AC main power reset breaker Diagnostic reported Rack continues to function properly Status posted Failed Power Replace Power Supply Supply PS 1 LED is ON Power Supply PS 2 Failed PS 2 LED is OFF Failed Redundant Power Backplane detection circuit Failed rack backplane status signal Failed Scanner2 status input No AC Main on PS 2 Requires unit shutdown Replace Redundant Power Backplane Requires unit shutdown Replace rack backplane Requires unit shutdown Replace S
325. st either by saving a backup of your configuration or by Exporting a Modbus report Or you can click on the Undo button in the main toolbar 17 Toolbar d Lock unlock Worksheet Further information For details on Modbus parameters see the HC900 Process Control Communications User Guide document number 51 52 25 111 Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 275 September 2013 Modbus Register Addresses Adding function block parameters to custom map Adding function block parameters to custom map Two methods to add parameters to the map Method 1 In the Configuration tab in the Worksheet Toolbox window click and drag a function block over to a starting address register in the custom map Hybrid Control esigaer HC OOO 070 Rov 4 39 Hicd_Contigi FP Gat tee Mignon Bice Wini Bote x CO aw g His a one i ib al m Ube Contignateory ihe Film BP HCA 4k Hed Conte F E m Croll EJ Dipo Custom Modbus Map Hi Ej Fuig RE Diar m Upean Hecipe Files oplaca map sath lose pen Data Siar age Filer Select aTi Teamcerdl on Ent Pasltione Noib map ami S Opas Pania Fies Shon ogib Ada er I Heabel a Caseurnal han Fia Car na I a a e E ae ame H Drag and drop a configured block to a starting address in the custom map ajay _ HCS00 C70 Riv dH Hid carm iis Caa asin E Alemin EJ Sera Sobers
326. st of possible messages and resolutions Also see Failure Modes Restore the configuration from the backup copy you previously made Failure Modes If there is a download failure indication on the Download File dialog box e DO NOT cycle the controller power and DO NOT remove the battery e Check the physical connections e Check for power failures e Restart the download from the beginning Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 41 September 2013 File Management Download Firmware Error Messages Download Firmware Error Messages This is a list of possible error messages that could be displayed as the result of a Download Firmware failure Instrument must be in PROGRAM LOCK mode to perform this operation Instrument s battery missing or dead Missing loader binary file What to do Put controller in program lock mode before starting code download Replace controller battery before starting code download Could not open the loader file Make sure the loader s19 file is in the same directory as the firmware file to be downloaded Could not open firmware update file Programming is not required the downloaded version matches the code in the controller Make sure the firmware file is present in the directory selected The version in the controller matches the version that was downloaded The downloaded file is corrupted Failed to complete file transfer Controller is not responding code
327. stics The Statistics button on the Current PC to Controller Connections Settings will launch the Communications Error Summary dialog box The summary statistics are shown below Communication Error Summary Number of Comm Athernpte Receive Overrun Errors API errors Link Errors ogo oo oe A A Physical Errors See the table below for corrective action for each communication error Click on Reset to change the statistics to 0 a a Number of Comm Attempts Count of messages sent down to a Controller Receive Overrun Errors A count of Controller resoonse messages that were longer than expected Make sure you have the latest version of HC Designer and that it is compatible with the Controller version Contact Technical Support if the problem continues API Errors The number of Application Errors are typically errors reported by the Controller Common reasons for this error Instrument responded to the wrong message Check that there isn t more than one device with the same IP or Modbus address trying to communicate with the Controller Controller communication port is in use by other device s Instrument responded with an error code Take note of any error message dialog boxes that may popup while communicating with the Controller e g While Monitoring Attempt any corrective action based on the reported errors Contact Technical Support if the problem continues Link Errors Count of messages t
328. t Status section 4 The Instrument Status section of the dialog will display the results of the test 5 If the 0 calibration was successful the 100 button is now available Measure the actual output of the AO at the terminal block with a meter and enter the measurement into 100 Measured Click on Cal 100 button to calibrate the 100 measurement 6 If the Cal 100 was successful the Save Cal button is then available Click on Save Cal in order to save the current set of calibrations for the selected AO 7 If either of the tests fail the Instrument Status section will display an AO Calibration Failed message 8 Click on Close Note Click on Restore Factory Calibration button to do same NOTE Refer to the Calibration section in the HC900 Installation and User Guide for additional Hardware details Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 155 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet PPO Block Calibration Restore Factory Calibration To restore the Factory Calibration Click on the Restore Factory Calibration button on the dialog box The Restore Factory Calibration dialog is displayed Enter the Rack Module and Channel number for the desired calibration Click on Restore to initiate the task The status of the restore will be displayed in the Instrument Status section of the dialog Click on Close to close the dialog when the restore is complete PPO Block Calibration Introduction The Calibrate PPO Block ta
329. t down a unit process or a series of timed and process measurement dependent events that are executed to produce a final product This selection opens the Sequence Pool dialog box and allows viewing adding editing and printing of Sequence details You can save the selected SEQ item to a file open a SEQ file and insert it into the pool and download the selected SEQ item to a controller s Sequence pool Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 169 September 2013 Recipe Variables Introduction Recipe Variables Introduction Each recipe consists of Variables and carries its own unique recipe number and name for identification The names are descriptive references aliases and uniqueness is not enforced Unique names are recommended to avoid operator confusion The selected Variables were assigned during the Function Block Diagram Configuration It is possible to edit the setting of any recipe Variables through the Recipe Setup display at the operator interface This means that an operator can adjust individual ingredient amounts in the recipe but the ingredients item s Variable Name the order of the ingredients and the recipe s number and name are under configuration control The recipe variable list is configured using the Designer application An operator will be able to change individual item values through the Operator Interface For automatic loading of a setpoint profile in addition to other variables
330. t one of the following destinations Email Ol archive or Ol Display e You can select the events from a list of all digital tags e A digital signal may be either an Event or an Alarm but not both Procedure 1 Enter a Title for the Event list in the Title editbox 2 From the drop down menu below the Title editbox select the type of tags you want to display on the tag name list 3 For Safety enabled configurations only From the Safety Filter drop down menu select the type of tags you want to display on the tag name list 4 Click on each tag name you want included in the list 5 Click on ADD The selected tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in the Selected Tags List 6 Select a tag in the list then click on Event Details button to enter details for the tag selected Details include E Mail Notification Store to O I Archive List Display on O I Trigger Direction for ON or OFF state 7 Click OK Execution Order Execution Order is the order in which function blocks are executed in the control strategy There is a separate execution order for each of the two available scan rates Normal Scan and Fast Scan Each function block within a given scan rate is assigned a relative Block Execution Order number Blocks are executed in increasing order with blocks having lower execution order numbers being executed before those with higher execution order numbers The Block Execution Order of each
331. t sub categories related to the items contained on the function block diagrams of the configuration The available report options for configurations with a Fixed Modbus Address Map are shown in the first figure below The available report options for configurations with a Custom Modbus Address Map are shown in the second figure below Print Report s Select a report category to print Detaled Function Block Report Summary Furiction Block F User Defined Signals and Variables Signal Tags Variables Signal Tags and Variables 256 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Print Report Select a report category to print Report All FBD Worksheets FBD Worksheets Block Parameters Detailed Function Block Report Summary Function Block Report User Defined Signals and Variables Signal Tags Variables September 2013 Al FBO Worksheets FBO Worksheets Block Parameters Modbus Partiton Summary Function Block Report Where Used File Statistes Description Not a traditional report Prints out the graphical representation of all Function Block Diagrams in the configuration Not a traditional report Prints out the graphical representation of a single Function Block Diagrams from the configuration Hovering over this menu option will display a sub menu s which allows selection of the desired function block diagram worksheet Sh
332. t tab then Select Display Group from the drop down menu Analog signal tags digital signal tags analog variables and digital variables will be displayed in the Selected Tags field From the Selected Tags List drop down menu select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list The default selection is ALL Enter the group title Use any mix of numbers letters and spaces Select a Tag Name from the Select Tag List 70 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Display Worksheet Alarm Details Click on ADD the selected signal tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in the Selected Tags field OR Select a position in the Selected Tags field then click on INSERT The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required Repeat the selection for up to 7 tags for each group Click OK Alarm Details Select a tag in the Selected Tags area of the Alarm Group Configuration dialog box then click on Alarm Details button The Alarm Details dialog box opens and enables you to enter details for the selected tag The block number and output number are listed across the banner The Tag number and descriptor is listed in field below the banner Details include Alarm Priority used for routing alarms to Email which Email addresses get which alarms Each of 3 E mail address may have any all alarm priorities assigne
333. t with the configured profiles through the Setpoint Program Operate display at the operator interface or operation can be directed through integral actions connected by Softwiring functions Configuration Functions Basic functions that you will use to configure a Setpoint Profile e Create Edit Setpoint Profile Under File New or File Open you can access the Profile Editor to create or edit a setpoint profile e Setpoint Profile Pool The SP Profile Pool lets you add or delete a profile on a list of configured profiles Through two menus on the dialog box you can set the properties for each profile and set up or edit the information for each segment that make up a profile e Setpoint Profile Properties Setpoint Profile Properties is information for the profile that is entered on five specific tabs It includes Text General Loop Jog and Start Restart e Setpoint Profile Setup EDIT Setpoint Profile Setup or Edit consists of configuring each segment of the profile and assigning the ramps and soaks and associated information Values Time Auxiliary output Guaranteed Hold and Events in the order required to complete your SP program Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 163 September 2013 Set Point Programming Setpoint Program Configuration Overview This page has been intentionally left blank 164 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Setpoint Schedulers Setpoint Scheduler Ove
334. ta ve C70 R 40 worksheet 8 14 2013 6 43 PMI HC Designer Docu Documents Ls ne ConfigS from CONTROLLER 6 29 2015 4 53 PM HCDesiqner Docu ial Mail ie Config from CONTROLLER a 29 2015 5 16 PMI HC Designer Docu t Controller crash sequence_safety_ 020911 9 5 2013 8 15 PM HCDesiqner Docu jE Computer ve Fast Safety Block invalid status 7 30 2013 2 20 PM HC Designer Docu i Local Beck Co 4 eens lL Ged j File name ee aT ite eee Designer Software Files ccbe Designer Software Files cde HO900 C30 Rev 6 0 Files cde Hide Folders HC900 C305 Rev 6 0x Files cde HC900 C50 Rev 6 0 Files cde HOSO0 CS05 Rev 60x Files cde HCS00 C 0 Rev 6 0 Files cde HCS00 C70S Rev 60x Files cde HOO00 C 5 Rev 6 0 Files cde HOS00 C755 Rev 6 0 Files cde All Files 2 Type in the new file name in that field 3 From the drop down menu in the Save as Type field select the configuration type depending on the controller you have 4 lf there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0 and there are no I O blocks with unassigned I O addresses then the data is saved automatically and the rest of the steps may be skipped 5 If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0 and or there are I O blocks with unassigned I O addresses the Process Control Designer will notify you of the situation and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs and
335. tal output of a logic block such as for a DI or DO block Note A function block input is never forced Some blocks i e Loop Blocks do not have a forceable output It is not possible to force unforce function block outputs from the Operator Interface Variables which are normally set to 0 on download of a new configuration or a change in configuration can have their output value changed on line You can also preset the value of a variable using an initialization procedure via function blocks or by setting the Initial Value field on the variable s property page You can also display a list of blocks that are presently being forced See Forced Blocks Window ATTENTION All forced outputs are cleared by a CONTROLLER COLD START CAUTION During Live Monitoring especially fast logic it is possible to see transient states where the block output is inconsistent with its input values This occurs because it is possible for the input values and outputs values to be taken from different controller execution cycles Therefore either the viewed inputs or outputs may be older SOLUTION Recognize this possibility when interpreting results Use forcing if necessary to create and assess Static conditions Forcing an Output Do an Upload to make sure the file is current Enter Monitor Mode Select the Monitor Mode icon from the Main Toolbar or select Monitor Mode from the Monitor menu The FBD background turns yellow 196 HC900 Process Contr
336. tatistics Schema is a database No revision code used by the controller Ol and the software to ensure compatibility File Statistics Display Reports 258 Clicking on the Displays button provides a drop down menu which allows the selection of 4 reports related to displays as shown below As noted above this category is not available starting with revision 6 0 General Settings Help Screens Assigned Display Keys Data Storage Settings Report General Settings Help Screens Assigned Display Keys Data Storage Description SIL Filtering Shows Operator Interface settings Security startup No display filenames Shows Operator Interface help screens No Shows Operator Interface displays and contents for each No display button Shows data storage settings trend group data points No Revision 15 September 2013 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Reports Print Report Settings batch enable etc Recipe Reports Clicking on the Recipes button provides a drop down menu which allows the selection of 4 reports related to recipes as shown below Print Report x Select a report category to print Select a Recipe Variables Select a Set Point Profile Select a Set Point Schedule Select a Sequence Report Description SIL Filtering Select a Shows contents of the selected recipe variables No Recipe descriptions Variab
337. te Places the contents of the clipboard containing Process or Safety block diagram items onto the Process or Safety block diagram at the location determined by the blinking insertion point caret This command is unavailable if Toolbar the clipboard is empty Cut and pasted items maintain their links e g display Shortcut CTRL V references Modbus addresses recipes they are not deleted and pasted as a new copy The only exception to this is if the item is pasted into a diagram ona different configuration If you paste a cut not copied function block and soft wires to the same or different worksheet in the same configuration the soft wires will be dangling unconnected and you are asked to specify how you want to resolve dangling soft wires Deletes the currently selected item on the function block diagram Append Process Worksheet Adds anew Process or Safety block diagram You will see Append Process Append Safety Worksheet Worksheet or Append Safety Worksheet depending on which tab is currently active If the Controller or Utilities tab is currently active this command will be grayed out If selected when enabled a new worksheet will be created and a new sub tab for it will appear at the bottom of the diagram window The new diagram reference will be placed in the File Browser Click on the diagram name in the File Browser to edit the name Delete Process Worksheet Deletes the selected Function Block Diagram and
338. tegory Tabs to display the Controller Utilities worksheet HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Forced Blocks Window 2 Click on the E button to bring up the Controller Diagnostics submenu 3 Select Forced Blocks to launch the Forced Blocks window Unforcing Block Outputs There are two versions of the Forced Blocks dialog window depending on whether or not the controller being monitored is one that supports the SIL Safety standard For SIL compliant controllers the version shown on the left below will be displayed For non SIL compliant controllers the version shown on the right below will be displayed x Clear ALL Forces Clear PROCESS Forces inthe Seleckedlteni p003 DI 106 Al 105 Both versions of the window have a list box displaying a list of all of the function blocks that currently have forced outputs Function blocks located on a Safety worksheet have a yellow background Function blocks located on a Process worksheet have a white background If no function blocks have forced outputs the word NONE is displayed If new forces are added or removed from individual function block monitor windows the list will be updated dynamically Both versions of the window have a Clear ALL Forces button that allows all forced outputs to be cleared with one click For Safety enabled controllers there are additional Clear PROCESS Forces and Clear SAFETY Forces bu
339. tep when time expires on any step in the sequence including steps that current step Enter 0 to stop the have been previously executed sequence after current step expires and to hold the outputs Event Signal 1 The event signal is a digital signal defined in the sequencer block When Event Signal 1 signal transitions from FALSE to TRUE the sequence will jump to the step defined in Event 1 Next Step Event 1 Next Step 4 Off to on rising edge transition of Event Enter a value for Event 1 Next Signal 1 will cause the sequence to advance Step to the step specified here Event Signal 2 The event signal is a digital signal defined in the sequencer block When Event Signal 2 signal transitions from FALSE to TRUE the sequence will jump to the step defined in Event 2 Next Step Event 2 Next Step An off to on rising edge transition of Event Enter a value for Event 2 Next Signal 2 will cause the sequence to advance Step to the step specified here Advance Next Allows you to select an appropriate action for Enter an Advance Next Step Step the manual advance OI action or function value block digital advance input Aux Value Enter an analog output value associated with Enter an analog output value each state Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 187 September 2013 Sequences Sequence Properties Sequence Properties Introduction This function lets you set the properties for the s
340. ter port RS485 converter associated slave used check its blocks have their read power pins frozen to the last switch jumper value read settings and polarity HW Failure The DUART is Same as above Replace CPU failing to operate module properly Network Port Diagnostics The Designer provides live monitoring of the Ethernet Network Port The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start up and during on line operation 1 Select Controller Ports Diagnostics from the Monitor drop down menu then select Network Port from the list provided or from the Monitor toolbar E This window can be launched from the Utilities Worksheet 2 The Network Port Diagnostic Summary dialog box will appear It shows Port Status Diagnostics Statistics and parameters for the Ethernet Network Port The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list 4 Click on X to exit box Refer to Network Port Diagnostics Status Indicators for status indications possible cause and actions to correct the problem Network Port Diagnostics Port Diagnostic Controller Name Network Hame UMECIOO TEST Local Alias AATS CONTROLLER MAC Address O0 40 4F FF FF FO Network IF Address 164 145 185 57 Subnet Mask 256 258 268 0 Gateway Address 164 145 185 1 Outgoing Email SMTP Server Address 129 30 223 Z 240 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Controlle
341. the assigned input connector to see a selection of different signal tags or page connectors 128 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Using Function Blocks to Build a Control Safety Strategy Page Connectors Page Connectors Note The Page Connector feature is available only in configurations for HC900 C30 C50 revision 2 0x and higher Introduction A Page Connector lets you connect a signal from a worksheet page to another page and across worksheets Page connectors are similar to signal tags except they do not appear in any signal tag lists They are tags but they have no descriptors decimal places or alarm event notification properties You can rename them Page connectors can be monitored The Watch Summary window has a tab for page connectors Procedure Right click on white space in your function block diagram and select Drop Other Items Page Connector OR From the Worksheet Toolbox group Other Items drag and drop the Page Connector symbol lI to a blank spot on the controller configuration OR Right click on a function block output pin Drops the page connector down and automatically connects it to the pin Skip to Step 3 Click any output pin of any function block to make a connection An output pin can have multiple signal tags and or page connectors attached to it The output page connector appears with a D04 4 goood O104 003 default number Drop a connecto
342. the list provided or from the Monitor toolbar a 2 The Serial Port S1 Diagnostic Summary dialog box will appear It shows Port Status Diagnostics Statistics and parameters for the Serial Port S1 Configuration Port This window can be launched from the Utilities Worksheet 3 The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list 4 Click on X to exit box Refer to the Serial Port S1 Configuration Port Diagnostics Status Indicators for status indications possible cause and actions to correct the problem Configuration Port Diagnostics rite 236 Parameter Port Diagnostic Port Status Messages Recenved Data Link Errors Application Errors Protocol Port Baud Rate S600 Port Enabled ON Double Register Format Big Endian Unit Address Clear Statistics OFF HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics Serial Port S1 Configuration Port Diagnostics Status Indicators The Serial Port S1 Diagnostic Summary dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list Possible Cause Controller Action Serial Port S1 Good N A N A Port Diagnostics Revision 15 September 2013 Data Link Failure A large number of messages are resulting in data link errors 1 Rack 1 monitor block s COMPORT DIAG is set to FAILED 2 Rack 1 monitor block s RACK OK pin is turned off 3 ASYS block s HW OK
343. the low end of the Al 5 The Instrument Status section of the dialog will display the results of the calibration 6 If the 0 calibration was successful the 100 button is now available Set the reference supply to the reference value shown Click on Cal 100 to calibrate the high end of the Al 7 Ifthe Cal 100 calibration was successful the Save Cal button is then available Click on Save Cal to save the current set of calibrations for the selected Al 8 If either calibration fails the Instrument Status section will display an Al Calibration Failed message Check connections The Reference section will display a wrong Rack Module and channel reenter Addresses 9 Click on Close Note Click on Restore Factory Calibration button to do same NOTE Refer to the Calibration section in the HC900 Installation and User Guide for additional Hardware details Calibrate CJ Temp The Calibrate CJ Temperature tab allows you to ensure the Cold Junction calibration is correct To calibrate a CJ Temperature 1 Enter a Rack Module and Channel 2 At CJ Temperature enter the actual ambient temperature measured at the Al pins 3 Click on Select CJ Input The program will then poll the controller to see if the selected Al exists If the Al is found the Cal CJ button will then be available 4 Click on the Cal CJ button to initiate the calibration The status of the calibration is displayed in the Instrument Status section
344. they are located on e All both Process and Safety worksheets e Process e Safety For all controller types there will be a pull down selector which allows the type of I O point to be selected Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Digital Inputs Digital Outputs For each Input Output in the selection list its Rack Module Channel Number Block Name Tag Name Descriptor Value and Status are displayed in the table as shown below NOTE Only assigned inputs and outputs are shown in this window Inputs and outputs whose rack module and channel that are all zero are not shown in this window These unassigned inputs and outouts are shown on the controller worksheet however Watch Summary xj Show fan Digital Inputs 2 Oh 3 BDI105 OFF KIEN ea E Inputs T Outputs For SlL compliant controller types the rows of data will be colored coded I O blocks located on a Safety worksheet will be displayed with a yellow background whereas I O blocks located on a Process worksheet will be displayed on a white background You can Force an I O by clicking on a value and entering a new value for an analog input or selecting the appropriate user configured OFF or ON label from a drop down menu for a digital input or output A checked box and the word FORCED will appear in the Status column indicating that the I O is forced Click off the value cell to see the box Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 215
345. tion Lets you select a Port and Controller Network Address from the drop down menus e Allows you do a Loopback to check the communications connections e Allows you view and reset the communications statistics e Allows you to Dial nang up the modem PC Port Setup Lets you set up a Network Port and up to 8 Comm Ports or Modems Controller Utility Functions The upper part of the Utilities Worksheet contains the Controller Utilities Functions It has list of Icons that will launch dialog boxes for the following utilities Controller Diagnostics Select from drop down menu options are only available in Monitor Mode Controller Diagnostics See page 219 Rack Diagnostics see page 227 Controller Ports Diagnostics see page 235 Modbus Port Diagnostics Modbus Master Serial Port Diagnostics see page 248 Modbus TCP Initiator Port Diagnostics see page 251 Forced Blocks see page 198 Redundancy Redundancy System see page 281 Redundancy Link see page 282 Lead CPU see page 283 Reserve CPU see page 286 Scanner 2 Link see page 287 Upload from Controller Configuration Upload transfers a configuration FROM the controller TO the PC See page 36 Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 137 September 2013 Utilities Worksheet Uploading a File from the Controller ICON FUNCTION REFERENCE Download to Downloads a saved configuration controller firmware or scanner Controller firmware
346. tion Block Diagram Go To Displays the Enter Page Number dialog box and allows you to enter the page Shortcut CTRL G number to which you want to go 1 20 View Menu Menu Selection Toolbar Displays or hides the toolbar in the top of the Main window a box with V mark indicates display Status Bar Displays or hides the status bar at the bottom of the Main window Gray box with V mark indicates display File Browser Displays or hides the File Browser at the top left of the Main window Gray box with icon indicates display Worksheet Toolbox Displays or hides the Worksheet Toolbox at the bottom left of the Main window Gray box with icon indicates display Tabs separate fast scan and normal scan function block types Allows you to view the Traceback list Phone Book Opens the Select the Number to Call dialog box Lets you add and delete phone number on the list Network Device List Lets you setup a PC Network Port for interface to a specific controller See PC Network Port Set Up PC Serial Port Setup Lets you setup up to 8 PC Serial Comm ports for interface to a specific controller See PC Serial Com Port Setup Grid Displays or hides a Grid on the FBD Worksheet Lets you Zoom in out to see more of a document Zoom levels of 50 75 100 125 and 150 Also available from FBD worksheet toolbar Lets you zoom in to return items to normal size Zoom levels of 50 75 100 125 and 150 Revision 15 HC900 Proces
347. tion Code 3 Read Input Registers Function Code 4 Write Multiple Holding Registers Function Code 16 125 Overview The Modbus RTU Master Advanced protocol provides enhanced data throughput for applications where the HC900 is being used in conjunction with a Modbus to fieldbus gateway device In these applications the gateway acts as a Modbus slave to the HC900 controller The Modbus data is connected into the HC900 control strategy using the Modbus Read Modbus Write and Modbus Slave function blocks In order to achieve the enhanced data throughput the HC900 communicates with the gateway using large packets of contiguous Modbus register addresses This packetization technique allows the HC900 to exchange data with the gateway at rates up to the analog cycle rate of the controller depending on the operating characteristics of the gateway device The packet sizes can be adjusted to match the specifications of the gateway slave device Differences from standard Modbus RTU 140 There are several important ways in which the Advanced protocol differs from the standard Modbus RTU Master protocol 1 Under the Advanced protocol the Modbus register data is written to the slave devices during every Modbus Master scan cycle This behavior is different than the standard Modbus RTU Master protocol where the data is written only when the slave block s Enable pin is ON 2 The Enable pins on the Modbus function blocks do not contro
348. tion Overview The sequencer function block controls the output statuses of up to 16 digital outputs and one auxiliary analog output Each combination of outputs represents a state of the sequence such as Heat Mix or Cool for example The function block supports up to 50 states e g PURGE FILL HEAT etc The sequence contains up to 64 steps Each step enables a state allowing for a state to be designated for several steps A pool of 20 sequences up to 64 steps each may be stored in controller memory for quick recall and assignment to any of the 4 sequencers Each state supports two of digital events as inputs that can designate the end of the associated step Time in seconds or minutes a manual advance or a digital event can be used to terminate a sequencer step and cause the sequence to advance The operational sequence for the steps is retained in a separate sequence file in the memory pool of the controller that may be selected on demand through a user interface or via a recipe variables Configuration Functions Basic functions that you will use to configure a Sequence Sequence Editor Create Edit a Sequence under the File New or File Open menus Accesses the Sequence Editor Sequence Pool When you select Sequences from the Recipe menu the Sequence Pool dialog box will be displayed Through this display you will add a new sequence or delete an existing one and also enter the properties function and the Edit Sequence functi
349. tions that affect the display of the configuration such as zoom Displays the Print Report Dialog box Lets you choose reports for printing from 5 different categories Controllers Function Block Diagrams Displays Recipes Alarms and Events Opens Help Topics Table of Contents and Help information screen Worksheet Displays or hides the Worksheet Toolbox Window Toolbox Displays or hides the File Browser Window Traceback Displays or hides the Traceback Window Window Monitor Mode Enters Exits Monitor Mode and allows On line Monitoring and Diagnostics When pressed the active configuration is in the Monitor mode and cannot be edited When not pressed the active configuration is in the edit mode Download Opens the Download File dialog box Press start to Download file selected to the controller Upload Opens the Upload File dialog box Press start to Upload file selected from the controller 28 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 User Interface Navigational Tools Navigational Tools Navigational Tools available Main Menus and Main Window Toolbar File Browser Window Worksheet Category Tabs Worksheet Toolbars Controller Display Function Block Diagram Utilities Find Go To Function Block Help right mouse click on block Connection Traceback Window Finding an Item on the FBD Worksheet Hot Links Keyboard Navigation Right Mouse Click Shown below are the rig
350. to other blocks whose output parameters can be configured as inputs to other function blocks and so on By configuring and connecting all the desired input signals and function block parameters you develop control strategies for both analog and digital operations A function block may represent a physical input or output several inputs or outputs an internal calculation or an internal function such as a PID algorithm A single controller configuration may have up to 400 CPU C30 or 2000 CPU C50 or 5000 CPU C70 C70R C75 user defined blocks Block numbers 1 100 are reserved for specific status blocks Function Block Identification Each Function Block has a type identification label of up to 5 characters assigned by during configuration The label is an abbreviation for the operation or algorithm that the block performs and indicates the block number assigned Function Block Inputs and Outputs Inputs Function Block Inputs must be connected to a signal source Valid sources to a function block input parameter are Signal Tags Variables Soft Wires Constants Page connectors Inputs enter the block from the top or left hand side Note that unconnected inputs will default to O or OFF Outputs Function Block Outputs are signals that reflect the results of a function block s execution Outputs can be connected to any number of function block inputs including inputs on the same block but they cannot be connected to an output of
351. tor key Monitor parameters of the selected Function Block Forced Blocks Toggles the Forced Block Summary Window Window that lets you see all Window the function blocks that have forced outputs All Function Block Lets you toggle the function block windows that are open Display or Hide Windows Lets you toggle display hide monitoring values numeric or On Off state at all input and output pins that are shown All Monitor Lets you toggle the Monitor windows that are open Display or Hide Windows How Do Start Monitoring Procedure Either upload the configuration from the controller to your PC or Open the file from disk that matches what s in the controller Designer will inform you if the file you opened is not currently loaded in the controller In this case limited monitoring capabilities will be available For example you won t be able to monitor function blocks or bring up the Watch Summary Window Press the MONITOR button on the main toolbar The Enter Monitor Mode dialog box will open Note While in monitor mode you won t be able to edit the configuration For example you won t be able to add or delete function blocks move items on the Function Block Diagram or change configuration parameters of function blocks on their property pages You will however be able to view the configuration parameters of function blocks on their property pages but these values arent being read from the controller They exist o
352. totacesneeseceete cbs 7 Connecting the PC to the Contolera N 8 Sr MIN hare Se seer ste ac eee seers secs seciaseeiseccee esse eee san esssseauedusacasesteccueeees 9 User Interface Overview ccccccccccccccccececccecccccccaccucecececacacecececseacauauaetacstenscecauauceecenenes 9 General TernminOlOQy erscwesenncarguenssreuncanueracnasauaastsaivedwanssuleyhonnuanuennsdudeandburt NERELER 10 File Browser VV IN GOW eso fo eid hae tects ee ads Seed G state a a ttc ccna a eet a teal a dele Sera 11 Worksheet Toolbox Window ccccececececccecccccececucucucucauauauaecenecececeeaeueauauauaeaeneneneceneees 12 Traceback WINGOW ccccccecececcccccecececucucucueueuuauauaunenenecececucueueauauaeauauaenenenececenseaeaeanaeans 15 Walch Summary VVINGOW asst 20c 2eciaszccducaseracedesedecetehucincddbecdadsucesastecaa tense dadeedeotteccceacetan dens 16 SUIS el ache ccacaneecrcsuteacstacccse anus seen sass sicee ganna a 17 Menu GOMVENTIONStesocsaiveracsnenSiewaGiradtabsteiteondiiceeonadauaheteeusanverneedes dudes Halen A A Aa aa 17 SEISCUING AMen siina a a a aiiatet 18 Fo Koil ale ies MEning E ne ree ee eee reer 18 Wie WIC TU E E ees AEEA EA A AA AE A E bol taal hes ete he eaten seta alle Aneel a 18 FIST ec faactrcavcmecehan ana e rca vern Maatams tanita a E deve a aintewaetun nad ae emteurtte ence 19 EEMO eta eun eect a ede nace nadienecnacd tacsauetetteain sauuande ae nautceeeutenk ees 21 VEW Me eana eee a a nett a ela lteaatanetet 23 MOMO NE
353. trategy Drop the I O blocks as needed but leave the physical address 0 0 0 Download and debug the strategy then Configure the physical I O addresses You can use some combination of these 2 methods the Designer and Controller is flexible and will accommodate either approach See Rack Module and Channel Assignments General Steps to Build a Control Safety Strategy Introduction Configuration is the process of creating editing a Control Safety Strategy best suited for your application using Function Blocks Variables and Constants Operator Interface Display assignments Setpoint Programs Schedules Sequencers and Recipes Data Storage Alarm and Event configuration The configuration is essential to the controller since it defines your control strategies and operational displays Following are the steps of the configuration process as determined by the tasks required Develop the Control Safety Strategy using Function Block Worksheets Select the Function Blocks Variables and Constants needed to meet the control safety strategy requirements oe Soft wire the outputs to the inputs p83 Assign signal tags to block outputs needed on displays oa Enter annotations as needed on the diagram 5 conte te uneton biok parameters roeded to defne the operating chess e omorene seinor O e conte nme andeens O e smemo O o oomme O Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 117 September 2013 Using Functio
354. trol Digital Tagged Signal Start Stop of both Trends Configuration Procedure Select the TREND tab on the Data Storage Configuration dialog box Batch Enable This signal starts and stops storage for Trends configured for Batch storage It does not affect Continuous storage selection From the pull down menu select NONE Batch is started stopped only through the operator interface s Data Storage Control Menu defaults to Stop on configuration download ANY DIGITAL TAG Batch is started stopped only through the on off state of the selected Digital Signal It will not appear on the operator interface s data Storage Control Menu For detailed information concerning Data Storage Enable refer to Data Storage Enable Conditions Group Use the pull down menu and select a Trend Group for configuration Enter a Group Title There is a maximum of 24 characters Note This is not displayed on the Operator Interface It only serves as a reminder for the user Enter a File Name There is a maximum of 8 Aloha Numeric characters DOS File Name restrictions Tag List From the Tag List drop down menu select the type of signals you want the tag list to display Click on a Tag Name and click ADD gt gt The tag name will be added to the Selected Tags list Selected Tag Scaling Signals Scale each tag selected for High and Low values for the Trend Display Click on the Scale High and Scale Low fields and ente
355. ts Conversely if you convert a non safety configuration to a safety enabled configuration then a blank safety worksheet will be added to the configuration Creating Other File Types See sections for details Create Edit Recipe Variables Create Edit Setpoint Profile Create Edit Setpoint Schedule Create Edit Sequence Create Edit Data Storage Settings Back up Controller Information Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 35 September 2013 File Management Converting HC900 Configurations Converting HC900 Configurations You cannot download a configuration saved as one HC900 controller model to a controller of a different model You must first convert the configuration before doing a download Conversion Procedure 1 With the configuration file open select SAVE AS from the FILE menu The Save As dialog box will open 2 From the drop down menu in the Save as Type field select the type of Controller configuration that you want to convert TO See table below 3 Select SAVE 4 lf there is a problem with the conversion from C50 to C30 the Conversion Error dialog box will appear indicating what the error is For example Too many Loop Blocks Greater than 400 User Function Blocks Expansion Rack used in Configuration Configuration hcan Rey 1 Gonfigi 031081759 ode The conhourshon coud not be converbed bo the selected device type and revision Dick onan emo
356. ts for each step of the program Each segment can turn on segment events to provide ON OFF signals through a Setpoint Program Events SPEV control block that is used in conjunction with an SPP block Each Profile carries its own unique number and a name for identification The names are descriptive references aliases and uniqueness is not enforced Unique names are recommended to avoid operator confusion Using the software you can set the setpoint values soak times guaranteed soak band ramp rates and event action for individual setpoint profiles in configuration and access the information through the Setpoint profile display in the operator interface This means that an operator can adjust individual ramp and soak segment seitings during operation but the general profile configuration including number and name is under configuration control However any changes made through the SPP Operate display to a program that is running in an SPP block will not be written as changes in the program configuration 162 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Set Point Programming Setpoint Program Configuration Overview Setpoint Program Configuration Overview Introduction Setpoint Program Profile configuration provides a quick and easy way to create edit and save up to 99 different ramp soak setpoint profiles for the Setpoint Programmer SPP control blocks in the configuration An operator can interac
357. ttery pin is turned off Real time Clock Diagnostics Bad date and time Same as above Program RTC Not Programmed Bad Data Cycle power Replace CPU Replace boards in rack 5 Replace rack Failure Port S1 S2 Diagnostic 284 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Redundancy Lead CPU Status Indicators Data Link Error A large number of SYSTEM MONITOR 1 Check baud rate messages are block s HW OK pin is 2 Check connectors resulting in data link turned off 3 Check cable errors polarity 4 Isolate cable from electrical interference 5 If RS232 to RS485 converter used check its power switch jumper settings and polarity The UART is failing Replace the to operate properly controller CPU module lt gt Lead Port E1 E2 N A Network Port Diagnostics Hardware Failure Ethernet port tests failed during power up Rack Comm Good See Expansion O mm Diagnosti agnosie Status Indicators Data Link Failure See Expansion I O mm Diagnosti Indi r Hardware Failure See Expansion I O Comm Diagnostics Indi r Port A B Cable See Expansion I O Mismatch Comm Diagnostics Indi r Same as above Replace CPU module l Protocol Mismatch See Expansion I O Comm Diagnostics Status Indicators Scanner2 Rack n No Comm See Scanner 2 Link Network Status Status Indicators Marginal Port I O See Scanner 2 Link A Status Indicators
358. ttons that allow forced outputs on the Process and Safety worksheets to be cleared independently In either case a warning message similar to the one shown below will be displayed requesting confirmation before the action is taken Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 199 September 2013 On Line Monitoring Forced Blocks Window Designer Software a j Are you sure you want to unforce ALL of the forced function F blocks as Both versions of the window have a Unforce Selected Item button that allows the output of a single function block to be unforced To enable this button click on the desired function block as shown below Multiple selections using the Shift or Ctrl keys are not allowed i Clear ALL Forces Jocks __Llear PROCESS Forces oar SAFETY Force Clear ALL Forces Unforce Selected ltem 0l 106 Al Y 08 Clicking on the Unforce Selected Item will now clear the forced output on the selected function block In this case the action takes place immediately and no confirmation is required Exiting To close the Force Blocks window click on the X in the top right hand corner See Also Monitor Mode Forcing Unforcing an Output Watch Summary Inputs Outputs Revision 15 200 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 On Line Monitoring How Do Stop Monitoring How Do Stop Monitoring Press the MONITOR button on the main toolbar mret J TE
359. ty usage read protection and worksheet protection password access to individual worksheets Write Protect File Displays the Add Write Protection dialog box Can enter and confirm a password for the selected file Use the check box to turn Write Protect on or off Print Report Displays the Print Report Dialog box Lets you choose reports for printing from 5 different categories Em Controllers Toolbar Function Block Diagrams Shortcut CTRL P Displays Recipes Alarms and Events HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 User Interface Edit Menu MenuSelection Function o Print Report Preview Lets you choose a report preview Print Preview for printing from the 5 categories Controllers Function Block Diagrams Displays Recipes Alarms and Events The selected report is displayed on the screen as it will look when printed Export Report Lets you export reports as files in comma or tab separated format Print Setup Displays Print Setup dialog box Allows user to select printer paper type and orientation Most Recent Files Lists the most recent files that were open Edit Menu cick S e e E Undo Click once to undo the last action Click on the down arrow to see all previous KD actions To undo several actions move mouse to an earlier action and click on Toolbar it all actions from that action forward are undone If you accidentally
360. unctionality will become restricted to adhere to the above mentioned data flow rule An example is the Write Constant block which if placed on a Process worksheet will not be allowed to be configured to write to a block on a Safety worksheet The data flow restrictions will not only be applied at configuration time but will be applied at run time as well in the controller For example SlL compliant controllers will not allow other controllers to write into blocks in the Safety worksheets using the Peer Data function blocks Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide September 2013 Hardware and Software requirements What to Know Before You Start Hardware and Software requirements PC Requirements CPU 1 GHz 2 5 GHz preferred Operating System Windows XP onwards Display Color Minimum resolution 256 color x 1024 x 768 resolution Pointing Device Mouse Trackball or compatible device RAM gt 1GB 512MB preferred Disk Drive CD amp DVD Drive Ports USB 2 0 amp 3 0 Ethernet System Connected to the controller through its Ethernet 10 100 Base T ports RS232 Port Interconnection or RS485 port Cable Termination 10 100 baseT RJ45 Configuration Off line Configuration or with restrictions make incremental configuration changes and download them to the controller without taking the process off line On line Monitoring allows the user to test the developed configuration What to Know Before You Start
361. undo an action use redo Shortcut CTRL Z You can undo only actions that affect the contents of the configuration you can t undo actions that affect the display of the configuration Such as zoom Redo Click once to redo the last Undone action Click on the down arrow to see all Undone actions To redo several actions move mouse to earliest desired action and click on it all actions from that action forward are redone If you accidentally redo an action use undo You can redo only actions that affect the contents of the configuration you can t redo actions that affect the display of the configuration such as zoom a F Toolbar Shortcut CTRL Y Cut Moves the currently selected Process or Safety block diagram items from the current diagram and places them on the clipboard Indicated by a red dotted Ei line Upon pasting the items all links to them e g display references Modbus address recipes are preserved as if they were moved they are not deleted Shortcut CTRL X and pasted as a new copy The only exception to this is if the item is pasted into a diagram on a different configuration Toolbar Copy Copies the currently selected Process or Safety block diagram items from the current diagram and place it on the clipboard Indicated by a blue dotted line Toolbar L amp Shortcut CTRL C Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 21 September 2013 User Interface Edit Menu Pas
362. ve device window Slave details will appear at left 2 Click on the Enable Disable button at the bottom right to enable disable the port scanning of that slave device 250 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Diagnostics Modbus Initiator TCP Port Diagnostics Modbus Initiator TCP Port Diagnostics Displays the status of the Modbus TCP Initiator port if so configured Modbus TCP Initiator Diagnostics Modbus TCF Initiator Port Port Network Fort Status Scanning Modbus Slave Devices Slave Details ID Slave Name Address Parameter Value 1 FURNACE 192 168 1 3 Bad Slave Name FURNACE 2 WATERTANE 192 169 1 45 Bad Clave Address 152 168 1 3 Double Register Format Big Endian Comm Huality Bad Scan Enable NO Enable Button Status 0 000000 In Scan HO Messages Received 0 Data Link Errors 0 Application Errore 0 Enable Close Access Enter Monitor mode and select Modbus TCP Initiator Port Diagnostics from the Monitor menu or through the Utilities tab Controller Diagnostics icon Modbus TCP Initiator port status No Slave Blocks There are no TCPS Modbus TCP Slave Blocks in the configuration Scanning Controller is in RUN or OFFLINE mode and is scanning the Modbus TCP slave devices Slave status Under Modbus Slave Devices click on any slave name left to view its details right Some details show the configuration of the Modbus TCP Slave function block The slave s Status
363. ware Once you have removed the software from its envelope you have accepted the agreement USAGE RIGHTS Your rights with respect to the Software are non exclusive The software may only be used by one user on one computer at a time The software may be transferred to another computer as long as it is only used by one user at a time The Software and its documentation may not be copied or distributed to others You may not create modify alter adapt merge de compile or reverse engineer the Software and you may not remove or obscure Honeywell or other included copyright or trademark notices TERM OF LICENSE This agreement is effective unit terminated Terminate the Agreement by destroying the Software documentation and all backup copies BACKUP COPIES You may make backup copies of the Software The copyright notice s must be included on each backup copy COPYRIGHTS The Software accompanying this manual is protected by United States copyright law The Software documentation is copyrighted You may only copy the Software and the Software documentation for backup or to load the Software onto your computer as part of program execution TITLE TO SOFTWARE AND CONFIDENTIALITY The Software and all copies thereof are proprietary to Honeywell and title thereto remains in Honeywell All applicable rights to patents copyrights trademarks and trade secrets in the Software are and shall remain in Honeywell You may not sell transfer
364. wer than all alarms Alarm priorities were set during Alarm Group Configuration under Alarm Details 2 Low Priority Alarm 3 Medium Priority Alarm 4 High Priority Alarms 5 Emergency Alarm The priority of an event is always indicated as 1 see Event Configuration Attention See Set Controller Network Parameters and follow the wizard to set up a SMTP mail server IP Address Examples Somebody somewhere com receives only priority 5 Alarms only the check box for 5 is checked Aperson somewhere com receives all Alarms and Events all 5 boxes are checked People somewhere com receives only Events only check box for 1 is checked HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Controller Worksheet Unlock the Worksheets Unlock the Worksheets Unlock Worksheets Enter the password to unlock all protected worksheets Oooo Cancel opens the Unlock Worksheets dialog box Enter the password in the field and then press UNLOCK See How to Add Worksheet Protection on page 44 Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 63 September 2013 Display Worksheet Operator Panel Worksheet Overview Display Worksheet Note This section does not apply to the 900 Control Station Operator Panel Worksheet Overview The Operator Panel Worksheet has a Toolbar to launch dialog boxes to configure O I Display Buttons 1 8 Model 1042 1 5 Model 559 and Displ
365. will automatically have those same parameters checked Adding system parameters to custom map Overview If adding system register parameters to the custom map you must click on an address to add them They can not be dragged from the Configuration tab Procedure 1 Select Item Filter System Register 2 Click on an address under Item 3 Select a system parameter 4 If adding time parameters you must add all time parameters to the map one at a time Time parameters must written to as a group therefore you must add all of them to the map The Day of week parameter is optional and can be left out Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 279 September 2013 Modbus Register Addresses Adding system parameters to custom map This page has been intentionally left blank 280 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide Revision 15 September 2013 Redundancy Redundancy System Status Indicators Redundancy C70R C75 controllers networks have their own diagnostics that are accessed under Utilities Worksheet Overview Monitor Menu Redundancy diagnostics are grouped as follows Redundancy System Redundancy Link Lead CPU Reserve CPU Scanner 2 Link Redundancy System Status Indicators The Redundancy System Diagnostics dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the following list Value Possible Cause Controller Action Redundancy Available Normal operation N A N A Status No RSM module Switc
366. y Worksheets Safety Configuration 1 m m Right click on any open file name to make it the active document in the Worksheet Window Right click on any open file and select Close File from the context menu to close it Right click on a Configuration or Backup file name and select Properties from the context menu to view the file properties Expand the branches under any Configuration or Backup file name to display the currently configured worksheets A red lock displayed in the worksheet icon indicates that the worksheet is write protected Double click on a worksheet in the browser to make it the active view in the Worksheet Window Right click on a worksheet to view its context menu The options available on the context menu will depend on the type of worksheet and the current protection status but may include Worksheet Properties Unlock Worksheets Print Worksheet Append New Worksheet Delete Worksheet Reorder Worksheets O O O O O The File Browser Window can be undocked from its default location to the top left of the Worksheet Window and moved to another location by dragging and dropping on the bar above the tree view It can also be hidden or made visible by toggling the state of the mi File Browser option available from e The Main View menu e The Main Toolbar Revision 15 HC900 Process Control Designer User Guide 11 September 2013 User Interface Worksheet Toolbox Window e The worksheet co

Honeywell HC900 Process Control Designer Software User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents